Home

User Manual

1. Auto Configure Status Checking Checking Click Start Scan to begin Stap Helle ate NAA Skip to Hest Hort Address NAA 7 Auto Build GOW View Ports and Protocol You will need to know which COM port s on your computer the instrument s are connected to and the types of instruments If in doubt about this please consult your instrument manufacturer s manual For the appropriate COM port s select the name s of the instrument s under Protocol When you select a protocol for a COM port a Help button is displayed on the same line Click it for help on the driver selected Settings If the default port settings do not match the settings for your instruments click Settings to set up the port BAUD Rate If there is any uncertainty as to the BAUD rate used by the instrument then leave it set to Auto to allow SpecView to try a range of BAUD rates If the BAUD rate is known then set it appropriately TCP IP There is also TCP IP Auto Detection available for some instrument types Start Scan ROO oa Start Scan Click H SpecView will begin to scan the ports and determine what instrument s you have connected As each instrument is found Instrument Views pictures of the instruments will be displayed on the Graphical Display Window GDW behind the Ports and Protocols dialog box When all your instruments have been detected for this port if there are further instruments connected to other COM ports t
2. Then add an action to the every second event already created to subtract StartTime from SpecView Time amp put the result in Duration When the values are displayed on the screen GDW it maybe that more than one decimal place needs to be shown this can be changed using Dynamic Attributes For an example of this please see the Demo configurations on the SpecView CD or contact your SpecView distributor NOTE It is recommended that for events that need to fire every second or every minute a Value based event watching SpecView Time with a test of Changed by a constant value be used instead of a Time based event using Repeat every 14 13 Examples of Time Based Events Examples of Time Based Events This event will trigger every Monday at 6 o clock in the morning Note that it is Enabled by a SpecView boolean User Variable called SpecView AutoRecipeLoad This means that this event will only trigger when that boolean is On Time Based Event Descriptions joza Even Monday 0600 M Event Log Hour Minute second Day OF Week Day Month ear og 00 foo Monday Any Any Any Repeat Repeat every H Hi Examples Event Control W Enable On Boolearr Specview AutoRecipeload Tue C False 0 Choose Disable Event This event will trigger every 10 minutes Time Based Event x Description Ever 10 minutes T Event Log Hour Minute second Day OF Week Day Month ear An
3. Choose the Font Style Size and Color Justification Align the text for best appearance Left Justified Center Justified Right Justified Text aligned to the left Text aligned to the center Text aligned to the right NOTE Numeric Values added to a GDW that INCLUDE the name are LEFT justified Numeric Values added to a GDW that DO NOT include the name are RIGHT justified Object Name Text This information is for SpecView diagnostic purposes only 6 3 16 Trend Chart Drawing Tool Trend Chart Drawing Tool A Draw menu Trend Chart OR Alfa Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions K After clicking the tool the cursor changes to Use the tool as you would to draw a rectangle As you move the mouse the Trend chart appears hu War 22 Click Label for Scale Char tor Cursor 100 10 45 10 55 11 00 11 05 11 10 When you release the mouse button the Trend Chart Attributes box will appear Use this to set up the Trend chart 6 3 17 Bar Chart Drawing Tool Bar Chart Drawing Tool Draw menu Bar Chart OR a a pz Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions After clicking the tool the cursor changes to X Use the tool as you would to draw a rectangle When you release the mouse button the Bar Chart Setup box will appear Use this to set up the Bar Chart Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 122 6 3 18 Buttons Drawing on a GDW Buttons Drawing on a GDW a Use th
4. Variable Based Event Descriptors Cascade Control Log To Event Log Value to watch Master Output Power Choose Test to perform Changed Value to test against e Constant Value o Set Value C Other variable Action 1 Description Calculate SP Trim Event Log Action Parameters Math Function Copy From Choose Master Output Power Multiply Choose SpecView Cascade Gain i Spec iew SP Trim Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 200 Action 2 Description Update Slave SP Event Log Action Parameters Math Function Copy From Choose Slave Setpoint Choose F 5pecWYiem SP Trim se E Slave Setpoint 14 12 Totalizer Totalizer Some instruments have a built in totalizer But if this is not the case then SpecView can be configured to do this for you However it is important to consider what it is that you need SpecView to do for example When should the totalizer result be reset back to zero What is it that is being measured If the instrument does an on off for every unit of consumption then these can be counted If the value is a flow rate then the calculation needs to be done carefully to ensure that the total is a true one A basic totalizer would need a SpecView Number User Variable to store the running total and a Strategy Controller event which would add the current value to the running total
5. Note the Any 5 Any 10 etc that are at the bottom of the Minute and Second lists When possible these should be used in place of the Repeat Every function described below Only use the Repeat every setting with Repeat a gt caution ne oo The event will trigger every 6 hours with IV Repeat every the setting shown What SpecView does is compute when the next event should occur and automatically enter those values into the time and day fields If the first event was set to be 06 00 on Monday as shown above and it is March 5 2002 when the event is first triggered SpecView will compute that the next event will be Hour Minute second Day OF Week Day Month Year jiz a foo foo Monday a 5 March a 02 a If SpecView is not in Runtime Mode at that precise moment the event will be missed and will never be triggered again The user will need to re edit the Strategy Controller event to get it to trigger again NOTE It is recommended that a Value based event watching Spec View Time with a test of Changed by a constant value be used instead of a time based event using Repeat every Using Event Control Enable On Boolean to do an AND function with a time based event Event Control allows an AND function with a secondary boolean Event Control M Enable On Boolear Specview Auth ecipeload a Twell False 0 Choose For example Every Monday at 06 00 AND SpecView AutoRecipeLoad On I
6. aa oo on GD RECIPE 4 Set On Recipe Download Success Recipe Download OK M Set On Recipe Download Fail Recipe Download Fail Recipe Download Booleans SpecView User Variables booleans can be set on success or fail of a Recipe download This most often used when a Recipe is downloaded unattended using the Strategy Controller NOTE The user must arrange for the booleans to be turned off either manually or using the Strategy Controller 6 4 24 Recipe Show Recipe Manager Recipe Show Recipe Manager This Button Attribute will display the Recipe Manager The same action as the Recipe Recipe Management menu 6 4 25 Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Mode This Button Attribute will display the Recipe Manager in the Read Only mode this prevents the user from being able to change or create new recipes Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 133 SpecView User Manual 6 4 26 Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Send To Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Send To Mode This Button Attribute will display the Recipe Manager in the Read Only Send To mode This is used when there is more than one identical instrument that the recipe could be sent to and allows the instrument s to be chosen This will only send instrument variables to the specified instrument it will not affect SpecView User Variables This also prevents the user from being able to chan
7. Logging access from button 127 OPC Browser 227 Logging Alarms 172 Options Menu 80 Logging Convert Specific Log File Format 126 Outline Weight Thhickness 116 Logging Events 173 P Logging On Off 126 Logging Purge Log Files 127 Logging Menu 78 Parameter List 73 Logging Rate 165 Parameters Alter Value Interactively 127 Logo s on GDW s 119 Parameters Copy From To 127 LogRate SpecView variable 101 Parameters Download Specific Value 128 M Parameters Math Function 129 E iz Parameters Show Full Parameter List 131 Password Button to Log In Out 132 Manual Configuration 13 45 Password Menu 79 Manually Defining Instruments 50 PasswordLevel SpecView variable 101 Master Set Points 127 129 Passwords 158 Math Functions 129 PasswordTime SpecView variable 101 Menus Configuration Mode 83 PasswordUser SpecView variable 101 Minimum Requirements for running SpecView 236 Performance Instrument variable update rate 239 Minimum Requirements for running SpecView Pointer 117 Networking 44 Preferences 151 Modbus 2 16 53 Preferences Alarm 154 Modbus PLC support 50 Preferences DDE 157 Modbus TCP IP 16 53 Preferences Debug 157 Modem 36 Preferences Display 153 Most Recent SpecView variables for recipe 101 Preferences History 155 Multiport Option 255 Preferences Logfile Conversion 157 Z N Z Preferences Logging 154 Preferences Recipe 155 Preferences Remote 152 Preferences Runtime 151 Preferenc
8. C Modem Hayes Accura 56K Ext Speakerphone Modem W Dialing Properties our Location My Location H T Configure Line Country Code United Kingdom 44 ssi lt isY Area Code lees M Use Country Code and Area Code Call Humber to dial Redial attempts po Reconnect on tai Timeouk E0 sees Inactivity timeout Auto log off 5 ming Update rate l2secs Facket timeout 5 SECS Facket size 8000 bytes y Packet count 50 User name PO Password Po Help Lancel Calling Card None Direct Dial The Description can be any name This name will be appended to the name of the configuration from the Local computer when the configuration is copied to the Remote For example if this name is Production Line PC and the configuration is called Batch Run then the name of the Local configuration once it is copied to the Remote will be Batch_Run_Production_Line_ PC This is to distinguish between identically named configurations copied from different computers Network Enter the IP address or network name of a PC running SpecView Local or click Browse SpecView s default TCP IP port number is 3413 it is recommended to use this as it is registered with http www iana org assignments port numbers and therefore should not conflict with other communications software running on the PC To confirm the address is correct click the Check button The Check button will only check that the other computer is con
9. ES poo e Je Current Value 00 00 00 HH MM SS I Auto Close Close Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 73 SpecView User Manual Time variables are entered in the selected format LHH MM 55 El or HA MM El When the Date and or Time have been entered click the Send button The maximum values for the different types of variables are detailed in SpecView Variables If an error occurs read Error Codes 5 8 Parameter List Parameter List The Instrument View on the GDW is a representation of the instrument itself and as such the buttons on it have similar functions Typically one of the buttons on the Instrument View will display the complete Parameter List showing the values for all the variables for the instrument Hurnidit Monitor 1 Zone 1 53 E En EA o Pa T JC I Eme The particular button on the Instrument View that displays the Parameter List depends on the specific instrument so some experimentation may be needed Once the Parameter List is shown if some of the parameters appear to be missing then it may be because it is just the abbreviated list of frequently required variables To display the full list use the Options Menu and select the Short List menu command All the parameters will appear Choose this menu item again to toggle back to the short list mode The Full Names check box on the dialog box switches between a mnemonic and full name mode Barrel Zone 1 Fu
10. 14 22 43 Net Tx 0 00kb Ae 027kb 01 0 The time is the time that the last updated value on the Local was updated so this is the real data time lag If this stops then there may be a network fault The Tx and Rx show the data rate in kb kilobytes going across the connection The Q shows the size of queue of data trying to be sent to the Local If the queue size increases to above 20 then there may be a problem with sending data to the Local The Local s Status bar shows the same information as above but for the total of communication with all Remotes From the Local to see information about individual connections use the View Connected Users menu command on the Remotes menu Remote Users Attached List nine 3413 092 168 1 9 Build Connection Duration Bran Bld 4745 32 08 19 2002 12 50 51 DueRx0 00kb TxO 25kb HOO MOO LOO HSO MSOLSO Iri John Bld 745732 08 19 2002 1725219 DueRx0 00 b Tx0 51 b HOO MOO LOO HSO MSO LSO Iri The columns show The User ID The version of SpecView running on the Remote Date amp time the connection was made The Queue sizes column shows Rx0 00kb Tx0 25kb Receive amp Transmit data rates kb sec HQ0 MQ0 LQO High Medium Low queue sizes HSO MSO LSO High Medium Low packet sizes NOTE that the name of the computer and port number are displayed in the title bar of this dialog This can be used to check that these are correctly set on the Remote if there is difficulty
11. Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 135 SpecView User Manual Either specify a filename to write to in the Filename box or use a SpecView Text variable from the list of currently defined Text variables for the filename NOTE The filename must not contain spaces To write to a filename which is specified by the date see below On some printers it is possible to print directly to the printer by setting the filename to the name of the printer for example LPT1 or for a network printer print servenepson a Form Feed can be added to the end of the text using the Control Codes drop down menu described below It is also possible to write to a COM port by setting the filename to for example COM2 Check the Append box to append to an existing file or check the Replace box to overwrite or create a new file The Command box defines the line s to be written to the file Any text can be entered together with variable names which are added using the Choose button These will be enclosed in a pair of percent signs such as Y varname and will be substituted at runtime The number of decimal places to be used for Numbers with decimals is specified in Preferences Runtime under Line Writer DP This setting will then apply to all Numbers with decimals NOTE The Line Writer requires that any variables you include in the items are on a screen GDW that is always open If you fail to put a variable on a GDW then i
12. SpecView User Manual Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 3 04 For SpecView Version 2 5 Build 830 32 Disclaimer SpecView software communicates with industrial instrumentation and displays and stores the information it receives It is always possible that the data being displayed stored or adjusted is not as expected ERRORS IN THE DATABASE OR ELSEWHERE MEAN THAT YOU COULD BE READING OR ADJUSTING SOMETHING OTHER THAN THAT WHICH YOU EXPECT Safety devices must ALWAYS be used so that safe operation of equipment is assured even if incorrect data is read by or sent from SpecView SpecView itself MUST NOT BE USED IN ANY WAY AS A SAFETY DEVICE SpecView will not be responsible for any loss or damage caused by incorrect use or operation even if caused by errors in programs supplied by SpecView Corporation Warranties amp Trademarks This document is for information only and is subject to change without prior notice SpecView is a registered trademark of SpecView Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other products and brand names are trademarks of their respective companies Copyright 1995 2007 by SpecView Corporation All Rights Reserved This document was produced using HelpAndManual Contents Table of Contents Foreword 0 1 Installation 1 1 1 Instrument Installation and Wiring ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 1 T2 TAS
13. If an item not available for a log report it is probably not included in logging Add the variable to logging as described in Data logging Variables Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 163 SpecView User Manual Read Disk Space for Logging for file size details Changing the Logging Rate 13 2 Data Logging Variables Data Logging Variables Variables are any items in the Variables List Types include numbers integers boolean on off date time and text This topic tells you how to see what variables are being logged and how to add or remove a variable to from logging NOTE Only variables that have been selected for logging will be available for Log Reports and Historical Replay Which variables will be logged can be selected using the Setup menu View Passwords Setup Window PCSOOO Help Database Show Logging in Variables List Show Alarm in variables List ist GEO Dynamics to COSY Strategy Controller l l ERE Mi eee Save Logging Alarm Details Setup COM Ports Load Logging Alarm Details y Check COM Port 1 Set All items on this GD as Logged a 0 Swap COM Ports Export Variables List Import Variables List When the checkmark is by the Show Logging in Variables List a box will appear alongside each item in the variables list To open the Variables list use the tool In the picture below the gray box alongside the instrument name means that at least one variable
14. Toggle DEBUG on COM1 Enable disable debug information on COM1 by setting the driver command DEBUG 1 It is not recommended to change this setting unless under the direction of a SpecView representative Toggle DEBUG on COM2 Enable disable debug information on COM2 by setting the driver command DEBUG 1 It is not recommended to change this setting unless under the direction of a SpecView representative 5 11 10 Zoom Menu Zoom Menu Zoom Window Up Down 100 Up Enlarge the size of the graphics amp text within the GDW Repeatedly selecting this keeps on enlarging Down Reduce the size of the graphics amp text within the GDW Repeatedly selecting this Keeps on reducing 100 Restore to the original size NOTE Do not click the Trend chart cursors vertical lines when zoomed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 82 5 11 11 Window Menu Runtime Window Menu Runtime window Help Cascade Tile Arrange cons WI SPECVIEW GOW Cascade and Tile commands are standard Windows commands to arrange open Windows Arrange Icons has no function in SpecView Select any open GDW listed to switch to that GDW 5 11 12 Help Menu Runtime Help Menu Runtime Help Specviem Help Using Help About Specie Registration Info Release Hotes SpecView Help This menu command starts SpecView s help system and displays the contents page Using Help Starts the help system for Window
15. 55 SpecView User Manual Ports and Protocols Port Protocol E aud Pate comi MOD MUXModues famo y Hep orc come lt None gt 0 Yd to COMS lt None gt tsi Auta y Settings COM4 auto gt COMS eons tsi suto y Lancel come Mene a comz Hons f to comes ime a e coma Hos e d TCPAIP Protocol Honeywell HE300 Fort 502 Timeout SECS Begin End l Auto Configure Status Checking Checking Click Start Scan to begin Stap Helle ate NAA Skip to Hest Hort Address Nee M Auto Build GD View Baud Rate If the BAUD rate is known then set it appropriately If it is left as Auto SpecView will first test different BAUD rates 9600 BAUD then 19 200 BAUD etc for each address for the selected protocol If there is any uncertainty as to the BAUD rate used by the instrument then leave it set to the default shown Either select the protocol required for the COM port or use TCP IP Auto Detection which is available for some types of instrument Auto Build GDW View checkbox When this box is checked an Instrument View is created automatically for each instrument found Do NOT use this feature if you Have more instruments connected than can fit on one screen Intend to rename your instruments Instead Let SpecView detect your instruments After scanning all ports click Stop which will enter Configuration Mode sles vie
16. Can run SpecView from the Windows Startup Group Why am I not seeing all the Instrument Parameters expect to see in the Parameter List The Trend Chart doesn t appear to be updating why might this be FAQ SpecView Configuration Can develop complex screen s for one instrument e g Furnace1 then copy it them for another instrument of the same type e g Furnace2 Double clicking on an item on the GDW seems to have no effect when usually it would display the relevant attributes box for that item can t seem to add a variable on a GDW into Recipe can t seem to edit a value s Dynamic Attributes Changing the color of text on the screen using Object gt Text Font doesn t appear to have any effect How do configure SpecView Networking Remote Local What can do if Auto detect doesn t work for my instrument How do do a Strategy Controller event every second How do do a Strategy Controller event every minute My variables list box doesn t appear why not How do animate a graphic using the Strategy Controller How do make clicking somewhere on a GDW do a button type action I ve set the Fill Color of a shape but it isn t being filled why Why is it that using the Edit gt Paste of an object doesn t appear to work What can do if comparing an instrument value with decimal places with an integer in the Strategy Controller doesn t work Can get SpecView to send
17. Zones o Process Value o Setpoint o Error Parameter to Alter 6 4 18 Parameters Copy From To Parameters Copy From To This Button Attribute will value of the first variable to the second variable In the example below the setpoint of Barrel Zone 2 will be copied to Barrel Zone 3 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 128 Caption Copy Zone 2 SF to Zone 3 F hey lt None Archon Copy From Choose Copy To Choose The Copy Value Button attribute or Strategy Controller action will copy a value from one parameter to another In general the source and destination of the copy should be the same type but some type conversions are allowed as Number with Int Decimals are truncated decimals Time Number with Number of seconds is used for example copying 00 01 02 decimals gives 62 0 Number with Time Number of seconds is used opposite of above decimals Any Type Text The Text is setup with what would normally be displayed on a GDW for the Copy From type For example copying a time might give text with the contents 00 01 02 Copying a boolean type might result in the word Manual in a Text variable A DateTime might give Sunday July 8 1997 08 00 00 Number with The first number found in the text is used For example if decimals the Text contains 66 1 then 66 1 is used If the text contains 4 5 then 4 0 is taken If the text has 1 2Frea
18. Download the multiple file version if the computer s you intend to install it on is not the same as the computer which is connected to the internet and the only way to transfer files between the computers is by using floppy disks The multiple file version can be also used if there is a likelinood that the internet connection could be lost during the download If this is the case unzip all files into a single temporary folder on your hard disk and run SETUP EXE Single file download Download the single file unzip using for example WinZip it into a temporary folder and then run SETUP Newer versions of WinZip may run SETUP EXE automatically for you For example for SpecView version 748 the file is sv748_all zip 13 5Mb Multiple file download for floppy disks Download all the individual files into a temporary folder on your hard disk For example for SpecView version 748 the files are sv748 1 zip sv748_2 zip sv748_3 zip sv748 4 zip sv748_5 zip sv748_6 zip sv748_7 zip sv748_8 zip sv748_9 zip sv748_10 zip Once they have been downloaded extract each of them DIRECTLY onto individual separate totally empty floppy disks NOTE Do not COPY the ZIP files onto the floppies as they will not fit they MUST be EXTRACTED to the floppies The example below is for WinZip which is not included with SpecView but it can be obtained from http www winzip com To extract them use Windows Explorer to list the downloaded files
19. Event Control W Enable On Boolean Spec iew Alarm Check i True 1 C False 0 l Disable Event l Startup Event Examples Cancel OF This event is watching the SpecView variable SpecView NewAlarm When it is On There IS a New Alarm AND the SpecView User Variable Alarm Check is On the event will trigger The use of event control would allow the user to disable this event by turning Off the SpecView Alarm Check variable The appropriate action is shown below The variable Digital I O New Alarm Relay will be set to On Description en T Event Log OF Action Parameters Download Specific Value ar Specviewy ar Booth 1 Control er Booth 1 Prog Relays Big Output 1 8 Dig Output 2 Relaus Dig Qutout 1 o Dig Output 3 AE o Dig Output 4 Value On a Sy Yerhodule Parameter to Alter 14 10 Count Up Timer Count Up Timer Many timing functions can be done using a SpecView User VariableCountdown Timer A value can be set to the Countdown Timer by Entering a value to it on a GDW Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 197 SpecView User Manual Assigning a value as an action following a strategy event It is sometimes more convenient to use a count up rather than count down timer and this can be made using the Strategy Controller 1 Define two SpecView time User Variables name one Timer and the other Time 1s Give the Time 1s variable a default value of
20. GOW Control Zoom in GOW Control Zoom out GOW Control Print Screen History Start Replay Logging Convert Specific Log File Format Logging On Off Logging Purge Log Files Logging Show Log File Convert Manager Parameters Alter Value Interactyely Parameters Copy From To Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Math Function Parameters Show Full Parameter List Password Log In or Log Out PCS000 Sequence Recipe PC3000 Sequence Recipe from String Z Button Caption This is a function of the Button Attributes dialog box Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 123 SpecView User Manual Enter the text you want on the button Function Keys This is a function of the Button Attributes dialog box Select a Function Key to have the same action as clicking on the button Button Bitmap and Resize to fit text check boxes Allows the button to contain a bitmap instead of text Button Text Font 8 Background Color Allows the button s font and color to be defined Button Actions Those marked with an asterisk are not available from the Strategy Controller Alarm On Off Alarms Show Alarm List Events Show Event List GDW Control Close this and Swap To GDW GDW Control Close this screen GDW Control Swap to another GDW GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode GDW Control Zoom in GDW Control Zoom Out GDW Control Print Screen History Start Replay Logging Convert Specific Log File F
21. If copying objects doesn t preserve Dynamic Attributes amp Color Dynamics How do copy them It is not recommended to copy amp paste items on a GDW which have Dynamic Attributes associated with them these include all instrument variables Bar charts amp Trend charts or shapes amp objects that have been assigned Color Dynamics Setup the Color Dynamics after copying pasting the object Alternatively to copy whole GDW use the Save As menu command to save the GDW to another name Then if necessary use the Replace menu command on the Edit menu to change the instrument names of the variables for example from Zone1 Setpoint to Zone2 Setpoint Can copy a whole Configuration Yes either use Windows Explorer to copy the Configuration folder or use Archive Restore Adding a bitmap to a GDW makes the GDW much larger why This occurs if a bitmap is added using the Insert New Object menu command on the Edit menu lt is recommended to use the Insert a Bitmap tool on the toolbar or Draw gt Bitmap instead Can write a line of text at the top of a Logfile Report Use the SpecView Write Line to file printer action for a Button or via the Strategy Controller Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 245 SpecView User Manual Use this to write the line you require to a file called say LINE TXT Generate a log report to say REPORT CSV Create a file called say JOIN BAT containing a line so
22. The Grid lines themselves are drawn at intervals of ten times the actual Grid size for clarity Grid Size Changes the Grid spacing Grd Size Grid Size E ee Cancel NOTE If you are putting values in tables set the grid to a larger number than the default value of Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 92 5 before starting this will make it easier to align them Enter the value for a new grid size A larger number a coarser grid The Grid lines themselves are drawn at intervals of ten times the Grid Size for clarity Therefore if the Grid Size is set to 5 then the Grid lines will be drawn every 50 pixels It is possible to disable the grid by setting the Grid Size to zero amp unchecking Grid Lines However although this allows objects on the screen to be positioned manually to within one pixel this requires very precise positioning of the mouse amp so is not recommended Paper Color Changes the color of the GDW background NOTE If you are going to print the GDW leave background as white to save ink Show Objects This toggles the highlighting of objects which have been inserted using Insert New Object from the Edit Menu Show screen sizes Screen sizes line color amp Screen sizes font View Passwords Setup Window PC3000 Help CA EPT Paper Color Show Objects SHOW screen sizes Screen sizes line color Screen sizes font Toolbar
23. a fh hE Nl Choose the Port from the list for example COM1 and enter the Address If in doubt about what to set the address to click Address Help Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 15 SpecView User Manual Modbus instrument addressing Click Create which will display the Port Settings dialog box Port Settings Port Settings ES COMI COM COMS COM4 COMS COME COM Loma COMA Baud Rate 15600 15600 Z gt 15600 15600 15600 15600 sf gt 15600 3600 E 15600 Cancel Parity Driver Driver Driver 4 Driver Driver Driver i Driver 7 Driver 4 Driver delle Enter the Baud Rate and Parity appropriate for the instrument and click OK If in doubt about the values for these please consult your instrument manufacturer s manual NOTE Below is a description of how to use HyperTerminal to test if the COM port that your instrument s are connected to is functioning correctly HyperTerminal may already be installed and may be run from the Start button Programs menu possibly under the Accessories Communications sub menus From HyperTerminal s Connection Description dialog enter any name choose any icon then click OK On the Connect To dialog if you are for example testing COM1 then select Direct to Com1 from the Connect using list box and click OK then click OK on the COM1 Properties dialog leaving the
24. 213 SpecView User Manual To Register a control using SpecView use Object gt ActiveX Control gt Register Controls Click Register and browse to find the control If in doubt about this then please contact the vendor of the control Configurations that contain ActiveX controls which are not yet installed or registered on the PC can now be Restored amp run Although a warning message will be displayed informing the user that the ActiveX controls need to be installed However in this case the screens GDWSs will not be able to be saved after modification unless the missing ActiveX controls are deleted from the GDW See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control 15 11 ActiveX Manage Control List ActiveX Manage Control List MM Manage Active Control List O SenpiControl Object Search Assistant Control SelectFile Class Sethyr Class alero del AE Heke Derant tantra Snapshot Wiewer Control 9 0 Snapshot Viewer Control 9 0 Vaverage Control YODisplap Text Control WEllipze Control i Select All Unselect All Cancel OF This is the full list of all ActiveX controls which have been registered on this PC Those that are selected are the ones to be included in the Insert ActiveX Control box this keeps the list to a manageable size Make Default Control This is enabled when just a single control is selected Checking this will help to reduce t
25. Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 21 SpecView User Manual Variables Variables ar Specview ar Specyview Whe C i gt o Input 2 input 3 Input 4 o input 5 Input 6 o Input T o inputs o TC Type Double click the variable you want to add to the GDW for example Input 1 The variable XXX which will be displayed as the numeric value of the variable in Runtime Mode and its description for example MM8TC Input 1 are displayed in the top left hand corner of the GDW dae put 1 pe When the name of the variable and its value are initially put onto the GDW they are put out as two separate items In order to move them both together to a different position on the screen they will need to be grouped together Brie a IMMBTC Input 1 XX To do this use the Group tool or press G which will group them together then use the mouse to drag them to where you would like them to be positioned on the GDW If you would like to change the name of the variable then it is best to do this from the Variables List dialog BEFORE putting the variable onto the GDW This is done by selecting the variable then clicking the Properties button al In order to change for example the font of the variable s name use the Ungroup tool or press U to ungroup the variable and its description then double click the description to display the Text Attributes dialog box Text Attributes l Arial 16pt 487101 In
26. E17799 Numbers of messages from SpecView s supplementary code E17801 E17899 Numbers of messages from SpecView s logging code Error Codes These are generic Error codes There are also Errors that apply specifically to writing variables to instruments They are listed here 3 Timeout 1460 Timeout Response not received from instrument 10001 Cannot Open Comms Port In use 10002 Cannot Open Comms Port Setup Error 10003 Cannot Open Comms Port Characteristics Error 10004 Failed Write 10005 Incorrect Baud Rate 10006 Cannot Initialize Windows Comms Subsystem 10007 Cannot Save Config 10008 Cannot Start System Timer 10009 Cannot find Folder 10010 Invalid Parameter 10011 Invalid Function Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 221 SpecView User Manual 10012 Address Out of range 10013 Data Out of Range 10014 Parameter Write protected 10022 Cannot Find Required DLL If this error code is given with a message about TCP IP then check the IP address that is selected on the Preferences Remote tab 10023 Historical Replay There is no logged data for the day specified Program Launch Failed WExec error code 2 This error will occur when the SpecView Run External Program action is being used to launch a program for which the file name has been incorrectly specified Similarly WExec error code 3 The path for the file has been incorrectly specified WExec error code 11 The file specified is not in valid
27. Failure 38 SpecView Networking via Modem General 36 SpecView Networking via Modem Modem Types 41 SpecView Networking via Modem Setup 37 SpecView Networking via Modem TAPI Versions 42 SpecView Networking via Modem Using HyperTerminal 39 SpecView Remote 32 SpecView Variables 101 SpecView Variables Pre defined 101 SpecView Variables User Defined 101 SpecView FastCount Variable 106 Starting Historical Replay 126 Starting other Programs from SV 133 Starting SpecView 45 Storing Data 162 Strategy Controller 179 Strategy Controller Definition 257 Strategy Controller Actions 194 Supported OPC Servers 229 Switching to another screen 124 Symbol Library 254 SymbolLibrary 254 T TCP IP Autodetect 56 TCP IP Modbus address 53 Technical Support 234 Test Comms for NEW Configuration 54 Text Attributes 120 Text File Log Reports 166 Text Font 120 TextonaGDW 119 Tile Windows 97 Time SpecView variable 101 Time Based Event Setup 193 Time Based Events Examples 201 Toggle 257 Tooltips 257 Totalizer 200 Touch screen support 236 Trend chart background color 136 Trend Chart Cursors 74 Trend Charts 136 Trend Charts Creating 121 Trend Charts Exact Values 74 Trend Charts Runtime 74 Troubleshooting Instrument Communication 3 59 Troubleshooting Modems 38 Troubleshooting the dongle 253 Turning on Data Logging 162 U UK Contact Numbers 234 Upgrading SpecView 222 Upgrading SpecView from a previous
28. It can be setup so that SpecView Remote will start automatically when the computer is started Or configure a button on a GDW which will run another copy of SpecView in Remote mode By using the button action Run External Program and specifying for example CASV3215V32 EXE r FactoryZone1 In this case the Remote copy of SpecView will start up minimized by default If this is a problem it is possible to change it in the SET TINGS INI file in the configuration s folder Settings RunExtProgDispMode M Where the choices are Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 50 M means start Minimized which is the default F means start using Full screen N means start in a Normal window This setting will affect all programs run from within SpecView e lt file name gt sva This will cause SpecView to run up and go to the Restore dialog with the sva file specified e lt file name gt gdw This will cause SpecView to run up and go online to the configuration in which the GDW is located Launching SpecView by clicking on a GDW file in Windows Explorer can cause the error You cannot use GDW lt file name goes here gt from this location press Yes for details on how to resolve this problem if there is more than one installation of SpecView on this PC This is because the Windows Add Remove programs in the Control Panel can only keep track of one installation If there is more t
29. New Yalue Hello Valued Customer Keyboard Sena M Auto Close Close Click the Keyboard button to use an on screen keyboard When the text has been entered click the Send button Text Variables can contain up to 32 767 characters Changing the value of a text variable which is a Batch Tag will mark the end the current batch amp the start of another Setting a Batch Tag to an empty string in other words clearing it so that it contains no characters will mark the end this batch without marking the start of another An empty string will be displayed on the screen as by default this can be changed from Preferences Display Error Codes 5 7 Data Entry Date and Time Data Entry Date and Time Date and Time variables from SpecView Date and Time User Variables can be edited in Runtime Mode Click the Date and Time to edit Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 72 5pecYiew D ateTimel Current Value 00 00 00 Thursday January 01 190 Mew Value a E Date DMY Time H M 5 Eraze 4 a E Today 1 2 E M Auto Close Close aB 0 f This dialog box shows entry of both Date and Time there are also dialog boxes for entering the Date and Time separately as shown below Spec iew Datel Current Yalue Thursday January 01 1970 af of Date DM Da He cod BE W Auto Close o oe w of i S pecYiew T imel New Value a MIA
30. Recipe Show Recipe Manager Send To Mode SpecView Exit Program SpecView Maximize screen Minimize Screen Restore Screen SpecView Run External Program SpecView Write Line to file printer 7 Full Screen Mode 8 Trend Charts 9 Bar Charts 10 Recipes Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 V Contents V 1077 Recipes A Overview si iii 141 10 2 Selecting Variables to be Included in Recipe ooooncccconnnoncccnononcnccconnnconcnnnannncnnnannnnrennannnennns 142 103 Recipes USING ss 143 104 Recipe War NING csn a aE E aE EE ARENE 144 10 9 Recipe INAINGS e A e aa EEEE Eaa EE 145 10 6 Recipe Descrip lO nsis sia ii 145 10 7 Recipe Hide URIS DOX anciana 146 10 3 Recipe Save amp Save AS ad 146 10 9 Recipe IMpPOrV EXPO iii a 146 1019 RECHE SENO cad ds 147 10 1f Recipe Send TO ii id 148 10 12 Source and Target InstrUMentsS a 148 10 137 Recipe Send To Warning isss ana a 149 10 14 Recipe Send TO Problem S aiii 149 10 15 Setting the recipe download order sssnnssnnnuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 149 10 16 Recien Remote sicn aa ae a a 150 11 Preferences 151 Tet Preferences Dialog BOX ini lilas 151 T1 2 PFETErENGCES RUNTIME da 151 11 3 Preferences Remote iia 152 TLA Preferences DISpla y onpa aS 153 11 9 Preferences Al Mi oarn dev ida a da 154 TLO Preferences LOO GUNG accredited ea eS 154 Te Preferences a MAI dais 154 11 9 Preferences RECIDG noinine aa nie ceustsapncege
31. The Demo Configurations are not included in the downloaded product so they must be downloaded separately from the website by selecting the most appropriate of these for your instrument s The file s you download is a SVA file which is a SpecView Archive To use one of these downloaded SVA files install and run SpecView then at the Configurations Found screen press the Restore button Find the SVA file you have downloaded and restore the configuration into SpecView Once restored these configurations can if required be modified from Configuration Mode However modifications will only affect the restored Configuration folder not the downloaded SVA file therefore the SVA file can be considered as a backup which can be restored again if necessary Diskettes Dana a ce on If you have SpecView on diskettes insert Disk 1 into drive A double click the My Computer icon on your screen open the 3 Inch Floppy Disk and double click the 7 P 2x2 icon NOTE It is strongly recommended to install into the default location C SV32 Download Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Installation 8 Downloading SpecView from http www specview com can be done either by downloading the single file or the multiple file version All files on the website have been zipped therefore you will need to unzip them using for example WinZip which can be obtained from http www winzip com or another utility such as pkunzip
32. Toggle Full Screen Mode GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode Enables amp disables Full Screen Mode Once Full Screen mode has been enabled there will be no menus accessible therefore it is STRONGLY recommended that a button with this action should be added to the GDW to reverse the command This button may be placed on another GDW accessed by GDW Control Swap to another GDW 6 4 9 GDW Control Zoom in GDW Control Zoom in This Button Attribute will zoom in enlarging the size of the graphics text within the GDW This duplicates the function Zoom Up on the Zoom menu This action is not available from the Strategy Controller 6 4 10 GDW Control Zoom Out GDW Control Zoom Out This Button Attribute will zoom out decreasing the size of the graphics amp text within the GDW This duplicates the function Zoom Down on the Zoom menu This action is not available from the Strategy Controller 6 4 11 GDW Control Print Screen GDW Control Print Screen This Button Attribute will cause the selected GDW to be printed O GO Control Print Screen Print IAE Current GOMA JPG SPECVIEW GOW Selecting a GDW from the list will cause just the contents of that GDW to be printed Selecting lt Current GDW gt will cause just the contents of the currently displayed GDW to be printed Selecting JPG will put an image of the whole screen including the Windows task bar if it is visible not just the contents of the GDW to a J
33. a small piece of BASIC code is required to be written For Excel a Macro module can be associated with a button show me how to do this and the following code assigned to that macro This example uses 4 cells to define what and where to write to Set appToPoke Worksheets Sheet1 Range B3 Set topicToPoke Worksheets Sheet1 Range C3 Set itemToPoke Worksheets Sheet1 Range D3 Set valuetopoke Worksheets Sheet1 Range E3 On Error Resume Next Dim Chan Chan DDEInitiate appToPoke topicToPoke If Err Then Exit Sub End If DDEPoke Chan itemToPoke valuetopoke If Err Then Exit Sub End LF DDETerminate Chan For Microsoft Access a button on a form can be used to cause a similar effect This example assumes a small form with 4 input fields has been defined and a button to call this On Error Resume Next Dim Chan Chan DDElnitiate Me App Me Topic If Err Then Bx Sub End IT DDEPoke Chan Me Item Me Value If Err Then Exit Sub End LE DDETerminateAll Return to DDE help topics 16 9 Setting up an Excel DDE Poke Example Setting up an Excel DDE Poke Example This example is for Excel 2000 This is a simple example that sends the contents of Cell A1 on Sheet1 to the SpecView User variable called SpecView Numbert1 1 Open a new Sheet inside Excel 2 Show the Forms Toolbar 3 Choose the Button tool from the Forms Toolbar 4 Draw out a button on the sheet Copyright Soe
34. and for each of them in turn right click and select the Extract to menu command which will run WinZip Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 9 SpecView User Manual Extract Ei ES Extract to Folders drives fa gt El Desktop Spt My Computer Lancel Files ips tape na E Meee 2 Floppy 4 Selected files H Local Disk C Help fF All files H Compact Disc D r AES Ftp_root on Zerozera F H S Nine_c on Nine N E A 3 My Network Places Oyvernanite exteting files My Documents T Skip older files E3 My Briefcase el Hew Folder i M Use folder names Select the Floppy A and click Extract The numbered ZIP files contain numbered CAB files and these numbers will not necessarily match i e the file SV748_6 ZIP may contain Data7 cab NOTE Several of the floppy disk ZIP files contain files that will exactly fill a blank floppy If there is not enough space on the floppy to copy the files over then use a new blank floppy Each of the files when unzipped will fit exactly onto its own floppy disk Newer versions of WinZip can be configured to run SETUP EXE automatically so when you unzip the first file WinZip tries to run SETUP before the other files are unzipped If this happens unzip the files in reverse order or download the single file Once all the floppy disks have been created put floppy 1 into the drive of the computer which you intend to install it o
35. e The Edit menu Cut Copy Paste OR Ctrl X Cut Ctrl C Copy Ctrl V Paste OR The Object menu Save Load Object 6 3 6 Select Tool Select Tool Use the Select menu command from the Draw menu OR click Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions Selects the normal Pointer or Cursor and de selects any drawing tool NOTE The right mouse button has the same action as this function It is a useful and quick way to de select a drawing tool Try drawing a rectangle and then click the right mouse button Click an object to select it a Moving the pointer to one of the handles allows you to re size the object E Eight Handles show that the object is selected 6 3 7 Line Drawing Tool Line Drawing Tool 2 G Draw menu Line OR zl Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions The cursor changes to Click and hold the left mouse button then drag the line to the desired length and direction Click the right mouse button when you have drawn all the objects you want Press and hold the shift key to snap the line to the nearest multiple of 15 degree angles Use the Ctrl Copy feature to make exact copies of the object Double Click the object to edit the Shape Properties Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 118 6 3 8 Rectangle Drawing Tool Rectangle Drawing Tool Draw menu Rectangle OR Li Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions The cursor change
36. fixed to their original size by default Bitmap Attributes es gt Bitmap Attributes es gt Ormamnal CAS 32450590 bro Real Name as above cence Uncheck the Fix to Original Size box Then click OK the bitmap can now be re sized 6 3 14 Text on a GDW Text on a GDW Draw menu Text OR da fA Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 120 Use this command to put static text on a GDW NOT editable in Runtime Mode To put editable text on a GDW use a SpecView Text User Variable Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions The cursor changes to Click on the GDW where you want the text The Text Attributes box will appear Click the right mouse button when you have added all the text objects you want Use the Ctrl Copy feature to make exact copies of the object Double Click the object to edit the Text Attributes 6 3 15 Text Attributes Text Attributes T ext Attributes Text Item Enter the text you want to appear on the GDW To enter a new line hold down the CTRL key while pressing the Enter key Choose Font Selects the font for THIS text To change the font for ALL text you are going to put on the GDW use Text Font on the Object Menu Font Regular amn Fr Arial Alternative Symbc Bold Fr Arial Black Bold Italic Aral Narro F Arial Rounded MT Bol Fr Baskerville Old Face Westem Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 121 SpecView User Manual
37. getting out of G GDW background color 91 GDW Configuration amp Toolbar 83 GDW Control Close when swapping GDW Control Closing 124 GDW Control Print Screen 125 GDW Control Swap to another GDW GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode GDW Control Zoomin 125 GDW Control Zoom Out 125 GDW Setup 159 GDW s Graphical Display Windows 99 Generic Modbus driver 50 Getting data from SpecView DDE 216 Getting Started Drawing Graphics amp Charts GoodComms SpecView variable 101 Grouping objects 115 H HC900 HCDesigner Modbus Map Import 63 Help for specific instruments 2 Help Menu Configuration 97 106 116 16 53 153 124 124 125 114 History Menu 78 IDX log file 164 Importing Graphics from other Programs Insert New Object 113 Installation amp Wiring 1 Installing SpecView 6 12 Instrument 254 Instrument Definition Detection 50 Instrument Parameter Lists 131 Instrument Settings 2 Instrument View 254 Instrument Views Automatically 54 Instrument Views on GDW s 58 119 Internet 235 Key Terms 249 sie Licensing in SpecView 235 Line Writer 134 LNM log file 164 Loading recipe problems 147 LOG log file 164 Log files 164 Log Report Definition 255 Log Report Format 168 Log Report Setup 167 Log Reports 166 Log Reports Specifying decimal places 171 Log Reports from the Remote 168 Logfile Conversion from the Remote 168 263 SpecView32 Main Help
38. making a connection Setting Up SpecView Networking 3 13 SpecView Networking Minimum Requirements SpecView Networking Minimum Requirements SpecView is a 32 bit Windows application that will run on Windows 95 98 NT 2000 Me XP Any computer that runs Windows and programs such as Word or Excel should run SpecView A minimum of a Pentium with 64 MB RAM is recommended Normal SpecView activity does not put any great load on computer performance For SpecView Remote the specification above applies For SpecView Local the number of simultaneously connected users affects the required specification If there are going to be many then more computer power is appropriate hence at least a 400MHz Pentium processor would be required It is almost impossible to exactly specify the requirements because the load on the computer is dependant on what the Local computer s configuration is how much data it is acquiring which screens the Remotes are looking at how many Remotes are connected or what they are doing Coupled with this are any Strategy Controller and Logging overheads As a rough starting point if the PC running SpecView already before Local operation is enabled or used is quick to respond in all areas then a small number of Remotes should not impose any noticeable load If the PC is already feeling slow then it will be a little worse The biggest single effect that may be seen is the situation where the data update rate on the Loc
39. 1 control Prog Time Booth 1 control Seg Runr Booth 1 control Setpoint Species customer Spec view Datel BAUAN Specview FURNACE ST SpecView on line TA lt Aemove All d Output filename aaa LOGRPT plus 00 to 99 C From Specview String E Characters CSW E Output path i Default C From Specview String gt i Fixed Add lt Hemoye T Include arm Log PELE T Include Event Log Stop T ime C Curent Time Start Time Last Conversion of any kind e Var Program Start Time e Yar Program Stop Time a Ensure that the Start Time and StopTime fields use the SpecView User Variables you created in Step1 Step 3 Define the first Strategy Controller event that watches for the start of the program Back in Configuration Mode select the menu Setup Strategy Passwords Setup Window PC3000 Help Controller lolal Database ES M Event Logging Strategy Controller The Strategy Engine box is displayed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 184 Strategy Engine Setup Evert Choose type of Event Click the Value based button Value based Time Based The Value Based Event box is displayed Variable Based Event Description Undefined T Log To Event Log Value to watch Choose Value to test against A Constant Wali 0 ss sscescoescoeereeeeesreesee Set Value C Oth
40. 1 second 2 Add a Value Based event called Every Second The value to watch is SpecView Time and the Test to Perform is Changed by the Set Value of 00 00 00 3 Add an action called Count Up Use Parameters Math function COPY FROM SpecView timer ADD SpecView time1s COPY TO SpecView timer The event occurs every second and one second which is the value of SpecView time1s is added to the value of SpecView timer The Strategy Controller boxes for this example are shown below Event Variable Based Event Description Every Second T Log To Event Log Value to watch Spec yew Time Choose Test to perform Changed Value to test against Constant Value 00 00 01 C Other Variable Ehooee Action Description Count Up Event Log Action Parameters Math Function Copy From Choose LE add Choose si 1s Copy To Specvie w Timer A similar example would be to watch a specific function in an instrument and count the number of times it occurs If it is desired to only have the time count at certain times make it function like a stopwatch the add the boolean function to the event as shown below Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 198 Variable Based Event E4 Description Ever Second I Log To Event Log Value to match Species Time Choose Test to perform Changed Value to test against Constant Value 00 00 01 Set Value C Other Variable C
41. 100 displayed InstLo 0 InstHi 409 5 UserLo 0 UserHi 100 scale 0 2442 Offset 0 0 5 Similar to example 2 but the Instrument is physically capable of reading the whole way down to OmA So a 4 20mA input module where the 4 20mA range is represented by 820 to 4095 reading because OmA would read 0 but the lowest possible input signal is 4mA User wants the range 50 to 100 displayed InstLo 820 InstHi 4095 UserLo 50 UserHi 100 Scale 0 0152671 Offset 24 96184 6 As a proof consider converting a Centigrade figure into Fahrenheit As we commonly know C to F is multiply by 1 8 and add 32 In order to check this fits with the formula Assume the centigrade range is 0 to 100 Freezing point to Boiling point This is the Instrument range We know that the equivalent Fahrenheit values are 32 and 212 This is the User range So InstLo 0 InstHi 100 UserLo 32 UserHi 212 Applying these values to the formula Scale 212 32 180 1 8 100 0 100 0 Offset gt 212 32 32 0 0 32 32 L 0 7 Fahrenheit to Centigrade the opposite of example 6 InstLo 32 InstHi 212 UserLo 0 UserHi 100 Scale 0 555555 Offset 17 7777 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 110 Note It is useful to test values at both ends of the range and if any other values are known then try those too For example the values produced in example 6 C to F are as expected 1 8 and 32 I
42. 16 5 SpecView DDE Restrictions SpecView DDE Restrictions For reasons explained in the Introduction to DDE SpecView only supports the getting of data using the DDE Advise or Hot Link method DDE Request is not supported for one off conversations Data can be Set into Instruments using the DDEPoke mechanism DDEExecute is not supported NOTE The CF_TEXT format is the only format supported by SpecView All data is sent in this text form SpecView must be in Runtime Mode and showing a GDW for DDE Server activity If the SpecView is taken out of Runtime Mode then all DDE links are terminated SpecView DDE can support multiple simultaneous clients requesting the same data items and at different speeds Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 DDE 216 Return to DDE help topics 16 6 Getting data from SpecView DDE Getting data from SpecView DDE SpecView supports the DDE Advise mechanism for supplying DDE Clients with data restrictions Read the DDE Read Example SpecView listens on the var topic or that setup by the user in Preferences DDE for an item that is the name of the variable you want to read The format of the item is Instrument lt dot gt parameter lt comma gt rate optional All items are not case sensitive and the parameter can be either the short or long name of the parameter The rate can be omitted in which case medium is assumed or can be specified as M L H or U meaning Medium Low High Ult
43. 7 Tuesday August 0G 200 Click Label for Scale Chart for Cursor MMSTC ln 1 MMETC In 2 MMSTC In 3 1 z a 4 a fi T a 10 32 30 10 33 00 Go to second screen The steps are as follows 1 Installing SpecView 2 Starting SpecView If you have no instrument currently connected to your computer then follow 3 Manual Configuration or if you do have an Instrument s connected then follow 3 Automatically detecting instruments and displaying Instrument Views then continuing 4 Add a variable to the GDW Graphical Display Window 5 Draw a Trend Chart 6 Define a second GDW 7 Adding buttons to switch between GDW s 8 Adding a Bar chart to a GDW 9 Seeing how it works in Runtime Mode To go to the next step click the link Starting SpecView NOTE SpecView s name for each screen is a GDW Graphical Display Window Each GDW is saved as a file on disk much like a Word document 2 2 Quick Start Starting SpecView Quick Start Starting SpecView Once SpecView is installed double click the SpecView icon or click Start and select SpecView 32 from the Programs menu If SpecView is started without a dongle connected then initially the following dialog box is displayed first Click the Start in DEMO Mode button to run in Demo mode Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 13 SpecView User Manual Configurations Found Batch Aun Spec iews2 Mo copy protection key dongle connec
44. 9 but SpecView supports up 40 ports To use ports 10 and above change the MaxPorts setting Why am I not seeing all the Instrument Parameters expect to see in the Variables List Uncheck the Short List checkbox on the Variables List to show all the Instrument Variables Or you may need to manually add parts of the instrument which haven t already been defined by Automatically detecting the instrument or defined manually this is described in Manually Defining Instruments FAQ Index 24 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 24 1 Glossary Index Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView ActiveX Controls Alarm Boolean COM Port Settings Communications Ports Com Port Communications Protocol Configuration Configuration Mode Data Logging Decimal Places Dongle Dynamic Attributes GDO Graphical Display Object GDW Graphical Display Window Instrument Instrument View Log Report Multiport Option Radio Buttons Read Only Variable Recipe Runtime Mode Strategy Controller Toggle Tooltips Variable Definition Variable Types Variables List Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 250 Web Server Option Windows file naming rules Writeable Variable 24 2 Alarms Alarms An Alarm is an On Off status within an instrument or a boolean User Variable which has the Alarm attribute enabled When an alarm occurs SpecView will display the Alarm dialog box and writ
45. 98 or Me During the Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 239 SpecView User Manual installation process it will install DOQM95 or DCOM98 appropriately This file is needed for SpecView s OPC functionality and because part of the OPC functionality is built in to the base product the file is required even if SpecView s OPC option isn t being used FAQ Index 23 3 FAQ Instrument FAQ Instrument Why am I getting XXX s on the screen where the instrument s values should be This is correct operation while in Configuration Mode However if this occurs while in Runtime Mode then please read Troubleshooting Instrument Communications for the steps to take On my generic Modbus instrument how do access higher registers Use an offset on the address specification by adding a semicolon followed by the offset for example 1 0J 256 Why are the instrument values shown 10 or 100 times too big or too small or without the decimal point positioned correctly Check the address specification to see if the number of decimal places is correct Why are the wrong values being returned from the instrument Check the instrument s manual as some instruments return raw data for example Chessell amp ABB Chart Recorders which needs to be scaled This can be done from the Properties button on the Variables List How do I use a BarCode Scanner with SpecView This is detailed under Using a BarCode Scanner with SpecVie
46. A to the Receive or A This leaves you with one or B connection and one or A connection 1 5 Ethernet and TCP IP Ethernet and TCP IP SpecView also supports communications via modbus TCP through Window s TCP IP networking or by external TCP converter modules Further information on addressing is detailed in Modbus addressing 1 6 Troubleshooting Instrument Communication Troubleshooting Instrument Communication What to do if your instrument is just displaying XXX instead of the correct values when in Runtime mode Is this a new installation of SpecView which has not as yet ever worked Is this happening for ALL of the instrument s variables If the answers to the above 2 questions is Yes then o Has the wiring between the instrument amp the PC been checked o Has the instrument s manufacturer s manual been checked for any relevant information For example the setting of the instrument s address address 0 should not be used o Is the instrument s address baud rate and parity correctly set on the instrument o Is the instrument s address is correctly specified in SpecView Click the Variables List tool select the instrument s name and click Properties then click Address Help o Check the instrument is connected to the correct COM port as specified in SpecView o Does the COM port on the computer work Use HyperTerminal to test the COM port And is the correct type of COM card fitted in the instrument
47. BlinkSpeed parameter from a SpecView variable create a SpecView User Variable of the required type amp then click the BlinkSpeed parameter on the Input tab click the Variables List button 8 select the variable from the list To set a parameter to a constant value such as BlinkMode 1 to turn on blinking replace the word ignore with 1 To set a parameter to a color or font select from the dropdown list Parameter 1 of Flip Parameter 1 of Fillolor Parameter 1 of Blink Speed select Color Parameter 1 of BlinkColor select Font Parameter 1 of Bandi Color These constants will be applied on entry to Runtime mode or by clicking the Invoke button To monitor what is happening with an ActiveX control during Runtime mode via the Event window it is necessary to check the ActiveX Controls checkbox on the Event Log Setup box from the Setup menu By default this is not checked as it produces a large number of entries in the Event Log see also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Licensing ActiveX Insert Control ActiveX Preferences ActiveX Variables Inputs ActiveX Variables Outputs Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 205 SpecView User Manual ActiveX Variables Methods ActiveX Register ActiveX Manage Control List ActiveX Control Not Licensed ActiveX on SpecView Remote 15 3 ActiveX Licensing ActiveX Licensing MM Message Ma E Warning When inserting an Actives Control into SpecView be aware that
48. Detection What does Automatic Instrument Detection mean Many instruments have an Instrument Identity code that SpecView asks for When the instrument responds SpecV lew uses its built in database to create an Instrument View that gives access to all the parameters on that instrument Some instruments have a very large number of parameters Note that Auto Instrument Detection is inappropriate in the following two cases 1 If it is a special instrument that cannot be auto detected for example Red Lion Dupline and Omron 2 If it is being added to an existing configuration In these situations please read Manually Defining Instruments For Auto Instrument Detection click the Test Comms for New Config button to detect your instruments automatically The Input Required dialog box is displayed Input Required x Enter name for new Config DEFAULT keyboard Lancel Enter a name for the configuration SpecView will create a sub folder with this name in the SpecView folder which is normally C SV32 the name you enter should follow the Windows file naming rules and should not be too long Remember this name This sub folder will be where all your log files and configuration files will be stored Log Reports will also be stored here unless another folder is specified When you have entered a name for the configuration and clicked OK the Ports and Protocols dialog box is displayed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007
49. Font Group E Dnfaroup Y Align Move To Front ti Plus Move To Back Etrithiinus Move Fornvend Plus Move Back Minus Save Object Load Object Hame Line Color The word Line applies to both lines and the outlines of the other drawing objects Changes the color of an already selected line AND chooses the color for all lines you draw from now on during this Configuration Mode session because the default values will be restored when exiting Configuration Mode Line Thickness The word Line applies to both lines and the outlines of the other drawing objects Changes the thickness of an already selected line AND chooses the thickness for all lines you draw from now on You can also get the Shape Properties dialog box by double clicking on the object The default values will be restored when exiting Configuration Mode Fill Color Changes the fill color of an already selected object AND changes the fill color of all objects you draw from now on The default values will be restored when exiting Configuration Mode Text Font Sets the default Text Font for text objects added to the GDW during this editing session The default values will be restored when exiting Configuration Mode Group Shortcut G i Gal y Toolbar and on the Object Menu Objects may be grouped together for moving them around the GDW this is detailed in Selecting Grouping and Saving drawing objects Grouped objects may be saved and reuse
50. Full list of Preferences 11 4 Preferences Display Preferences Display e Time Format HMSC No Milliseconds Other options 1 Millisecond place 2 Millisecond places 3 Millisecond places Whether or not to display Milliseconds in time variables e N A Value XXX This is what is used to represent the variable s value in Configuration Mode or when the value cannot be read from the instrument in Runtime Mode e Recipe No Value N C N C stands for No Change It is only possible to have one set of Recipe variables per GDW but each Recipe can have many sets of values Max 1295 However not all of the variables will need to be set in each set of values so this is what is used to indicate the variables which are not to be set o Date Format A B d Y Y The sequence used to format date variables see below o Date Time Format H M S A B d Yo Y The sequence used to format date and time variables see below e Blank String value What is displayed when a text value is blank e Show scroll bars Disabled Enables disables the displaying of scroll bars in Runtime Mode e Full screen mode in runtime Disabled Enables disables Full Screen Mode in Runtime e Magic square size pixels 75 In the case where Full Screen Mode is enabled in Runtime but without a button somewhere on the GDW which has the action GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode the menus are inaccessible To resolve this there is a special square in the
51. H E Comms a Ey OPC gg COMObjects sie 3 UPCGroups g TotalCOMObjects a g Total PCGroups a E SyncReads se Sync rtes gg ASpncheads ba gg Ssunci tites a a ASunchetreshes og ASyncDA2Reads a AspnoDA Mies A gg ASpncDARefreshes 1 DPCltems dded ba 3 DUPLltemshemowed 1 OPCltems bus 3 UPCltemScans OPC Server Name Add Remote PC Mame Create Inst Cancel Finish You can create a SpecView instrument from any of the Groups listed If you have the Multiport option enabled on your dongle then you can have Groups from multiple OPC Servers To create a SpecView instrument you just click the Group you wish to select and then click the Create Inst button You will then be asked to give your new SpecView instrument a name one will be suggested using the group hierarchy but you can override it Once you have typed in a new name and clicked OK then SpecView will again contact the OPC Server to retrieve details about the Item ID that it requires to build a SpecView instrument As a result of this process you will be informed if there are any Item IDs that are not supported by SpecView see below 19 3 Supported OPC Servers Supported OPC Servers CALServer This server allows you to monitor control CAL controllers see http www cal controls com You should be aware of the following issues If you want to run this server alongside anoth
52. Histom Recipe Alarm Event Password Options Wir Zone 1 one 2 a S Zone 4 Zone 5 Adding Instrument Views to a GDW 24 17 Log Report Log Report A text file containing the values of selected variables over a time period The file is in a CSV Comma Separated Variable format This means that the data fields are separated by commas This format is intended to be imported into a spreadsheet program such as Excel Viewed with a text editor Time Zone 1 Output Power Zone 1 Process Yalue Zone 1 Setpoint 00697 00 00 00 66 9 22 7 90 0 006 97 00 00 05 69 2 227 90 0 006 97 00 00 10 691 227 90 0 006 97 00 00 15 69 5 27 390 0 4 Time fone 1 Output Power Zone 1 Process Value Zone 1 Setpoint Fa 716 97 0 00 E 72T 90 3 716 97 0 00 69 2 727 90 Ca 7 697 0 00 69 1 a 390 Log Reports in detail 24 18 Multiport Option Multiport Option SpecView s Multiport dongle option is required in the following circumstances 1 For a large number of instruments If the number of instruments exceeds the maximum number of instruments for communication via a single COM port For RS485 the maximum number is typically 32 instruments However more can be connected if the electrical connection is very clean 4 if a fast response time is not particularly necessary this may require the use of RS485 repeaters The number of controllers that can be connected to SpecView is only limited by the available addresses on the controllers Most
53. However since de selecting it LOCKED it at Level 4 AND ALL LEVELS BELOW re selecting it only made it accessible at Level 4 itis STILL LOCKED AT LEVEL 1 e You MUST return to Level 1 and re select it at that level Password Timeout Select a time for the inactivity timeout Inactivity is defined as not accessing a variable Moving the mouse is not activity The time left on the timeout is shown in the status bar Timeout Returns To Select the required action e Last Logged In Level e Level 0 all Locked e Level 1 Operator Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 161 SpecView User Manual 12 3 Passwords Selecting Objects for Access Selecting Objects for Access Use the GDW Setup menu command on the Passwords menu which will display Password Operation Setup EJ Selected Objects are ACCESSIBLE at Level IRUNGE gt Select All UnSelect All l Disable Password System l Disable Window Controls l Allow Configuration Mode M Show Short List Only W Hierarchical behavior Hide this box Cancel Password Timeout Timeout returns to Last Logged In Level C Level 0 all Locked C Level 1 Operator PEDO EDEN ee AAA MES KAX EIEE When the Hide this box button is clicked the cursor changes to the padlock shown above Click to highlight those objects on the GDW you want TO BE ACCESSIBLE at the level shown Each object selected will highlight as shown above in either reverse
54. IDF in the installation folder usually C SV32 which takes some time To improve the speed of startup it is OK to move the Instrument Definition Files IDF that are not being used into another folder It is best not to delete them in case they are needed in the future so we recommend creating a folder such as C SV32 IDF and moving the IDF files that are not being used into there NOTE To see which IDF files are still being loaded go into Configuration mode click the Variables List V tool and click Show New this lists all the Instrument types which have been read from the IDF files during startup Can run SpecView from the Windows Startup Group If SpecView is put into the Startup Group then often it will start before other parts of the system are ready To resolve this use a delay program such as http www rjlsoftware com software utility delayexec to delay the startup a bit Why am I not seeing all the Instrument Parameters expect to see in the Parameter List To display the full list use the Options Menu and select the Short List menu command All the parameters will appear Choose this menu item again to toggle back to the short list mode To include exclude parameters from the Short List use the Variable Properties box The Trend Chart doesn t appear to be updating why might this be Firstly determine the resolution of a Trend Chart as SpecView will draw one pixel on the Trend Chart pen line according to the time s
55. ONE is subtracted from the pre defined address SpecView pre defined instruments ALWAYS assume the address and NEVER the register NOTE Unless advised otherwise by SpecView either leave the letter out or use J Note 3 Address Offset Some instrument companies use an address structure so that a particular instrument view can be re used with the appropriate address offset This feature is also used with SpecView s Generic Modbus instrument views The addresses for each instance of the instrument are the same offset by a fixed number See Generic Modbus for more details Also where this feature is required for a specific instrument refer to the help for that instrument For Instruments using Modbus TCP IP To specify a modbus address over TCP IP the IP address of the instrument needs to be added before the address this is done in the form of the following example Assuming the modbus address is say 1 1J and the IP address is 192 168 1 60 and the TCP IP port is 502 which is the default port then the address would be specified as 192 168 1 60 502 1 1J Note that default port specification of 502 is assumed if none is specified Therefore 192 168 1 60 1 1J is equivalent to 192 168 1 60 502 1 1J Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 54 Also ensure the instrument variables are using the correct scaling 48 Automatic Instrument Detection Auto Instrument
56. Scale High readings they are the lowest and highest readings produced by the instrument and read into SpecView The InstLo and InstHi values can be determined empirically by setting the scale to 1 0 and the offset to 0 0 inside SpecView Then apply the lowest possible physical input to the instrument and note the value as InstLo Then apply the highest possible physical input to the Instrument and note that value as InstHi Examples 1 It is quite common for many Chart Recorders to read numbers in the range O to 65535 for the pen range For example a Pen s readings might be 0 to 100 but over comms this shows up as 0 to 65535 InstLo 0 InstHi 65536 UserLo 0 UserHi 100 So using the formulas above scale 0 001525902 Offset 0 0 2 A 4 20mA input module where the 4 20mA range is represented by 0 to 4095 reading User wants the range 0 to 100 displayed InstLo 0 InstHi 4095 UserLo 0 UserHi 100 scale 0 02442 Offset 0 0 3 Same as example 2 but user wants the actual mA signal value displayed This can be stated as A 4 20mA input module where the 4 20mA range is represented by 0 to 4095 reading User wants the range 4 0 to 20 0 displayed InstLo 0 InstHi 4095 UserLo 4 0 UserHi 20 0 scale 0 0039072 Offset 4 0 4 As for example 2 but the instrument reports back numbers as 1 decimal place so A 4 20mA input module where the 4 20mA range is represented by 0 to 409 5 reading User wants the range 0 to
57. Totalizing a flow rate is more like calculating an average However it is particularly important to have thoroughly thought through exactly what is needed What are the units of the flow rate Is the flow generally constant or rapidly changing How often should the flow rate be sampled Over what period of time will the totalizer run for such as over a few minutes or maybe over a few days At what stage should it be reset Should the reset be done automatically or manually by the operator How accurate does the total value need to be Should the total value be marked for logging Here s an example of a flow rate in litres per minute where the flow rate is added up every second and at the end of each minute divided by 60 amp added to the total Create an every second event see the note below with the action to add the current value of the flow rate to the running total Create an every minute event with the action to divide the running total by 60 amp add the result to the total For the constant value 60 create a SpecView Number User Variable called Sixty and set the initial value to 60 To show the duration that the totalizer has been running Create two SpecView Time User Variables call them StartTime and Duration and when the process starts set StartTime to the Current Time and set both the running total amp the total to zero Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 201 SpecView User Manual
58. any characters e g line1 furn1 The files will have names such as line1 02 csv furn1 05 cse Option 2 Select the specific file name The file will always use the same name and the previous file will be overwritten Option 3 Get the name from a SpecView string User Variable gt From Specview String Current Batch ID Customer Next Batch ID The value entered by the operator for Current Batch ID will be the file prefix for the log alarm event report s Log Report Output File Path Specifies where to put the log files This can be any folder on any drive available to the SpecView computer e it can be any drive on a network Output path C Default Fixed F datafile ine1 Default selects the configuration folder Start Time Stop Time This area defines the Start and Stop Time and Date of a report Manual Report Generation The radio buttons for Last Conversion of this format and Current Time are selected as the default values These are typically used when reports are being generated manually When a report is generated manually as opposed to via the Strategy Controller the stop time is remembered When the Log Report Setup dialog box is next selected this time is automatically entered as the Start From date and time The routine generation of a log report requires the user to select the Log Report Setup box either from the Logging menu or from a Button Attribute and clicking the Generate
59. be one Slave Address on any given IP Address so it will always skip to the next IP Address if any when an HC900 is found Click L J once the instrument view s have been displayed on the GDW which may be behind the Ports and Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 58 Protocols dialog box then click Stop The following dialog will be displayed Spec iew Ed AN All channels scanned Press OK to continue or Cancel to re scan Cancel to finish scanning for instruments click OK To scan for more instruments click Cancel Once this process is complete Auto detect cannot be used to add further TCP IP instruments to this configuration It is necessary to either add additional instruments manually Or if the auto detect scanning is required to confirm the exact address for the instrument s then create a new configuration and auto detect them JE Then using the Variables List tool select the name of the instrument you have just detected and then click Properties The address field will show the exact address to use to manually add that instrument to a pre existing configuration 4 10 Add Rename Instruments Add Rename Instruments Used to change the name and or COM port and or address of an instrument OR To add an Instrument View to a GDW ables List by cicking BUD Open the Variables List by clicking on the toolbar then e Double Click an in
60. boolean variables both Instrument amp User Variables have their Alarm attribute set Alarms are configured using Preferences Alarm by an action from a button or via the Strategy Controller To view the Alarm dialog window at any stage during Runtime use either the Alarm Event menu or the button action Alarms Show Alarm List Using the Strategy Controller s Run External Program it is possible to launch a program when an alarm occurs for example one which sends an SMS txt msg to the operator s mobile phone this is described in more detail in FAQ SpecView Configuration 6 2 12 Dynamic Attributes Dialog Box Dynamic Attributes Dialog Box This is accessed from the Dynamic Attributes menu command on the Edit menu Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 111 SpecView User Manual Dynamic Attributes Variable Zone Setpoint 0 in Recipe Scan Rate Medium l Display Format Free Cancel Dynamic Attributes Variables On a GDW values of variables have Dynamic Attributes a Bar chart will also have the Dynamic Attributes of the variable that it is associated with The Dynamic Attributes menu command on the Edit menu also allows for the setting of attributes from many objects in a selection not a group This allows quick changes of Recipe level or scan rate for a number of items Variable The name of the variable in this box may be edited directly AN Hew name not found If the new name
61. box Recipe Save Save As Recipe Import Export Recipe Send Recipe Send To Source and Target Instruments Recipe Send To Warning Recipe Send To Problems Setting the Recipe download order Preferences Recipe Recipe on Remote 10 2 Selecting Variables to be Included in Recipe Selecting Variables to be Included in Recipe NOTE In order to be able to do this you must first have setup a GDW containing all the variables which you intend to put in to the Recipe Read Adding Numeric Values to a GDW In Configuration Mode open the GDW which is to have the Recipe _ el MEX Select Recipe Mode Click on the toolbar or View Menu Recipe Mode The cursor changes to a knife and fork and any variables that have already been selected will highlight To add or remove a variable click the value with the knife and fork cursor However make sure that the variable is not Grouped with other items on the GDW X T A A A aa RRE al NOTE As you move the cursor over each variable the Status Bar shows the name of the variable Be sure NOT to select any variables that are Read Only Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 143 SpecView User Manual 10 3 Recipes Using Recipes Using Recipes are Setup from Configuration Mode by the following steps 1 In Configuration Mode Create a screen GDW and put all the variables on it that you wish to change using Recipe This screen can be thought of as a Recip
62. box which is accessed by clicking the Test Comms for new Config button on the Configurations Found dialog box is used for automatic detection of connected instruments On this box when a protocol is chosen for a given port a Help button appears for that port Each port can use a different protocol if required Clicking the Help button will open a separate help file specifically for that protocol Refer to it for details on setting your instruments You can also get this help by double clicking on the instrument name in the Variables List accessed by clicking the ee wx tool 1 3 RS422 EIA422 RS422 EIA422 RS422 this is a 4 wire connection and has a maximum cable length of 1 2 km and a maximum of 10 instrument connections All four wires MUST be used Follow the instrument manufacturers instructions carefully paying attention to shielding in electrically noisy environments The converter will have two Transmit sometimes called Send and two Receive connections These are marked either 8 or A amp B or both e In general the Transmit connections on the converter go to the Receive connections on the instrument e In general the Receive connections on the converter go to the Transmit connections on the instrument e n general the or B connections on the converter go to the or B connections on the instrument NOTE Most instruments made by Eurotherm Controls DO NOT follow this convention In most cases
63. box appears choose New Macro Type in the example code from the previous help section save the Macro Then set the cells to for example as follows Set B3 to SpecView Set C3 to var set D3 to the variable to be set for example Zone1 Setpoint Set E3 to for example 20 5 9 Click your button to do the Poke Return to DDE help topics Cee et aN 16 10 DDE Read Example DDE Read Example An example of Excel reading some items from an Instrument called Zone1 follow See the important note at the bottom of this section Type these formulas into cells on the Spreadsheet SpecView Status LastError To get the Error Reason in case of an error SpecView Status Errorltem To get the Item for which the last error ocurred SpecView var Zone1 pv Get the Process Val at medium rate SpecView var Zone1 OP Get the Output Power at medium rate SpecView var Zone1 pv h Get the PV at the high rate The quotes allow Excel to not treat the comma as part of some strange formula Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 219 SpecView User Manual SpecView var Zone1 Output Power Get the OP using its full name SpecView var SpecView Numbert1 To get the SpecView User Variable called Number Since you are typing this into Excel as a formula there are certain restrictions you must observe In particular where the name of an Instrument or variable contains any character likely to affect Excel s formula engine then the item must be
64. commands from the File menu because when Adobe Acrobat is installed it will be shown in the list of printers and can be selected to create a PDF Portable Document Format file 2 If the File Menu is not available because Full Screen mode is enabled or if the printing is to be done from the Strategy Controller then use the Printer Setup from Windows itself to set Adobe to be the Default Printer How can make a Strategy Event which will keep firing all the time that something is true Normally Strategy Events are edge driven so that they only fire when a change occurs Therefore in event that says for example If Bool1 On will only fire once and will only fire again if the Boolean goes to Off and then back to On So if you want something to keep firing all the time for example while Bool1 On then do this e Adda Value Based Event called Every 2 seconds and watch SpecView Time choose Changed test against 00 00 02 In the Event Control panel check the Enable on Boolean choose Bool1 True This event will then fire every 2 seconds all the time that Bool1 On This is useful to for example make something blink flash or repeatedly ring a bell all the time there is an Alarm How can make something blink flash on screen Add a Value Based Event called Every second amp while Alarm On and watch SpecView Time choose Changed amp test against 00 00 00 In the Event Control panel check the
65. do the same action using HyperTerminal a component of Windows and therefore an independent piece of software In most cases SpecView will perform the same as HyperTerminal With HyperTerminal you can either connect to e Direct to the COM Port of the TAPI device this allows you to use AT commands see www computerhope com atcom htm e Direct to the modem this allows you to dial a number via an easy to use interface and best emulates what SpecView will do Remember If HyperTerminal cannot do it then SpecView cannot either Where is HyperTerminal You will find HyperTerminal under e WinXP o Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications e Win98 o Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communications o If you do not have it installed then you will need to visit the Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs gt Windows Setup Check the Communications box Hit the Details button Ensure that HyperTerminal is checked e Win95 o Start gt Programs gt Accessories o If you do not have it installed then you will need to visit the Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs gt Windows Setup Check the Communications box Hit the Details button Ensure that HyperTerminal is checked Using HyperTerminal to simulate SpecView Remote connecting to SpecView Local Firstly ensure that the modem speakers are on This is done via Windows Control Panel This will help con
66. e List Font Arial The font to be used e List Font Size 9 The font size to be used e Show Name On Move Enabled In Configuration Mode moving an XXX shows the name of the variable on the status bar e Decimal separator full stop This is the character used by the current language to be used as the decimal point This setting cannot be changed from within SpecView e List separator comma This is the character used by the current language to delimit CSV files lt is used by Logfile Convert Recipe Export Import and Export Import variables list on the Setup menu This setting cannot be changed from within SpecView e Reset Don t Show Me Again Messages This unsets all of SoecView s warning message boxes which have a checked Do not show me this again checkbox so that they will then subsequently be shown NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until next entry to Runtime Mode Full list of Preferences 11 12 Preferences Web Server Preferences Web Server Preferences for SpecView s built in Web Server option SpecView has a built in Web Server which can be enabled from a dongle option This causes a screen shot of the current SpecView GDW screen to be taken every 5 seconds this rate can be modified see Update Rate below The screen shot uses the specified JPEG Quality where 100 is maximum definition but uses much greater bandwidth This screen shot is then made available via the Web Server This allows a
67. e g with Multiply a time by 2 0 decimals Text Add Text Text Concatenation Use to add 2 pieces of text together Text Subtract Integer Text Left or Right function If the Integer is positive the Left most x characters are taken If the integer is negative the Right most x characters are taken Examples ABCDE Subtract 2 gt AB ABCDE Subtract 2 gt DE Text Divide Integer Text Mid function The characters from the x th position onward are taken until the end of the text First position is 0 Example ABCDE Divide 2 gt CDE Text Multiply Text Integer Find function The integer is setup with the position of the first occurrence of Operator Text in the Copy From text If the text is not found 1 is used Example ABCDE Multiply BC gt 1 ABCDE Multiply FRED gt 1 Bool Subtract Bool Bool NOT function Note that the Operator Parameter is not used but must be specified Use the same parameter for the Copy From and the Operator The Copy To opposite state of the Copy From boolean The following three math functions use variables of type integer or number with decimals boolean is setup with the e The Abs Math Function takes the first Copy From value and puts into the Copy To variable the absolute value the positive value of it However it is also necessary to specify the second Copy From variable so set it to be the same variable name as the first e The Max Math Funct
68. enclosed in quotes so that Excel does not see it For example suppose hypothetically you had named an instrument Zone 2 If you just type in SpecView var Zone 2 pv Then this is a formula that takes SpecView var Zone and adds two to it To get Excel to correctly read the formula you need to put quotes in SpecView var Zone 2 pv This applies particularly to the following cases Output Power has a space Auto Manual has a slash could be seen as a divide inst param RATE the comma will confuse so if a rate is specified use the quotes Return to DDE help topics 17 SpecView Error Codes 17 1 SpecView Error Types SpecView Error Types The only place you should see an error code is if SpecView has had a problem writing to a variable There are three areas of error codes Write Errors Generic Errors Protocol Specific Errors 17 2 SpecView Write Errors SpecView Write Errors In general if you get an error code in a data entry box such as Error 18210 Value Over Range Press Fi for Help SpecView has failed to write the value correctly The most common cause is that the value being sent is outside the acceptable range for that parameter Check that any limits are not being exceeded for that instrument Try entering the value on the instrument itself The error codes below may help Contact your SpecView distributor if you cannot resolve the problem There are also generic Error Codes These erro
69. features in Excel Do not attempt to use this function to change the type of a variable for example from an Integer to a Number with decimals Import Variables List Imports a list of all currently defined variables and their properties from a CSV file which has been edited using Excel and saved again as a CSV file Event Logging Sets the actions and events which will be included in the Event Log Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 96 Event Log Setup Include these operations in Event log i Value Increment Failed Downloads e Password Login e Password Logout we Password Auto Logout Strategy Controller C NO Actions Recorded ALL Actions Recorded Record only those specified Recipe Download le Alam Acknowledge Recipe Send To i Specview Runtime Recipe Download Failure le Specview Config Mode W Log File Convert i GOW Swap Cancel i Print Screen Strategy Controller events and actions can also be logged to the Event Log by checking the Log To Event Log box Strategy Controller Displays the Strategy Engine setup box Setup COM Ports Displays the COM Port Setup dialog box and allows the COM port s settings to be changed and driver commands added COM Port Setup TCPAP com coma coma coma coms come com come com Drreer Commands Change Add Delete coca 20 Check COM Port Checks whether the COM Port is avail
70. file for example NOISE WAV which has also been placed in the SV32 folder use SpecView Run External Program and use a command such as C SV32 PLAYWAV EXE C SV32 NOISE WAV Note that it is important to specify the full path of the EXE file including the EXE filename extension as well as the full path of the WAV file because SpecView needs to know where the files are Just typing playwav noise will not work How can send email from within SpecView lt is possible to setup SpecView s Strategy Controller to send email s when a certain condition occurs such as an alarm There are 2 ways to do this 1 Using SpecView Run External Program There are programs available but we don t currently know of any specific examples which have a command line interface so that the email address amp the file containing the message to send can be specified on the command line 2 Using SVEmail SVEmail was written by us to send an email via a MAPI compatible email program However due to the recent tightening of security on the use of MAPI to send emails because of the problems caused by automated spamming this will only work on older versions of Microsoft Outlook such as Outlook 2000 We are not aware of which other email programs it will work with although there are a great many email programs available so it should be possible The best thing to do is to try it out please contact your SpecView distributor to request SVEmail free of charge
71. for backup purposes for sending configurations from one computer to another or for technical support purposes Please see the Warning below Archive SpecView creates a file known as a SpecView Archive which has a filename extension of SVA To create an Archive exit from SpecView and run it again then at the Configurations Found screen select the name of the configuration to be archived and click the Archive button Archive for Furnace M Include log files Exclude files older thar daps Archive to filename CS V32Fumace sva Create archive files smaller than kb Include Subfolders W Include Specview backups I Cancel 17 OK The default place disk and folder to create the archive is specified in Preferences Runtime Use the Browse button to specify a different location If the floppy drive is specified A and the configuration is too large to fit onto a single floppy disk then the Archive process will automatically prompt for the additional floppies Please ensure that you have a number of blank disks ready for use The checkboxes have the following operation Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 48 Include log files This will include the log files into the archive SVA file Uncheck this if you just want to archive the configuration without also backing up the log files However if the log files are being written to another folder which is
72. from that Instrument on GDW s in Logging on Trends will no longer be updated Defining another instrument with the same name is NOT regarded by SpecView as the same Instrument Be Careful Adding Instruments to the Database Special configuration tools are used by SpecView s engineers to define the database These are available for some drivers only to qualified users and only then in certain circumstances It is not possible to add variables to pre defined instruments from within SpecView The configuration tools are required to do this SpecView has a generic driver for the modbus protocol which can be used to communicate with modbus instruments Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 53 SpecView User Manual which SpecView doesn t as yet support This can also be used for modbus PLCs For further information on the above please contact your SpecView distributor You can now skip the next section and go straight to Configuration Mode 4 7 For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol If the instrument you are using uses Modbus protocol you need to know how the instrument is configured If there is a choice between Modbus or J Bus protocol choose J BUS If there is a choice for Data Bits choose 8 EIGHT If there is a choice for Parity choose NONE If there is a choice for Stop Bits choose 1 ONE The format of the address specification for Modbus is AA PT O Where AA Two di
73. gt Export Report then click on the FBDs button to drop down a small menu Choose All Modbus Partitions from this menu Export Report Selecta report category to export Controller Modbus Map Partitions All Modbus Partitions Summary Function Block Report Choose a specific partition if just those blocks are being added to an existing config or if one part of a configuration is being updated SpecView can import either How to import the modbus map Automatic Configuration Test Comme for HEW config and if an HC900 is found then the box shown below will be displayed to request the file name of the HCDesigner Modbus Map for each HC900 that is auto detected If the HC900 is being auto detected using Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 65 SpecView User Manual Ports and Protocols Fort Protocol Baud Rate comi lt None gt el fauto O coma Ponen Jt COM 3 Mones o SY Auto Settings COMA Auto y Cancel e we Protocol Honeywell HCS00 Port 1502 Timeout 5 secs Begin b2 49 124 42 End be 49 124 42 Help Auto Configure Status Checking E 2 49 124 42502 Stop Baud Rate NS TE Address b2 49 124 42 502 01 Auto Build GDW View For manually adding an HC900 or updating one in an existing SpecView Configuration then this is done from Configuration mode in the existing configuration To do this use the HC900 menu o
74. instruments go to 99 addresses and SpecView supports up to 40 ports 2 When instruments which use different protocols are being used This is because a single COM port can only communicate using one protocol For example if a number of instruments are all using the Modbus protocol then they can all share a COM port but if other instruments are added that use say a proprietary ASCII protocol then they would need to be connected via a separate COM port 3 For greater speed of response Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 256 When many instruments are being used in an application for which speed of response is very important then more COM ports can be used to optimize the speed of communications SpecView s maximum rate of update is once every 1 tenth of a second However the maximum logging rate is once per second Although FastCount can be used to simulate a faster logging rate 4 When using OPC The Multiport option will be required if it is necessary to communicate with more than one type of OPC server 24 19 Radio Buttons Radio Buttons Radio buttons are like check boxes but there is usually more than one of them and only button in the group can be selected On at any one time Rather like a radio can only be on one channel at any one time A radio button is circular whereas a checkbox is square An example of a set of radio buttons can be seen in the dialog box which
75. is displayed from the Event Logging menu command on the Setup menu 24 20 Read Only Variable Read Only Variable An instrument variable that cannot be changed over communications for example a measurement 24 21 Recipe Recipe This is a set of variables on a GDW which need to have their values set The values of which are saved on disk under a Recipe name This Recipe file can then be run by SpecView to set the variables to those values Only variables on the instrument that are writeable changeable by the user can be included in Recipes Every Recipe associated with a certain GDW refers to the same set of variables which means that all the recipes associated with the GDW contain exactly the same set of variables A recipe can be composed of up to 1295 different sets of values for a given GDW A set of values defines the values given to each of the variables in recipe Two different sets of values can give two different values to the same variable in recipe If in one set of values you want to ignore a variable you give it a N C No Change value Therefore it is appropriate to include in recipe all the variables that will be needed to be set by any set of recipe values More information is in the Recipes chapter 24 22 Runtime Mode Runtime Mode SpecView has two modes of operation Runtime Mode and Configuration Mode Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 257 SpecView User Manual Runtime Mode is also referre
76. it will need doing for each However it will not affect the Strategy Controller so this will need to be changed as necessary Double clicking on an item on the GDW seems to have no effect when usually it would display the relevant attributes box for that item The item may be Grouped with another item on the GDW click on the item once so that it is selected and click the Ungroup tool detailed in the Object menu can t seem to add a variable on a GDW into Recipe The value and the variable s name may still be Grouped together un click the Recipe tool then click on the variable and click the Ungroup tool detailed in the Object menu can t seem to edit a value s Dynamic Attributes If the Dynamic Attributes menu command appears to have no effect then the value and the variable s name may still be Grouped together click on the variable and click the Ungroup tool detailed in the Object menu Changing the color of text on the screen using Object gt Text Font doesn t appear to have any effect It is possible that the text is Grouped together with another item on the GDW click on the item and click the Ungroup tool detailed in the Object menu Then select them individually How do configure SpecView Networking Remote Local Details in SpecView Networking What can I do if Auto detect doesn t work for my instrument Use Manual Instrument Configuration How do do a Strategy Controller event every second In th
77. l Specview Fumace2B atch Er 24 12 03 2 items 24 1203 second Batch 14 53 08 145523 00 02 15 2124003 First Batch 14 55 23 lt Aunning gt _ _ _ ____ __ __ _ _Q EE oO RescaleTrend Charts to batch duration SEEI Cancel Only show batches for last days Enter the number of days to find batches for any number from 0 to 10 000 days as there could have been many hundreds of batches Only show batches that match Either enter the whole Batch number which is case sensitive or use wildcard characters to filter out all occurrences of a particular batch from potentially many hundreds of batches Some examples of the use of wildcard characters are Wildcard Means Would match All Anything Hot Ends with Hot Hot VeryHot MediumHot 123Hot Hot Begins with Hot Hot Hotter Hottest Hot6789 H t H one character t Hot Hxt H9t H t H two characters t Heat Heater123 Hoot Hot Has Hot anywhere in it Hot 123Hot456 VeryHotlinHere Rescale Trend Charts to batch duration This checkbox is only shown when finding batches for Historical Replay This will rescale the Trend Chart s time span to be appropriate for the duration of the batch For example if the batch is 3 minutes long then it will use a 5 minute time span The chart will be drawn as a best fit between the fixed graduations of time along the X axis Note that there is no link between a GDW amp a batch so ensure the correct screen is open to disp
78. necessary to set Trend DP Override in Preferences Runtime Label Trend chart The Pen label is the name of the Pen as displayed on the Trend chart The default assigned by SpecView is the same as the variable This can be edited by clicking in the Label box If you cannot see all the Pen labels defined shorten the Pen labels OR select a smaller or narrower font Min Max scales for a chart Pen For each Pen enter the minimum and maximum scale values Clicking a Pen label during Runtime Mode will change the scale displayed on the chart y axis to The Pen color The scaling for that Pen The individual lines on a Trend chart are always drawn on the chart according to their own y axis scale For example If SetPoint has scale 0 2 and its current value is 1 and SetPoint2 has scale 0 100 and its current value is 50 then the lines will be drawn over each other Pen Color Pick a color from the standard windows chart This will be the line and label color within the chart Click OK and repeat for as many variables you wish to chart Edit Pen To edit an existing Pen highlight the Pen to be edited in the Pens list in the Trend Chart Attributes dialog box and click the Edit button or just double click the Pen and the Pen Attributes box will be displayed Repeat for any further editing Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 139 SpecView User Manual Delete Pen Use this button to remove an existing Pen from the Tren
79. over comms For Modbus TCP the slave address is still relevant in the following cases For native instruments there is only one slave address per IP Address because there is only one instrument In this case the Slave Address is usually 1 For Bridge connected instruments there can be up to 255 discrete Modbus Slaves connected through the one IP addressed bridge so the Slave Address has the usual meaning In SpecView s Auto detect setup we can specify a start and end IP Address SpecView will start at the beginning IP Address and scan Slave addresses 1 to 255 on that IP address before moving to the next IP address In the case where each IP address is a native Modbus TCP instrument this scanning can be unnecessary as there is only ever one Slave Address to be found In this case the Skip to Next IP button can be used in a similar way to the existing Skip to Next Port button It is useful to think of each IP Address as a separate COM port Where it is clear that there is only one instrument attached to a port then looking for 254 more instruments is not required Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 57 SpecView User Manual Forts and Protocols Fort Protocol E aud Pate comi MOD MUXModues famo y Hep orc come lt None gt 0 Yd to COMS lt None gt tsi Auta y Settings COM4 auto gt COMS eons tsi suto y Lancel come Mene a comz Hons f to comes ime a e coma Hos
80. remote user to observe but not interact with SpecView If remote interaction is required then SpecView Networking should be used e Enabled Disabled by default e IP Port Number 80 e Update Rate 5 secs e JPEG Quality 70 Range 5 100 Full list of Preferences Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 157 SpecView User Manual 11 13 Preferences Logfile Conversion Preferences Logfile Conversion Preferences for Logfile Conversion e Thread Priority Slow This is how much CPU priority is given to logfile conversions e Inhibit Progress Display Disabled Whether or not to display the Progress dialog box for logfile conversions Full list of Preferences 11 14 Preferences DDE Preferences DDE Preferences for DDE Dynamic Data Exchange e Application Name SpecView DDE application name e Variable Topic var DDE topic name NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until SoecView has been restarted Full list of Preferences 11 15 Preferences Debug Preferences Debug NOTE Do not change any settings unless under the direction of a SpecView representative e Debug Mode 0 This will be a specific number given to you by a SpecView representative that is appropriate to debug the problem you have encountered When this is set to zero the File Size and No of files detailed below are ignored because no debug files will be generated e File Size 0 Mb This is the maximum file size of
81. require Double click the button to display the Button Attributes dialog box Button Attributes Caption Close F key lt None Lancel C Bitmap Erowsef Resize to fit text f Text Font Background Colour Action GDW Control Close this screen Alarm OnOff Alarms Show Alarm List Events Show Event List GOW Control Close this and Swap To GD GOW Control Close this screen GOW Control Swap to another GE GOW Control Toggle Full Screen mode GOW Control oor in GOW Control Zoom out GOW Control Print Screen History Start Replay Logging Convert Specific Log File Format Logging On Off Logging Purge Log Files Logging Show Log File Convert Manager Parameters Alter Value Interactiwel Parameters Copy From To Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Math Function Parameters Show Full Parameter List Password Log In or Log Out PCS000 Sequence Recipe PC3000 Sequence Recipe from String Z and change the text in the Caption box to say for example Return to first screen Then from the Action list select GDW Control Swap to another GDW then select the name from the Swap To list Swap To that you gave to the first GDW a gt of tal Click OK to close the Button Attributes dialog box then click the Save tool to save this new GDW again Open the first GDW by either clicking the Open GDW tool or by selecting the name of the GDW from the Window menu and the
82. situations where a LAN or WAN or Internet connection between the Local amp Remote s is not appropriate SpecView Remote can be used to dial directly into the Local If more than one simultaneous connection is needed then more than one modem will need to be connected to the Local each with a different telephone number Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 37 SpecView User Manual However for this SpecView relies on having modems which have themselves been correctly configured PLEASE REFER TO THE MODEM S USER GUIDE Then test the modem connection using Hyperterminal SpecView should work with all makes of data modems but it has been found that some combinations work better than others these are listed under Modem types Additionally it is important that SpecView has been configured so that both ends have sufficient information to be able to make a successful dial up connection SpecView Networking via Modem Setup SpecView Networking via Modem Failure SpecView Networking via Modem Using HyperTerminal SpecView Networking via Modem Modem Types SpecView Networking via Modem TAPI Versions 3 5 SpecView Networking via Modem Setup SpecView Networking via Modem Setup There are 6 steps to follow On the Local 1 When developing a SpecView Configuration which is intended to be accessed by SpecView Remote it is very useful to put all of these SpecView pre defined Variables on to an accessible screen GDW Sp
83. specified by for example Path C MyLogFiles in Settings ini then these will NOT be archived even if the Include log files checkbox is checked Include Subfolders This will include the contents of any subfolders within the configuration s folder Include SpecView backups This will include the backups that SpecView automatically makes of the CONFIG CFG and the CONFIG CDG files when these files have been changed while in Configuration mode These backups are named CONFIG CF CONFIG CF 1 CONFIG CF 2 etc And CONFIG CD CONFIG CD 1 CONFIG CD 2 etc Restore To Restore a SpecView Archive SVA file start SpecView then at the Configurations Found screen click the Restore button Restore for Furnace e Include log files Restore from filename C Sv32 Fumace sva Include Subfolders W Lancel IE T Jk Use the Browse button to locate the SVA file to be restored If the file is on floppy disk s then the Restore process will automatically prompt for them The Include Subfolders checkbox will include the contents of any subfolders within the configuration s folder NOTE For archives which are on floppy disks the restore process will request the last floppy of the set to be inserted first then it will ask for the floppies to be inserted in sequence This is because certain information is written to the last floppy during the archive process which must be read at the beginning of the restore process If the archive o
84. the appropriate symbol and double click the specific instrument you want Variables Varnables List Options List Options Show New Short List al Eee cain Kern Properties of Specview oF Specview Variables ar ABB Kent Taylor ar ADAM oF Allen Bradley Instruments of Anafaze 16 Loop of Anafaze 32 Loop Do Short et Full temes Add tem Properties of Anafaze 8 Loop oP Anataze AB of Barb Col Modbus ar Barber Colman of Barber Colman 560 Serie se 1 The instrument s name can be modified if required to allocate it an appropriate and unique name 2 Select the COM Port 3 Enter the Address For help click on Address Help For Modbus instruments read Modbus instrument addressing 4 Click Create Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 52 Yarables l l List Uptions Show Defined OPC oa es Add ltem Properties pe Add Rename Instrument Hame Monitor TC s 1 8 Port COM1 Address 1 14 Help For Instrument Address Help Rename Url Delete Lancel o MELO 1 a MMETCISO a fh Eh If this is the first occurrence of an instrument being assigned to this COM port then the Port Settings dialog box will be displayed Typically just clicking OK on this box will be sufficient unless the instrument is using non standard settings in which case please read Port Settings Some instruments
85. the log files have the same name then they cannot have different sizes or date times The variables are checked to make sure that there are no data type differences e g float and text for the same unique id would be rejected Instrument types are the same e g not allowed to overwrite a MM8TC with a MM4RO etc A Restore is only allowed to a configuration if there is at least one defined instrument of the same type for example at least one MM8TC MM Restore in progress for Furnace PAN E1 2283 ERROR This restore has been cancelled az there are log file size andor date differences between the existing configuration and the one being restored Such differences will cause loss of log file data Please restore again either by unchecking the Include log files checkbox or by specifying a new name for the configuration If you get this error then it means that the archive file contains Log files which conflict with the ones in the existing configuration To resolve this Restore the configuration without the Include log files checked Or alternatively restore specifying a new name for the configuration 4 4 SpecView Command Line Options SpecView Command Line options The following command line options are available e r lt connection name gt The connection description is the name listed in the Connect To dialog box This will cause SpecView to run up in Remote mode and go online to the connection namespecified
86. the value of another variable Value to test against Wew Walue Constant Yalue Dif Rezet i C Other Variable Parimlata 1151 A constant value would be used when the test is always the same If a constant value of zero is used then this means any change to the variable Other Variable is used when two values are to be compared such as Zone 1 Process Value gt Zone 2 Process Value Or if a test involves comparing a value to a setpoint that requires adjustment For example a counter is to be reset when the count value exceeds a particular value and that value is to be set by the user A SpecView variable would be defined called Count Reset Value that is put on a GDW The Strategy Controller event is Counter Value gt SpecView Count Reset Value Using Event Control Enable On Boolean to do an AND function Event Control using Enable On Boolean allows an AND function with a secondary boolean Event Control W Enable On Boolean Furnace Door Tell False 0 Choose For example Zone 1 Process value lt 200 AND Furnace Door Open If it is required to AND a variable that is not a boolean such as a number an intermediate event must be defined For example Zone 1 Process Value gt 250 AND Zone 3 Process Value gt 300 A SpecView boolean User Variable must be defined Zone 3 over 300 A Strategy Controller event action Zone 3 Process Value gt 300 gt Parameters Download Specific Value of On to SpecView Z
87. the variable Auto Close To speed data entry check the Auto Close box This applies to all data entry dialog boxes The box will close automatically when SpecView gets confirmation that the entry has been accepted Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 70 5 4 Data Entry Boolean Data Entry Boolean Click the button required Z oneb _Auto M anual EJ Current Value Auto Hew alue Auto Close Close To change the wording on the buttons edit the Variable Properties using the Variables List tool Error Codes 5 5 Data Entry Enumeration Data Entry Enumerated Type Used when there are several choices of discrete settings Barrel one 7 Sensor Select ee J New Yalue RATD100 7 L 8 L 9 Linear 10 Auto Linear 11 Close M Close Double Click or single click and click Send on the required value NOTE Some instruments immediately change the data back to a default setting This will cause a write error Check to see whether the instrument has accepted the expected result If not maybe the wrong number of decimal places have been entered Error Codes Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 71 SpecView User Manual 5 6 Data Entry Text Strings Data Entry Text Fixed text cannot be edited Text variables from instruments and SpecView Text User Variables can be edited in Runtime Mode Click the text to edit Spec iew Fred x C
88. then 1 2 is taken Integer See above but no decimals are used Only affects the Date part leaves the Time unaffected Date Time Only affects the Time part unless the time is greater than 23 59 59 then the Date is incremented accordingly Other type conversions not listed above will not work as expected oy D O 6 4 19 Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Download Specific Value This Button Attribute will immediately download the value to the instrument The settings below will cause the Zone3 instrument s Setpoint to be set to 50 0 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 129 SpecView User Manual F kep lt None OF Cancel C Bitmap Elowse Resize to fit text Text Font Background Colour Action Parameters Download Specitc Value Caption A ar Specview a ones o Process Value setpoint a Deviation Value o OutputPower a AutoManual a Setpoint High Limit a Setpoint Low Limit Walue 50 0 o Setpoint Ramp Rate a Output Max Power Parameter to Alter ones setpoint The box below shows how to set a SpecView DateTime1 User Variable to the current computer date and time Fey None y Cancel C Bitmap 20wse Resize to fit text le Text Font Background Colour Action Parameters Download Specitic Value a Caption Set DateTimel to now o Passwordliser o PasswordLeyel o PasswordTime o GoodComms o HadCommns e Comm
89. version 9 URL 235 USA Contact Numbers 234 User Control 161 User Defined Variables 101 Using a BarCode Scanner with SpecView 61 _ Value Variable Based Event Setup 191 Value Based Events Examples 195 Variable 258 Variable offset 107 Variable Properties 107 Variable Types 258 Variables List 100 258 View Menu 91 Index W Web Server Option 258 Website 235 Window Menu 82 Window Menu Configuration 97 Windows compatibility 236 Windows filenaming rules 259 Windows XP 236 Write error loading recipe 147 Writeable Variable 259 www specview com 235 X XXX 3 59 gt a Zoom Menu Runtime 81 266 Back Cover
90. when SpecView is not running When SpecView is re started they will resume from their last value By default SpecView will save the current values of User Variables on leaving Runtime mode Either by exiting SpecView or by going into Configuration mode There is also a setting AutoSaveUserVars which can be changed this is detailed in Preferences Maximum Values Integer Variables can contain values in the range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Number Variables can contain values which have the following limits Largest positive number 3 402823466e 38 Smallest positive number 1 175494351e 38 Significant digits 6 e g 1 23456 There is further clarification of Decimal Places Internally SoecView uses 15 significant digits to perform math functions These limits also apply to negative numbers Text Variables can contain up to 32 767 characters Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView Time Variables can hold up to a maximum of 595 31 23 hhh mm ss Countdown Variables can hold up to a maximum of 999 59 59 hhh mm ss Date Variables can hold dates up to the year 2019 DateTime Variables can hold dates up to the year 2037 SpecView User Variable Names Enter a name for the User Variable It can be any length up to 32 767 characters but shorter names are more manageable Input Required Enter name for variable Batch Mo keyboard Lancel Use the Keyboard button to get an on screen keyboard When
91. which allows items created by other Windows applications to be displayed on the GDW Links Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 88 Displays the Edit Links dialog box to allow items created by other Windows programs to be added to a GDW for example Excel spreadsheets However this menu command will only be enabled if the Link box was checked on the Insert New Object dialog box Object This menu command will only be enabled if an object has been inserted onto the GDW using the Insert New Object dialog box and that object is currently selected lt will then display a sub menu with menu commands appropriate for that type of object 6 1 4 Draw menu Draw Menu These menu commands and Tools are used to draw graphics on a GDW You can also add Bitmaps bmp files to a GDW If you are not familiar with standard Windows drawing functions please read Drawing Basics Menu Draw Object View F De Select Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Bitmap Text Button Trend Chart Bar Chart A S A cm These drawing functions are described in greater detail under Drawing Basics below Select Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Bitmap Text Button Trend Chart Bar Chart Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 89 SpecView User Manual 6 1 5 Object Menu Object Menu Object Miew Passwords Setup Line Color Line Thickness Fill Color Text
92. which has not as yet ever worked Is this happening for ALL of the instrument s variables If the answers to the above 2 questions is Yes then o Has the wiring between the instrument amp the PC been checked o Has the instrument s manufacturer s manual been checked for any relevant information For example the setting of the instrument s address address 0 should not be used o Is the instrument s address baud rate and parity correctly set on the instrument o Is the instrument s address is correctly specified in SpecView Click the Variables List tool select the instrument s name and click Properties then click Address Help o Check the instrument is connected to the correct COM port as specified in SpecView o Does the COM port on the computer work Use HyperTerminal to test the COM port And is the correct type of COM card fitted in the instrument o Is the instrument s baud rate and parity correctly specified in SoecView From Runtime mode use the Setup COM Ports menu command on the Options menu click the tab for the appropriate COM port Check the baud rate amp note down the name amp version number of the driver When the Settings are show Default that means that the data bits parity amp stop bits have been set according to the factory defaults as specified in the instrument manufacturer s manual o Is the instrument using the correct protocol for example ASCII protocol versus modbus protocol Is the instrument te
93. within the SpecView Configuration folder then the Archive Include Logfiles checkbox will not archive the logfiles If the folder is in the Configuration folder then to archive the logfiles both the Include Logfiles and Include subfolders will need to be checked Therefore in light of this you may wish to consider Making a copy for example every 24 hours of the Log File data using the Strategy Controller This could then be done to a Network Server See example below Alternatively Modify the Log File Report Format to cause the resultant Log File Reports to be written to another folder How to make a copy of SpecView s Log Files to for example a Network Server Typically this would be done just after midnight for example one second after midnight 00 00 01 by the Strategy Controller If the logfiles are copied using the standard Windows copy command then this will copy all the files each time including those which have already been copied Therefore using the xcopy command is preferable To copy the files and to keep a record of which files were copied amp when 2 files will be needed empty txt just containing one carriage return character xcopythem bat containing date lt empty txt gt gt xcopylog txt type empty txt gt gt xcopylog txt time lt empty txt gt gt xcopylog txt type empty txt gt gt xcopylog txt Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 247 SpecView User Manual C WI
94. would be for example Wednesday 7 January 2004 and the spaces would cause problems Therefore in order to use the date for the filename for example SpecView Date CSV to create say 04 _006 CSV then the date format needs changing to y_9 j from Preferences Display Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 136 Making your own Log Files Making a form of CSV file is easy with the Line Writer These three separate Line Writer commands illustrate the concept note the commas between the to cause commas to be output in the file Call the file for example LOG CSV and append to it each time LOG CSV Time Zone1 Zone2 LOG CSV SpecView Time Zonel pY Y Y Zone2 Pv Y LOG CSV SpecView Time Zone 1 pvY Y Y Zone2 Pv Y Provided that the last 2 lines are done independently by the Strategy Controller the file may look like this Time Zone1 Zone2 12 10 34 560 1 580 0 12 11 34 560 2 579 9 7 Full Screen Mode Full Screen Mode Full Screen mode in Runtime is where a GDW fills the monitor s whole screen there is no title bar or menubar across the top of the screen or Windows toolbar along the bottom of the screen lt can be enabled disabled by using these methods Setting Full screen mode from the Preferences Display tab This will cause Full Screen mode to be enabled automatically when entering Runtime Mode Via the Toggle Full Screen mode menu command on the File menu
95. yD on the toolbar Remove the check mark from M Include Name if you DO NOT want the name included with the variable Click the symbol by the Instrument you want ones o Process Value o Error Double Click the variable you want to add to the GDW guMBTC dnput 1 xpe With Name Without Name m 4 In either case the XXX S will be the value of the variable in Runtime Mode The text font and color will be that defined using Text Font menu command on the the Object menu also Text Justificationfor details on aligning text NOTE When a variable is first displayed on a GDW the name of the variable and its value are separate objects with their own set of eight Handles to show they are selected To move either of them drag from the middle of the object To move both of them together use Selecting Grouping and Saving objects 6 2 9 Variable Properties Variable Properties Change the name of a variable Add Delete a variable from Data Logging Alarm Checking booleans Short List Scaling for numbers with decimals On Off Labels booleans E SE Open the Variables List by clicking mpx on the toolbar then navigate to the Variable that you require For Instrument variables Click the 5 by the instrument s name For SpecView User variables Click the by SpecView scroll down amp click the 42 by User Variables click the by the type of the variable Then single click the
96. 0 minutes with no dongle attached then ActiveX controls can be added to a configuration and then run for the 10 minute limit in Runtime Mode If SpecView is running with a dongle but which doesn t have the ActiveX option enabled then SpecView will not allow the adding editing or running of any ActiveX controls The dongle will require upgrading to add the ActiveX option If the dongle has the ActiveX option enabled and the class of the ActiveX license on the dongle is correct then it will run SpecView has a number of classes of ActiveX licensing each Control has a class such as Class1 Class2 Class3 etc and the dongle s ActiveX licensing will also have a class assigned to it and only Controls of the correct class will run The dongle will require upgrading to add the correct Class See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 206 15 4 ActiveX On SpecView Remote ActiveX on SpecView Remote When an ActiveX control is being added to a screen which may be displayed on a Remote PC via SpecView Remote then it is important to consider whether the control is intended for use on the Remote such as a slider control to set an instrument setpoint then it is important that the Change allowed on Remotes checkbox is checked on the Object gt ActiveX Control gt Link To Variables box This is detailed in ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Contr
97. 3 SpecView User Manual 2 7 Quick Start Draw a trend chart Quick Start Draw a Trend chart Go back to Configuration Mode by selecting Configuration Mode from the File menu E File Logging History Recipe Alarm Open Close Configuration Mode Preferences Chrl E Print Ltrl P Print Setup Print to JPG Toggle Full Screen mode Restart SpecView Exit Ala y Click the Draw Trend Chart tool and the cursor changes to Click and drag on the GDW to draw a rectangle When you release the mouse button a Trend chart is drawn hu Wlar22 Click Label for Scale Chant for Cursor 100 10 45 10 50 10 55 11 00 11 05 11 10 and the Trend Chart Attributes dialog box is displayed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 24 Trend Chart Attributes Pens This is used to choose what you want to display Vio Syste on the Trend chart and how you want it to look 30 Minutes y Time spans for the chart range from 1 minute to 28 days When the Page Print box is checked Page Print Axes Color Chart Color the SpecView screen will be printed each time the chart is filled with new data Initially the Pens list is blank click Add to add a Pen to the Trend chart Move Up Move Down Font Cancel A Pen is the word used to refer to a single trace line on a Trend chart Open the variable list for the instrument from which you wish to display data by c
98. AL FUNCTION Indicates a driver problem contact your SpecView Rep 2 18202 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Indicates either A If using the Generic Modbus driver then the address being used is invalid B If using a Modbus driver written for a specific instrument then it indicates a problem with the instrument definition file 3 18203 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The value being used is out of range for this parameter 4 18204 SLAVE DEVICE FAILURE Contact your SpecView Representative 5 18205 ACKNOWLEDGE Device is busy setting the Driver Command ECR 5 may help 6 18206 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Setting the Driver Command ECR2 6 may help Error codes 18207 to 18500 are instrument specific 779 18979 BUFFER OVERFLOW Over 750 bytes of data received over comms which is likely to be caused by faulty wiring NOTE 18210 With Barber Colman Series 7 controllers you must first click the REM button on the Instrument View to enable writing to any variable OPC 84036 and values above These are OPC errors when the value being returned from the OPC server cannot be relied on In this case please contact your OPC Server supplier Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 SpecView Error Codes 222 18 Upgrading SpecView Upgrading SpecView SpecView is copy protected using a dongle which is attached to the printer port of your computer It contains all the options purchased with your copy The user can add additional options This is a two step p
99. AMOS A acetate E 98 GDWs Graphical Display WinGOWS oooonoocnccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnanennnnonononnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nana nnmnnn nnmnnn 99 Extruder A e ae 99 Creating Editing GDW Sure 99 Variables a E 100 SPEC VIEW Variables sin i ceueevasnansaeiens 101 Spec View FASICOUNE VatlaDle Aci 106 Adding Numeric Values to a GDW oonooooconcncnnnnannnnannnnnnnnnnonenonnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nana nn nan n ner nnmnnn nnmnnn nnne 107 Variable is Ae arte ee ee E 107 Boolean Names siii 110 A O aceasta ei sah ats a Des uatdsausbuweunascevaudeay tay luda cau aA N 110 Dynamic Attributes Dialog BOX isc 110 COIGE DYNAMICS adn 112 INSETENE WOOD linia 113 Edit Lin kS cn oi id ina 114 0 3 DRAWING BASICS e 114 Drawing Menu and Toolbar sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne ck cai ues laste cwtbcseueedeceseasccetucsesecdecsea cantaban 114 Selecting Grouping amp Saving drawing objects onomcccccccononcnonononenonencancnnannnnnnnnnnn nana none nrrnr ner nnmnnn nnmnnn 115 A ecnceaceiee cc cueendeneescceeceiveatastntcassansunsanesacecysacecaeeneeueetectcuaareiaaeac ls 116 Objects in front behind others cuina 116 Quick Copying of Drawing Objects coccccccnnnncconcccocccconcncnnnencncccnnnnnn cerraran rra 117 SELEC TOO A ces ac ac cactacuevaecevek occ sec ca oeve cen cameeveevecstssuisdistene cpap sdauess see emuce bacnecdeeuecucctersstuyeree 117 Line DrawihG PAPA A 117 Rectangle Drawing TOA a 118 Round Rectangle Drawing TOON sieici cts
100. Bits per second and the other settings as they are If the status bar along the bottom of the window now says Connected 00 00 00 and starts counting up in seconds then COM1 is Ok Otherwise an error dialog will be displayed If HyperTerminal cannot connect to the COM port then SpecView will also be unable to communicate with it The instrument has now been defined within SpecView clicking the Show Defined button at the top of the Variables list dialog will now show it Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 16 salis ES Select the name of the instrument in the list and click List Options Add Item The Instrument View will be displayed on the GDW show Mew M Include Name T Short List W Full Names Add ltem Properties ar Specview ar Mie Te eae Merc Port COM1 Address 14 Or double click the name of the instrument in the list then click Add to GDW Add Rename Instrument Help For Instrument Address Help Rename Only Delete Cancel This is now configured as if the instrument was already connected and you had clicked the Test Comms for New Config button to automatically detect the instrument Therefore you can now skip the next section and go straight to Configuration Mode starting with Add a variable to the GDW 2 4 Quick Start For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol Quick Start For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol If the instrument you
101. COM2 Driver SWModBus E aud 3600 Driver Commands T 5 H 2 DEBUG HE Change Add Delete The Driver Commands box will now show the value for DEBUG Then if required do the same for DEBUGSIZE 1 and DEBUGAUTODEL 9 Then wait for at least one minute but no more than three minutes then Exit SpecView In your configuration folder under SpecView s installation folder usually C SV32 you should now find some TXT files where the names start with debug for example debug_COM1 txt Email these file s to your SpecView representative You will also need to email an SVA SpecView Archive of your configuration To do this use SpecView s Archive button which is on the Configurations Found dialog box when SpecView starts up Ideally this should be done with the Include log files checkbox un checked Remember to set Debug back to zero afterwards 4 12 Using a BarCode Scanner with SpecView Using a BarCode Scanner with SpecView A BarCode scanner is another way of entering alphanumeric data into a computer A common question which is asked is Can SpecView do something such as download a recipe start the process check process parameters etc All of these are possible providing the sequence of events can be broken down to simple If Then statements that the SpecView s optional Strategy Controller can perform Consider the example of downloading a recipe based on a barcode If there are only a limited set of
102. Click New then on the Edit Connection dialog give the connection a name check the Modem checkbox and fill in the fields as appropriate The Reconnect on fail checkbox will automatically reconnect amp go online if the line is dropped Entering a Username amp Password will mean that these will automatically be filled in on connection Ensure these are also setup on the Local Click Save 2 Click Connect to make the connection 3 6 SpecView Networking via Modem Failure SpecView Networking via Modem Failure To troubleshoot a problem with Modem connection follow the points below 1 On the Local always display the Remote Users Attached List which is displayed by choosing View Connected Users from the Remotes menu This will provide useful information about the Local s connection status 2 On the Local always have a screen which shows the 5 SpecView variables SpecView Time SpecView GoodComms SpecView BadComms SpecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem This will provide information about the instrument data coming into the Local because unless the Local is able to reliably access the instrument data then the Remote will not be able to request this data from the Local 3 Ensure that this is a supported Modem 4 Check the version of TAPI installed on your PC 5 Ensure HyperTerminal can make a successful connection 6 Performance The transfer rate on the Remote Rx and Tx in kb sec is shown in the st
103. EXE file format 18000 18199 Write Errors 18200 18500 Protocol Specific Error Codes 20000 21000 Error codes from the Local computer when using SpecView Networking Specific error codes 20022 This error is shown in the Event Window when a Remote connection has failed because the versions of SpecView running on the Local amp Remote are not compatible Please upgrade them accordingly 32002 This error is shown when using SpecView Remote to connect to a Local which has not had the networking server started from Preferences This is detailed in Setting up SpecView Networking This can be confirmed by using the menu command View Connected Users from the Local s Remotes menu during Runtime mode which would show Server NOT Running 84036 and values above These are OPC errors when the value being returned from the OPC server cannot be relied on In this case please contact your OPC Server supplier 17 4 Error Codes Protocol Specific Error Codes Protocol Specific Error codes in the range 18200 to 19103 are reserved for Protocol Specific errors returned by the equipment connected Subtract 18200 to get the error code and then consult the Protocol or Instrument manual for details Modbus For example a Modbus Instrument could return Error Code 18208 Thus the Modbus error is 8 which is Parameter to be modified is write protected For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol here is a list of the standard Modbus errors 1 18201 ILLEG
104. Enable on Boolean amp choose Alarm True for the Alarm you want or use SpecView AnyAlarm for all alarms Set the Action to do a Math Function and subtract a Boolean User Variable rom itself and store the answer in itself for example Copy From Bool1 Subtract Bool1 Copy To Bool1 Subtracting a Boolean value from itself effectively toggles the value Also add a Value Based Event called If Alarm Off to check if Alarm equals Off Set the Action to set Bool1 to Off So that the Boolean is turned off when the Alarm is Then select the item on the screen you want to flash amp set the Color Dynamics using Edit gt Color Dynamics When SpecView Bool1 On set it to maybe red When SpecView Bool1 Off set it to white if the background is white then it ll disappear lt is possible to stop the Alarm box appearing automatically by using File gt Preferences gt Alarm tab amp unsetting Popup Enabled How can position items on a screen amp align them to within a pixel amp stop them jumping to the grid This is done using by disabling the grid from the View Menu by setting Grid Size to zero amp unchecking Grid Lines However although this allows objects on the screen to be positioned manually to within one pixel this requires very precise positioning of the mouse amp so is not recommended How can make some text appear on the screen using the Strategy Controller when something happe
105. Enumeration 70 Error Codes 219 Data Entry Numeric 69 Error Codes Protocol Specific 221 Data Entry Text Strings 71 Ethernet and TCP IP 3 Data Log Files 164 Europe Contact Numbers 235 Data Logging 162 EventLog 78 Data Logging Alarms 172 Event Logging 173 Data Logging Definition 252 Event Type 191 Data Logging Events 173 Events Show Event List 124 Data Logging Variables 163 EVT logfile 173 Data Logging Rate 165 Example Automatic Log Report for the duration of a Date SpecView variable 101 Ramp Soak profile 181 DDE Dynamic Data Exchange 214 Example of Automatic Log Report at midnight 243 DDE Application Name 215 Examples of Time Based Events 201 DDE Read Example 218 Examples of Value Based Events 195 DDE Status Topic 215 Exit SpecView fro Button 133 DDE Topic Name 215 Extruder Picture 99 DDEPoke Examples 217 Decimal Places 53 253 Index 262 F Help Menu Runtime 82 gt Historical Replay 174 Historical Replay Find Batch Number 175 FAQ Installation Upgrade 238 Historical Replay Option 174 FAQ Instrument 239 History Start Replay 126 FAQ SpecView Configuration 243 FAQ SpecView Runtime 239 FastCount SpecView variable 101 FastCount SpecView variable in detail File Menu Configuration 84 File Menu Runtime 76 Filling Graphics Objects with color Fonts Changing 120 For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 237 Full Screen Mode 136 Full Screen mode
106. Excel The name of the recipe on the first line may be changed and the recipe item s new value in the 4th column However do not remove any of the commas that separate the columns or change the data in first 3 columns as these are used by SpecView to match up the recipe items when importing the recipe Whole lines can be removed if you wish to remove a recipe item from recipe but be aware of the importing issues detailed above 10 10 Recipe Send Recipe Send Also Send To Sends the recipe values shown on the GDW to the instruments A progress box is displayed If an instrument does not accept the value sent by SpecView Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Recipes 148 Sending Recipe Recipe Send Auto Continue SpecView will continue to send the Recipe and ignore all future write errors Recipe Send Abort The Recipe send is aborted NOTE Values already sent will be the values in the instruments Previous values are not restored Recipe Send Continue Clicking Continue will resume the Recipe send The loading will pause again if there is another write error 10 11 Recipe Send To Recipe Send To This dialog box is only displayed when there is more than one identical instrument that the recipe could be sent to and allows the Source and Target instrument s to be selected Recipe 5end To Routing Table Furnace 1 Furnace 1 Furnace 2 Furnace 2 Furnace 4 Furnace 6 Furnace f This will only se
107. GDW for the very first time subsequent SpecView runs will use whatever was the last value of the variable SpecView will save the values of all User Variables when it exits and will restore the values on the next run It is possible to set a variable to have a specific default value EACH time SpecView Runtime Mode is entered To do this use the Strategy Controller s Startup eventto do the action Parameters Download Specific Value Click the Show Defined button and then the 57 symbol next to SpecView and your new variable will be listed under User Variables and then grouped by type Clicking on the 5 symbols will expand these lists The User Variable you have just created can now be added to the GDW in the same way as the instrument variables by either double clicking it or selecting it and clicking the Add Item button Text Variables are used for a single line of text that is editable in Runtime Mode Time variables may have a value entered manually from a GDW or have its value set by a Button Attribute or Strategy Controller Action DateTime and Date variables may only be set to current computer values using the Parameters Download Specific Value button attribute The Countdown Timer may be written to as a time variable and it will count down from that value NOTE Countdown Timers are not stopwatches They have no reset function or start stop capability They are always running towards zero from the last value set They do NOT count
108. Ignore with the value 2 SpecView variables or Instrument parameters Click the required parameter on the Methods tab then click the Variables List button Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 212 From the return value of Refresh el vik om the return value of Clearsel rom the return value of DoClick From the return value of OLEDrag From the return value of 2boutBox Ignore select Color select Font amp select the instrument or SpecView User variable to link it to 3 Colors Choose Select Color and select the required color The color will be shown in notation for example Color_65280 not as the name of the color for example Green 4 Fonts Choose Select Font and select the required font The font will be shown in notation for example Font_Arial 10 0 400 0 not as the name of the font for example Arial Regular 10 Enable Disable This will enable or disable the selected item or if none are selected then it will enable disable the entire control All controls can be enabled disabled using the File gt Preferences ActiveX tab Invoke 8 Show As Font Invoke 8 Show As Color Some ActiveX controls are written such that they have some Outputs amp Methods that can be represented as Colors or Fonts However please refer to the Control s documentation for further information on this Invoke The Invoke button can be used to run a Method to test it S
109. In order to Log pre defined variables use Database gt Show Logging in Variables List from the Setup menu and check the boxes next to the relevant variables in the Variables List SpecView Time and SpecView Date are the current Time and Date on the computer SpecView NewAlarm is a Boolean which will become True when there is a new alarm and will remain True whilst there are any alarms left un acknowledged It will be set back to false when all alarms have been acknowledged SpecView AnyAlarm is a Boolean which will be True when there is any alarm whether acknowledged or not It will be set back to false when all alarms have been cleared For further details read Alarms SpecView PasswordUser is a Text variable set to the username of the current user who is logged in SpecView PasswordLevel is an Integer variable set to the level of the current user who is logged in SpecView PasswordTime is a Countdown Timer variable set to the number of seconds that this user can remain logged in These are shown on the Status bar For further details read Passwords SpecView GoodComms is the total number of successful comms transactions coming in from all attached ports SpecView BadComms is the total number of unsuccessful comms transactions coming in from all attached ports SpecView CommsErrorCode is the last error code from the last failed transaction SpecView CommsErrorltem is parameter which caused the last error code The most common e
110. Menu Help Menu Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 84 6 1 2 File Menu Configuration File Menu Configuration File Edit Draw Object View Passwords Setup New Ctrl M Oper Ctrl 0l Close Save Ltrl S Sawe As Set Ae First EE Autoapen on Runtime Enter Runtime Mode Preferences Ltrl E Print Cte Print Preview Print Setup Print to JPG T LAS oe 735 00 TSMENU PAGE GCW 2 OUTGOING EFFLUENT GDW SINCOMING FRESH wh TER GDW 4 EFFLUENT TO SUMP GD Restart Specview Exit Spec ew New Shortcut Ctrl N MEE Toolbar a Opens a new blank GDW Instrument Views and Variables can now be added to this new GDW by clicking on the Variables List tool Hex Quick Start Guide and a button can be used to swap between GDW s during Runtime Mode as is described in the Open Configuration Shortcut Ctrl O Close Configuration Closes a GDW Toolbar Opens an existing GDW Same function as File Open Runtime Mode Save Shortcut Ctrl S i al i Toolbar Saves a GDW This will save all changes made NOTE There is no Replace Existing warning dialog box so to save as a different name use Save As on the File menu Save As Saves a GDW with a new name This is useful if you want to make an exact copy of a GDW and then edit the Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 85 SpecView User Manual variables Editing Dynamic Attributes Se
111. NDOWS COMMAND XCOPY D C Y CASVIZ2DEFAULTI CASAFE gt gt xcopylog txt type empty txt gt gt xcopylog txt In this example the logfiles to be copied are in C SV32 DEFAULT they are being copied to C SAFE and the XCOPY command is in C WINDOWS COMMAND Please note the underscore character between the two and the three question marks You may want to set the Close on exit property on the xcopythem bat batch file using Windows Explorer This will create an output file xcopylog txt which contains the date amp time of each copy together with a list of the files copied How can make the Strategy Controller run another program Use the action SpecView Run external program It is important to include the full pathname of the program to be run for example C TEMP MYPROGRAM Without the full path SpecView will only look in the current configuration s sub folder in the installation folder usually C SV32 for the program To run a BAT file create the file in the configuration s sub folder with the commands to be run If you require the MS DOS Prompt window to disappear when the BAT file has finished then add the command exit as the last line of the BAT file Also on the MS DOS Prompt s properties check the Close on exit box However note that any error messages from the running of the BAT file may then be lost How do run a DOS BAT file from the action SpecView Run External Program The BAT file can be in SpecVi
112. Options oom Window Help MMSTC Input 1 26 7 Tuesday August 0G 200 Click Label for Scale Chart for Cursor MMSTC ln 1 MMETC In 2 MMSTC In 3 1 z a 4 a fi T a 40 00 20 00 20 00 10 00 0 00 10 32 15 10 32 30 10 33 00 10 33 15 Help Go to second screen The Instrument View variable Trend chart and Bar chart on the first screen of the GDW will be displaying data Clicking on the button s shown within the Instrument View s in this example the PAR button should perform similar actions to clicking on the respective buttons on the front of the actual instruments themselves Clicking on the value of the variable in this case 26 7 MM8TC Input 1 26 7 could if the variable was writeable allow this value to be changed However as the variable Input 1 is not a writeable variable this is not possible in this example The Trend chart lines will initially be invisible However after a few moments the lines will start to be drawn depending on the time span that was specified for the Trend chart when it was created Clicking on the Setup button in the top right hand corner of the Trend chart allows you to modify the Trend chart attributes Clicking on the Help button in the bottom left hand corner of the Trend chart will display help for the Trend chart attributes Clicking on any of the Pen labels along the top of the Trend chart switches the vertical scale to match the scale that you defi
113. PG Jpeg format file The filename of the file that is created has the date and time in the format YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS JPG The file is written to the current Configuration folder Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 126 If more than one request to print JPG is made at the same second then the file will be overwritten When this command is used as an Action in the Strategy Controller then SpecView will force File gt Auto open on Runtime for that GDW See also the Runtime mode menu commands Print and Print to JPG on the File menu and the Configuration mode menu commands Print Preview and Print to JPG on the File menu 6 4 12 History Start Replay History Start Replay This Button Attribute will start Historical Replay on this GDW This action is not available from the Strategy Controller 6 4 13 Logging Convert Specific Log File Format Logging Convert Specific Log File Format This Button Attribute will convert a specific log format Action Lagging Convert Specific Log File Format 6 4 14 Logging On Off Logging On Off This Button Attribute turns data logging On and Off It is usually used as an Action in the Strategy Controller The logging rate will be changed to this value when the button is clicked A value of 0 seconds turns off data logging Action Lo q gin g On Off Rate in secs 0 OFA o The current value for the logging rate is stored in the
114. Recipe Download Specific Recipe Recipe Show Recipe Manager Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Send To Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Send To mode Specview Exit Program SpecvViem Masimize Screen SpecView Minimize Screen Spec iew Restore Screen Specviem Aun External Program SpecView Write Line to file printer If the Event Log box is checked the action will be time stamped in the event log each time it is executed If the event log has been set up to record specified strategy items This is the default setting of the event report 14 8 Examples of Value Based Events Examples of Value Based Events Turn on a digital output on a New Alarm Simple Count Up Timer Cascade Control Automatic Log Report with protection from unwanted triggers Contact your SpecView distributor for more examples 14 9 Turn on a digital output on a New Alarm Turn on a digital output on a New Alarm SpecView can monitor any boolean variable as an Alarm also Alarm Event Menu This Strategy Controller example shows how to turn on a digital output whenever SpecView detects a new alarm Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 196 Wariable Based Event Description New Alarm l Log To Event Log Yalue to watch Spec iew _NewAlarm Choose Test to perform Equal To Yalue to test against Constant Value On Set Yalue C Other Variable Choose
115. Report Generation e Turning a Variable On Off when an event occurs e Setting Variables to new values e Timing events such as Down Time e Counting events e Implementing cascade control e Performing multiple adjustments from a single click such as incrementing several set points at once Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 180 Using the Strategy Controller involves two steps a Defining an Event 2 Defining one or more Actions to go with the Event This may also be thought of as an IF THEN statement NOTE There is no ELSE function in the Strategy Controller If an event is defined such as Zone1 Process Value gt 200 3 Turn On Outputs Relay3 SpecView will do nothing when the value falls below 200 A second event Zone1 Process Value lt 200 3 Turn Off Outputs Relay3 must be defined EVENTS are tested continuously and in no particular order see below ACTIONS are executed in the order that they are shown in the list Below is a step by step example which explains the function of each item available in the Strategy Controller It is strongly suggested that the user follow through this example even if it is not relevant to the application to become familiar with the concepts of the Strategy Controller Both the Events and Actions of the Strategy Controller can be logged to the Event Log Programming the Strategy Controller Step by step example showing how to use the Strategy Contr
116. Set Value button The type of parameter that you selected to watch will determine the type of dialog box that appears In this case it is an enumerated variable which gives you a list to choose from Double click the one you want in this case Run Set Value Hold 4 Holdback 8 Ehooze Complete 16 The Value Based Event box should now look like this Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 186 Yariable Based Event E Description 1010 Ww atch Program Start l Log To Event Log Value to watch Booth 1 control Program Status Choose Test to perform Equal To Value to test against Constant Value Aun C Other Variable Ehooze Event Control T Enable On Boolearr True EN False iy Ehooze Disable Event Startup Event Examples Cancel Oo K Click OK to close the Variable Based Event box The Strategy Engine Setup box should now look like this Event Action O10 Watch Program Start Add Edit Delete Up Copy she Down Copy List Help Cancel Step 4 Define an action to time stamp the program start Click the Add button on the Action side of the box The Action dialog box is displayed Add Edit Delete Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 187 SpecView User Manual Action Event Log Cancel Descriptor Mas Action Parameters Copy From To ki Cop
117. SpecView Variable LogRate This variable s initial value when entering Runtime mode will be the value set from Preferences Logging The variable is Read Only and cannot be changed during Runtime mode other than by using this action NOTE This button action only changes the logging rate for THIS Runtime session To change the default log rate use Preferences Logging Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 127 SpecView User Manual 6 4 15 Logging Purge Log Files Logging Purge Log Files This Button Attribute will cause the log files older than the specified number of days to be deleted This will also delete any Batch Tag information associated with those log files Logging can be enabled disabled and the logging rate specified using the action Logging On Off 6 4 16 Logging Show File Convert Manager Logging Show File Convert Manager This Button Attribute displays the Log Report Setup box This has the same effect as the Convert Log File menu command on the Logging menu This action is not available from the Strategy Controller 6 4 17 Parameters Alter Value Interactively Parameters Alter Value Interactively This Button Attribute will have the same action as clicking on the variable Choose the desired variable from the Variables List Caption Barrel Zone 2 SP F key lt None gt Action Specview a Time o Date Se MeWwAlarm o Anv larrn o Password User o PasswordLewel o PasswordTime op ser Variables
118. SpecView cannot guarantee nor warranty such controls Ensure that the author of the Actives Control is trusted as Actives can be used for malicious purposes Contact pour SpecView representative for further details Providing support for any configuration containing Actives Controls requires that the Actives controls are sent to Specview This may have a licensing sue with the vendor of the Actives Controls being used Contact the vendor of the Actives Control for further information SpecView cannot help diagnose problems on incomplete configurations Do not show me this message again M OK It is important to read the licensing agreement supplied with the control amp to understand how the licensing is enforced in order to avoid being in breach of the licensing agreement ActiveX Controls which are developed specifically for use with SpecView will have SpecView s licensing scheme built into them this is described below But ActiveX Controls such as Symbol Factory amp Instrumentation Studio which have been developed for general release will not so for these Controls it is important to read the licensing documentation supplied with them Note that Microsoft s licensing strategy is not supported by SpecView amp therefore any ActiveX controls which use Microsoft s licensing will not run If SpecView s licensing scheme is built into an ActiveX Control then If SpecView is being used in Demo mode where SpecView will run for 1
119. SpecView provides up to 5 levels of log in access Level 0 ALWAYS locked only the Password menu command is available Level 1 Operator is the next level Level 5 ALWAYS unlocked everything is available Be aware that just because a variable has been marked as ACCESSIBLE at a level on one GDW does NOT mean it is ACCESSIBLE on another Select All UnSelect All Buttons These buttons provide a quick way to Select UnSelect all the objects on a GDW The Select All button is useful to highlight ALL the objects which the user may need access too and then click to deselect the ones that you don t want this level to have access to Disable Password System Default On this applies to ALL Levels When checked the password system is not active and the system is unlocked at all times This is useful during configuration development when switching frequently between Configuration Mode and Runtime Mode Disable Window Controls this applies to the current Level selected When checked the Window s menus are hidden and the maximize minimize controls are disabled for this level of user In addition to this the following Windows keys will also be disabled e Ctrl Esc e Alt Tab e Windows Key which is positioned on the keyboard between the Ctrl and Alt keys And on Windows 95 98 Me e Alt Ctrl Del is also disabled However on Win NT Win 2000 Win XP Ctrl Alt Del cannot be disabled Allow Configuration Mode this appli
120. THUIMO AY SO TUNG S orcs cba 2 g PS R9422 cal 2 po rer ete Se EEN eee o eR REE A EES Cen oe momar 2 CARA 2 1 5 Ethernet ana UC PUP irie a a a a 3 1 6 Troubleshooting Instrument COMMUNICATION coonnnnnncnncccnnnnnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnononnnnannnnerrrnnnnaaannnnns 3 1 7 Connections for SpecView Networking cccccccssseeescssssseeccenseeeeeeenseeeseoenseeeseonsneeeseoeaneessens 5 126 stalling SPCC AA 6 1 9 Upgrading SpecView from a previous version ccccssssseecseesseeeeseenseeeseoensseeseonseeeseoeasenssees 9 2 Quick Start Guide 11 2 1 Quick Start Introducir iaiaeiaeiaa 11 2 2 Quick Start Starting SpecVieW cccccccssssssseennseeeeeeeeeeeseeeccecoesasseeeeeeeeeeeeeooooonssnssnseseeseees 12 2 3 Quick Start Manual Configuration ieee wate ae 13 2 4 Quick Start For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol ooooonnnccccccconnnccanconccnnnnaaannnnonnnas 16 2 5 Quick Start Automatically detect instruments and display instrument views 17 2 6 Quick Start Add a variable to the GDW cccceesssssssseeeeeeeeeensneeeeeececensneeeeseeeoenneeeesseoes 20 2 7 Quick Start Draw a trend chart iia 23 2 8 Quick Start Define a second GDW innccccccccccccococccccnnnnnncnonononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 25 2 9 Quick Start Add buttons to switch between GDW S cccccceeeeeseseeceessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeones 26 2 10 Quick Start Add a Bar chart oonnccccccnnnccnncccccconocann
121. VOX OVEIVICW sssi ii aaao aE eU 202 15 2 ActiveX Method of Adding an ActiveX Control ssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 202 15 3 ACTIVEX LIC CNSING io 205 15 4 ActiveX On SPECVIEW REM OC scissionisti n aaa aa a aa adaon biS 206 15 9 ACTIVEX INSEF COMU Ol ita 206 15 6 ACTIVEX Preferences sinea a aaa aE aa n O EPSE 207 15 7 ActiveX Variables INPUTS iii a a a aaa aaaea 208 15 3 ActiveX Variables OULDUES omaia aaa a A Ei e 209 15 9 ActiveX Variables Methods cinc 211 19 10 ACUVOA ROCOSO sii is 212 15 11 ActiveX Manage Control LiSt asiiaacinna cion lancia iaa sasteedaseasdcosseensecas 213 15 12 ActiveX Control Not LIGENSEG sica ii id 214 16 DDE 214 16 1 DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Overview ccccsessseccsessseeeseensseeseeeesseeseoenseeessoeaneeesens 214 16 2 DDE Application NAME aa 215 16 3 DDE TOPIC NaMe sonic 215 10 4 DDE SAUS TOPIC rniii A A EESE 215 16 5 SpecView DDE RestiCHhoNnS esiasio aaa apa ar E EN anaa Ea ana 215 16 6 Getting data from SpecView DDE ici ia 216 16 7 Setting datant Spec View DDE iii ias 216 16 9 DDEPOkE EXaMDIE S coincida 217 16 9 Setting up an Excel DDE Poke Example cccccsssesseeeeseenseeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeseeeaseeeeeeeaseesenes 217 16 10 DDE Read Ex alm pol Esim a apaa a 218 17 SpecView Error Codes 219 ATA SpecVieWw Error Types stone oirlo aio aE Aaaa ap EEan IESE iaaa 219 17 2 Spec View Write Erro Sic a 219 17 3 Specview Genetlo Error COdeS iii
122. View Event Window menu command on the Alarm Event menu 6 4 5 GDW Control Close this and Swap To GDW GDW Control Close this and Swap To GDW This Button Attribute will swap to another GDW and close this GDW NOTE Use this action when swapping from a GDW that is only used occasionally such as setup screens This is because a GDW left open will automatically be refreshed in background and this wastes communications bandwidth Choose which GDW to swap to off the drop down list Action GDW Control Close this and Swap To GDW Swap To Current GDW gt ALL FOUR GDW COOL1_ GDW COOL GDW NOTE This will clear the trace on any Trend chart s on the currently open GDW To swap to another GDW screen without closing and clearing the trace line s use GDW Control Swap to another GDW 6 4 6 GDW Control Close this Screen GDW Control Close this Screen This Button Attribute will close this GDW 6 4 7 GDW Control Swap to another GDW GDW Control Swap to another GDW This Button Attribute will swap to the GDW selected in the drop down box NOTE Use this action when swapping from a GDW that is used frequently especially those with Trend charts All variables on a GDW left open will be updated in the background Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 125 SpecView User Manual ction anw Control Swap to another GOW Swap To Current GOW gt ALL FOUR GDW COOLT GDW COOL GDW 6 4 8 GDW Control
123. View User Manual It is then up to the actions defined in the Strategy Controller to get the desired values into these User Variables Read Strategy Controller for examples on doing this 13 9 Log Reports Specifying decimal places Log Reports Specifying decimal places For a number of reasons the Decimal Places DP produced in the converted log files CSV is not always as expected This facility forces the DP setting of ALL floating point numbers in the log files regardless of the individual parameter s DP as known to SpecView At present this facility is only available to ALL of the parameters in the file and also applies to ALL log file CSVs generated regardless of configuration Therefore it should be used with caution It does not affect the underlying precision with which the data is logged data is logged including its whole precision a the event that a report has too few DP it can be run again with a higher DP setting and no information will be This facility can be enabled as follows Find the SV32 INI file this is in the SpecView installation folder usually C SV32 Edit the file using Notepad Find the section marked LOGGING It should have in it just two lines of information as follows LOGGING Rate 60 Enabled Y Add another line after the Enabled Y saying ReportDP 2 In addition to 2DP shown above you can have any of the following numbers ReportDP 0 Produces Zero DP e g 0 Rep
124. Viewing the Instrument Parameter List from the Instrument View Converting a Log File This can be set up so that the resulting file will be written either to the Local or to a Remote computer Note Strategy Controller events and actions take place on the Local Therefore actions that affect for example the values of variables will be seen by the Remote by way of the change to the variable However actions that affect for example which GDW is being viewed will only be seen on the Local Setting Up SpecView Networking 3 11 SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Local SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Local Certain functions are restricted to the Local computer such as e Setting Users User passwords from the Remote menu e Setting Preferences e Displaying the View Connected Users dialog from the Remote menu e Going into Configuration Mode Note that this will disconnect all the Remote connections Setting Up SpecView Networking 3 12 SpecView Networking Troubleshooting SpecView Networking Troubleshooting If you are using Modems to make the connection Then check the section on Modem troubleshooting If you see the message E12214 Local is not available or the connection failed Then the following checks should be made 1 Is the address or network name and port number right To confirm this on the Local look at the title bar of the Remote Users Attached list accessed by using the View Co
125. Windows 95 98 NT 2000 Me XP Vista A 16 bit application compatible with Windows 3 1 is available by special request Any computer that runs Windows and programs such as Word or Excel should run SpecView a minimum of a Pentium with 32 MB RAM although 64 MB is recommended Normal SpecView activity does not put any great load on computer performance Although if a large number of Strategy Controller events are used or large numbers of Logfile conversions are taking place then more computer power is appropriate Communications ports should have 16550 UARTS or better The amount of disk space used by SpecView s log files varies accounding to the number of variables being logged amp the logging rate SpecView may be downloaded at any time from the SpecView web site http www specview com at no charge When used without a Dongle copy protection key there is a 10 minute limit on communications in each Runtime session This timer is reset each time the user enters Configuration Mode and returns to Runtime Mode It is not necessary to restart either SpecView or the computer No save functions are disabled Licensing in SpecView It is possible to add options to SpecView by upgrading the dongle This can be done remotely there is no need to send the dongle to SpecView SpecView is compatible with Touch Screens for use during Runtime Mode as all data input dialog boxes have on screen buttons or access to an on screen keyboard with buttons which
126. a a e a Ea a a ae 220 17 4 Error Codes Protocol Specii cueriiaia ni 221 18 Upgrading SpecView 222 19 OPC Client Support in SpecView 225 19 1 OPC Client SUpport Over vie W visir 225 RE O Sel N AEE AE EA A EE E E E 227 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 VIII SpecView32 Main Help 19 3 19 4 19 5 20 20 1 20 2 20 3 20 4 20 5 21 22 23 23 1 23 2 23 3 23 4 23 5 24 24 1 24 2 24 3 24 4 24 5 24 6 24 7 24 8 24 9 24 10 24 11 24 12 24 13 Supported OPC Servers nuria is 229 OPC Fequently Asked Questions FAQS ccccccesscssseeeeeeeeeeeennseeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeonseeeeees 231 OPC PC Specification Performance dinicusinndicia n 232 Technical Support 234 GontactInformallON canicas iii 234 USA Contact NUMDETS russia ti o a a DS 234 UK Contact Numbers cicais aaaea aE aa SE E E 234 Europe Contact Numbers i 235 Internet SUPPO raia E E E 235 Licensing in SpecView 235 Minimum Requirements for running SpecView 236 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 237 FAQ MAEN aan a E a a 237 FAQ Installation Upgrade siisi a aeaa aar a aaa aaa aaay 238 FAQs ASUMEN anns o e LO 239 FAQ Spec VIEW PRUNING cisco dia 239 FAQ Spec View Configuration us iia ii id 243 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 249 GOSS ANY 1 Lo 1 inaa E AN E te ec ccaan teased pended 249 PN ARIAS ii 250 O 250 COM POr Sening S iii caian oia 250 Communications Ports Com Port ssscccssnss
127. a problem with SpecView in the first instance please contact your SpecView distributor NOTE The latest versions of SpecView can always be downloaded from our Web Site http www specview com Please also check the Frequently Asked Questions section of this Help However if you need to contact SpecView s Technical Support then use one of the following e Electronic Support e mail and Web e Telephone Support in the USA Canada and other countries not listed below e Telephone support in the UK e Telephone support in Europe Please quote the version number of SpecView that you are using this can be found by using the About SpecView menu command on the Help menu Please give both the version number amp the 3 digit build number If you have purchased SpecView then please also give the Serial Number of your dongle The Serial Number can be found either on the printed label attached to the dongle or by using the Registration Information menu command on the Help menu If you have problems with a specific Configuration it is most helpful if the entire problem configuration folder is saved to a single file and attached to an e mail message This can be done using the Archive Restore button This will allow our Technical Support team to run exactly what you are running You may also be asked to click the Technical Information button on the About SpecView box by using the About SpecView menu command on the Help menu to provide further details on
128. a text message to the operator s mobile when something happens Can get SpecView to play a tune when something happens How can send email from within SpecView If copying objects doesn t preserve their Dynamic Attributes how do copy them Can copy a whole Configuration Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 238 Adding a bitmap to a GDW makes the GDW much larger why How do archive logfiles How do delete logfiles am confused about the difference between Log Files and Log File Reports created by Log File Conversion How can setup a Log File Conversion to occur on a regular basis for example every day at Midnight Can Log Files be written into another separate folder How to make a copy of SpecView s Log Files to for example a Network Server How can make the Strategy Controller run another program How do run a DOS BAT file from the action SpecView Run External Program How do setup the Strategy Controller to do a delay for example 5 seconds How can make a button on a GDW do more than one action How can make a button toggle a Boolean so that successive clicks turn it On Off On What is the maximum value for an Integer or Number variable How can a value be displayed on a GDW using scientific notation showing mantissa amp exponent Opening a screen in Runtime mode with a Trend Chart the chart is al
129. able and working Does NOT check communications The port MIGHT be a modem Swap COM Ports This allows the COM ports for multiple instruments to be re assigned without manually editing each instrument Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 97 SpecView User Manual 6 1 9 Window Menu Configuration Window Menu Configuration Window PC3000 Help Cascade Tile Arrange lcons w 1 SPECVIEW GOW Cascade Standard Windows function to Cascade all open windows Tile Standard Windows function to Tile all open windows Arrange Icons This has no useful function with SpecView It is a standard Windows function hence it appears on the standard Windows menu but it is not used by SpecView 6 1 10 Help Menu Configuration Help Menu Configuration Help Specvienw Help Using Help About Specview Registration Info Release Notes Technical Support SpecView Help Help Menu This menu command starts SpecView s help system and displays the contents page Using Help Help Menu Starts the help system for Windows About SpecView Toolbar Wk x Displays the SpecView version and build information Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 98 About specview 5 gt Specview Bld 695 32 32 Copyright Specview 1994 2001 Release Hotes Built with Bld 463532 Technical Information Displays the SpecView version and build information Click Release Notes for the d
130. able if Bool1 is On Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 181 SpecView User Manual Action Set Bool1 to Off Action The actions for an event are performed in the order that they are listed The Startup event can be used to initialize variables There can only be one Startup event defined but it can have many Actions which are typically used for initialization of variables Therefore in order to create a Strategy Controller program then it is necessary to think of it in terms of events amp actions Write down all the significant events such as values going outside thresholds then think of the actions which need to be done when those events occur The list of Events in the Strategy Controller are always listed in alphabetic order Therefore to make reading and understanding the list easier it is useful to number the events so that they are shown in an order which the programmer would expect For example 000 Startup 010 When Temp gt 100 Bool1 Off 020 When Pressure gt 20 amp Bool1 On 030 etc Leave intervals of say 9 between the event numbers to allow the addition of events in the future without the need to renumber them Step by step example of using the Strategy Controller 14 3 Example Automatic Log Report Example Automatic Log Report This example will show the steps for a simple log report A more complex example that incorporates some extra features is described later in this secti
131. abled using the File gt Preferences ActiveX tab Invoke The Invoke button can be used to read an Input to test it See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control 15 8 ActiveX Variables Outputs ActiveX Variables Outputs An Output is an output from a Control Putting the value into a SpecView variable Select the control then press ALT X to display the ActiveX Control Links box click the Outputs tab Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 210 BM Activex Control Links al ES Name s pmbol Factory Standard Control 11 Type s pmbol Factory Standard Control T Change allowed on Remotes Ignore first value on Outputs Y Receive every value Inputs Outputs Methods FillColorMode Integer lgnore BlinkMode integer Ignore Category Text lgnore Handle integer lgnore Type integer Ignore Picture Font Ignore Stretch Boolean On lgnore Flip integer Ignore Fillolor Integer lgnore Alink gt peed Integer lanore BlinkColor integer Band Color integer Ignore Help Enable Disable Invoke amp Show As Font Invoke amp Show As Color Invoke Cancel To assign an ActiveX Control s Outputs to SpecView variables it is necessary to have first thoroughly read amp understood the Control s documentation supplied by the author of the control It is possible to assign an output to a SpecView variable or Instrument parameter Click th
132. ables Properties box A simple example is changing C to F set the scale to 1 8 and the offset to 32 For a change like this it would also be appropriate to change the variable s name from in this example Temp C to Temp F For more complex scaling the formulas below allow you to work out the Scale and Offset values for parameters to convert between the readings available from instrument hardware into the values seen on the screen SpecView always takes the instrument reading multiplies by the scale and then adds the offset For example for a 4 20mA signal coming into a sensor This sensor converts the signal into a O to 4095 range inside the instrument However the values on the screen need to show 0 to 100 for this range The physical signal 4 20mA in the example above does not form part of the equation because the instrument deals with that and provides a range of values 0 to 4095 in this case The equations for Scale and Offset convert from the 0 to 4095 instrument range into the 0 to100 User range InstLo to InstHi represents the range of numbers reported by the instrument UserLo to UserHi represents the corresponding range of displayed values in the formulas Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 109 SpecView User Manual UserHi UserLo Scale Y InstHi InstLo InstL Offset os i UserHi UserLo UserLo InstHi InstLo Other common words for InstLo and InstHi are Full Scale Low and Full
133. ai 174 Historical Replay Control Panel ccccssssseeessssseeeseeeseeeeseeenseeseeeenseeesenseeeseooenseesooeaas 174 Historical Replay Start TIMO aun di doin 175 Historical Replay Find Batch Number ccccsssseeeeeessseeeseeeseeeseeensseeeseenseeeseoneneesseoenes 175 Historical Replay Rate ii a 176 Historical Replay ODO iii 176 Bath Tag Sain A OEE aas 176 Strategy Controller 179 Strategy Controller Overview sscceeccccesnnsseeeeeeeeennsseeeeseeecnasseeeeeeeeeonsseeeseeesoonseseeees 179 Programming the Strategy Controller ccccccssssseeeseesseeeeeeeesseeseeessseeeseenseeeseoeensesseoeaas 180 Example Automatic LOG Report assi adidas 181 Event DO ii aida 191 Value Variable Based Event Setup occccccccccccnonncccocnnccononnccnnnancnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnrennnanos 191 Time Based Event SQ aia ns 193 Strategy Controler AGHONS envidias 194 Examples of Value Based Events csccccceesseeesceeesseeceesseeesseenseeeseonnsseeeeonnseeessonaneessens 195 Turn on a digital output on a New Alarm cccccesseesseeseeeenseeeseeaneeeseenenseeseoenseeessoonneessens 195 Count UN Tie isisa a aa a a A a aaa 196 CasCade COMO dit 198 OVANZON ii aii 200 Examples of Time Based Events iicicsicsiscccsstassciecicnictivccdsnestecciasiesiosiesincstincciesienscivdeisicciaedes 201 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 VII Contents VII 15 ActiveX Controls 202 15 1 ACU
134. al PC appears to slow down when remotes are connected This will happen because one or more remotes may be asking for additional data across the Local PC s communications links to the connected instruments This extra data means that the Local PC can only get data at a slower rate across saturated links This can often happen if a remote user displays a large Parameter list but the effect is no worse than a Local user displaying the same parameter list Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 45 SpecView User Manual It is important that the screen resolution of the Remote is comparable with that of the Local to allow the Remote to adequately display the contents of the Local s screen Use the Show screen sizes menu command on the View menu to ensure that the items on a GDW are positioned appropriately For Windows95 the version of Windows Sockets WinSock will need to be upgraded to version 2 2 in order for SpecView to communicate using TCP IP To do this download the Sockets2 upgrade from http www microsoft com windows95 downloads contents wuadmintools Ss wunetworkingtools w95sockets2 Follow the instructions on the screen carefully as there are several steps that need to be performed Minimum Requirements for running SpecView Setting Up SpecView Networking 4 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 4 1 Starting SpecView Starting SpecView Double Click the SpecView Icon to start the program or run from Program
135. al value when entering Runtime mode will be the value set from Preferences Logging The variable is Read Only and cannot be changed during Runtime mode other than by using the action Logging On Off Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 166 NOTE Use caution when adjusting the rate Disk space is inexpensive If you forget to change the value back you may have logging disabled or at the wrong rate without realizing it 13 5 Log Reports Log Reports A Log Report is a text file in CSV Comma Separated Variable format Most Windows operating systems have this file type registered to Excel This means that double clicking on a file of this type will automatically start Excel and open the file into it For help in using this type of file please consult your Windows advisor NOTE To be available for inclusion in a Log Report a variable must be selected for Data Logging Use the Logging menu EM specview INST GDW j File Logging History Recipe AlarmfEvent Password Convert Log File Setup OR an on screen button if one has been defined to do the Button Attribute Logging Show Log File Convert Manager The Log Report Setup dialog box will be displayed There are two steps to generating a log report l Choosing the Report Format 2 Choosing a Start amp Stop date time for the report Or by choosing the relevant Batch The number of decimal places written to a Log Report can be specified There
136. along the top of the chart will be updated To ensure the current values can be seen put the values out onto the screen from the Variables List To edit the attributes of a Trend chart In Configuration Mode double click anywhere on the chart In Runtime Mode click the Setup label in the top right of the Trend chart Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 137 SpecView User Manual Trend Chart Attributes Fens Time Span 30 Minutes Y Page Print Ase Color Chart Color Move Up Move Down Cancel Font Maximum number of Trend chart Pens There is no limit to the number of pens on a Trend chart BUT the number of labels that can be shown is limited by The length of the label The width of the chart The Font selected for the chart If more pens are defined than can be shown on the top line of the chart e A gt symbol to the right of the last label indicates that not all the label is displayed A sign to the right of the right of the last numeric value indicates that not all the defined pens are shown Page Print When this box is checked the whole GDW will be printed automatically including any graphics Bar charts numeric values etc each time the Trend chart is filled which is when the pen line s reach the right hand side of the chart If you just want a full page Trend chart to be printed then Make the Trend chart as big as you can on the scr
137. ame of the polygon this is case sensitive Now clicking on the polygon will have the same effect as clicking on the button l ve set the Fill Color of a shape but it isn t being filled why Double click the shape amp uncheck the fill none box Why is it that using the Edit gt Paste of an object doesn t appear to work lt has been pasted over the top of the original move it to one side to reveal the one beneath What can do if comparing an instrument value with decimal places with an integer in the Strategy Controller doesn t work Comparisons of variables must be between variables of the same type You will need to create a User Variable of type Number with decimals and copy the integer into it before making the comparison Can get SpecView to send a text message to the operator s mobile when something happens Use the Strategy Controller action SpecView Run External Program This can be used to run a separate package for example SMSMaster from www gcrsoft com can be used in England to send a txt msg to a mobile phone Can get SpecView to play a tune when something happens Use the Strategy Controller action SpecView Run External Program This can be used to run a separate program for example Playwav exe can be used to play a tune on the sound card if one is fitted Playwav can be downloaded from www muconsulting com playwav If Playwav exe is placed for example in the SV32 folder then to play a WAV
138. amp Write Access 31 Remotes Menu 79 Renaming Instruments 58 Re Naming Variables 107 Replace on Edit Menu 86 Re Sizing Bitmaps 119 Restore 4 7 Restore Overwrite Configuration Warning 49 RS422 EIA422 2 RS485 ElA485 2 Running SpecView 49 Runtime Functions on Local 43 Runtime Functions on Remote 42 Runtime Menu 75 Runtime Mode Using SpecView 67 S Saving graphics objects 115 Scaling Variables 107 Screen background color 91 Screen Print 125 Scroll bars Full Screen Mode 136 Scroll bars removing 153 Scrollbars Full Screen Mode 136 Scrollbars removing 153 See how it works in Runtime mode 28 Select Tool 117 Selecting objects 115 Selecting Objects for Access 161 Selecting Variables to be Included in Recipe 142 Setting data into SpecView DDE 216 Setting the recipe download order 149 Setting up an Excel DDE Poke Example 217 Setting up SpecView Networking 30 Setup Menu 94 Short List Editing 107 Software Variables 101 Solid Color Objects 116 Source and Target Instruments 148 SpecView Exit Program 133 SpecView Maximise screen Restore Screen 133 SpecView OPC Client 225 SpecView Run External Program 133 SpecView Write Line to file printer 134 SpecView Command Line options 49 SpecView DDE Restrictions 215 265 SpecView32 Main Help SpecView Error Codes 219 SpecView Local 31 SpecView Networking 30 SpecView Networking Troubleshooting 43 SpecView Networking via Modem
139. an 250 Boolean changing 70 Boolean On Off Names 107 Boolean Names Changing 110 Button Attributes and Strategy Controller Actions 122 Buttons ona GDW 122 C Calling other Programs 133 Cascade Control 198 Cascade Windows 97 Changing Instrument Names 58 Changing Screens 124 Changing Values Using Buttons 127 128 Close SpecView from Button 133 261 SpecView32 Main Help Color Dynamics 112 Decimal Places Changing 58 COM Port 251 Decimal Places in Log Reports CSV files 171 COM Port Settings 250 Decimal point 253 Commandline options 49 Define a second GDW 25 CommsErrorCode SpecView variable 101 Deleting old Log Files 164 Communications ports 251 Description 145 Configuration Mode 252 Disk Space for Logging 164 Configuration mode shortcut shift 8 Go Online Now Displaying Actual Values 99 202 Dongle 253 Configuring SpecView 98 Dongle Troubleshooting 253 Connections for SpecView Networking 5 Draw a trend chart 23 Controlling from SpecView 69 Draw Menu 88 Copying Drawing Objects 117 Drawing Basics 114 Copying one variable to another 127 Drawing Irregular Shapes 118 Count Up Timer 196 Driver Commands 250 Creating Editing GDW s 99 Dynamic Attributes 254 Creating a New Instrument 50 CSV files 166 E D Edit Links 114 Edit Menu 86 Data Entry 68 Edit Review 146 Data Entry Date and Time 71 Enable on Boolean Strategy Controller 191 Data Entry Decimal Places 69 Entering Values 69 Data Entry
140. an be grouped and saved as GDO s using the Save Object menu command on the Object menu The saved GDO s can be re used using the Load Object menu command any number of times in any GDW in any copy of SpecView NOTE Do not include variables or Trend charts or Bar charts in saved objects The default folder to save the object to and load the object from is SymbolLibrary in SpecView s installation folder so typically this would be C SV32 SymbolLibrary However GDOs can be saved to amp loaded from any folder 24 14 GDW Graphical Display Window GDW Graphical Display Window The window used to display data from the connected instruments Graphics drawings are used so that the data may be arranged in a logical and unambiguous format SpecView may have as many GDW s as disk space and Windows limitations will permit Creating and Editing GDW s 24 15 Instrument Instrument The complete device connected at a unique address on the communications link A temperature controller an indicator a process controller a PLC a control system are all considered to be Instruments by SpecView 24 16 Instrument View Instrument View A pictorial view of a connected instrument In most cases it will look like and have buttons that operate in a similar way to the actual instrument when SpecView is in Runtime Mode Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 255 SpecView User Manual Bly SpecView ANAT SPECVIEW GDW Byr File Logging
141. and Download Time are the Date and Time that the recipe was downloaded Downloaded By is the name of the remote connection that downloaded the last recipe Downloaded From GDW is the name of the GDW from which the recipe was downloaded Sent To Is the name of the instrument to which the Recipe was downloaded Although these variables under Most Recent are the ones most commonly used these variables are also available specifically for each individual screen GDW SpecView User Variables SpecView User Variables are variables that exist only in SpecView not in the connected instruments They are sometimes called Software Tags or Dummy Gates Examples include Text for Batch Numbers Material ID Customer Name Times for timers such as log report start and stop times Booleans for automation To define a SpecView Variable s s Click the Variables List tool Lup and click the Show New button then the 5Fsymbol next to SpecView Variables Double Click the variable type you want to create Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 103 SpecView User Manual Yanables d O para i Heude Hame SHart irst Me EulNames Add ltem Properties a Hoolean nono o Floating Point Real o Integer a String o Time o DateTime o Date e Countdown Timer Give the variable a name together with an initial value using the displayed dialog boxes The initial value is only used when the variable is displayed on the
142. ar chart or Button on the GDW by double clicking on a writeable variable in a Parameter List or by using the Runtime Menu Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 68 You will see that GDW s are communicating with the instruments Current or Historical Data e Data Logging is storing values for use in Log Reports Recipes may be selected edited saved and loaded To change a value click the one you want to change For example on this demonstration GDW you could click the 390 setpoint for Zone 2 to change it The top number The bottom number Bar Charts show shows the show s the setpoint deviation from set point actual value Click on this number Mo color Perfect to change i control Barrel ones Cie ones Profile Line 8 Profife Line Beane P et a O a Customer Paragon Plastics Joo No PP 50mm B Historical Instrument instruments Trends Event Log Recipes Replay Setup Click on the buttons to switch to other screens or call specific functions During Runtime the values of variables can be changed by any of the following On the instrument itself From SpecView s screen via data entry DDE Strategy Controller or Button actions e Parameters Alter Value Interactively e Parameters Copy From To e Parameters Download Specific Value e Parameters Math Function e Recipe Download Specific Recipe 9 2 Data Entry Data Entry Any writeable v
143. are intentionally turned off then to avoid SpecView repeatedly checking them set the Comms Back Off Multiplier to a high value such as 200 Although this will mean that when they are then switched back on SpecView will take longer to notice To see whether SpecView is having trouble reading instrument values because of a poor communications link put these SpecView Pre defined variables onto a screen SpecView GoodComms SpecView BadComms SpecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem BadComms should be showing zero for a good communications link Any error codes can be referenced in Error Codes More detail can be found in Troubleshooting Instrument Communications While a Configuration is being developed amp so maybe not all the instruments are available the missing instruments can be re addressed in SpecView to those instruments which are present for example if only 2 instruments are available which are Modbus instruments at addresses 1 and 2 1 0J 2 0J 3 0J readdress to 1 0J 4 0J readdress to 2 0J 5 0J readdress to 1 0J etc This will allow the Configuration to run at full speed rather than wasting time trying to gather data from instruments that are not connected Remember to set the addresses back when all the instruments are connected The design of a Configuration can effect the apparent speed of variable update as the more parameters which are on open screens GDWSs then the more data requests are made by Spe
144. are other settings that can be changed on the Preferences Logfile Conversion tab The CSV Files will be delimited by the Windows settings for Decimal separator and List separator The current settings for these are typically determined by the language being used They can be viewed but not changed from Preferences Settings Log Reports can also be generated from the Remote computer which is detailed in Log Reports from the Remote Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 167 SpecView User Manual 13 6 Log Report Setup Log Report Setup This box is used to convert logged data into a Log Report Log Report Setup Log Files Available 21222005 10 51 18 231 222005 15 07 04 13941222005 09 08 10 191 222005 09 09 07 141222005 11 11 38 1 71222005 13 49 31 12122003 19 15 26 151 22005 08 31 37 111222005 11 33 42 111222005 17 24 51 1941222005 00 00 00 0391 2003 10 55 08 na4922003 00 28 00 084 220039_ 99 59 58 Start From Stop Ak i 0222003 fi 1 34 11 237 222005 3 01 04 Date De Time H M 5 Date DrMr Time H M 5 Find Batch Number M Current Time Report Format amp Generation Criteria Lancel All Varnables LS On Demand gt a Step 1 Choose a Report Format or create a Log Report Format by clicking the Create button Lancel Al es COW Batch Report Report Format amp Generation Criteria Diagnostic Report Furnace 1 Standard Report Furnace 2 Standard Report Fu
145. are using uses Modbus protocol you need to know how the instrument is configured If there is a choice between Modbus or J Bus protocol choose J BUS If there is a choice for Data Bits choose 8 EIGHT If there is a choice for Parity choose NONE If there is a choice for Stop Bits choose 1 ONE The format of the address specification for Modbus is AA PT O Where AA Two digit address of the instrument in decimal P Number of decimal places for user defined items see Note 1 below T Type of protocol J for J Bus M for Modbus see Note 2 below O Optional Address offset See Note 3 below Examples 1 1J Address 1 0 decimal place J Bus parameters 2 1J 2 Address 2 1 decimal place J Bus parameters offset by 2 10 0M 0 Decimals Modbus parameters Note 1 Decimal Places 0 1 2 3 SpecView will put a decimal place in the position indicated by this setting The setting affects those variables where the number of decimals required is based on an instrument setting such as the range that has been selected Some items such as Output Power are fixed at a given number of decimal places and are not affected by this setting AutoDetect may assume 0 decimal places when detecting instruments This might result in values being 10 or 100 times too large on displays If this is the case then edit the address for the instruments from AA OT to AA 1T See below for the meaning of this Note 2 Protocol If in ANY doubt do not enter anything f
146. ariable s value which is displayed on the GDW can be changed by just clicking on it However it may be that some instrument variables cannot be changed unless the instrument is in the correct mode e g Manual mode Data Entry Numeric Data Entry Boolean Data Entry Enumeration Data Entry Text Data Entry Date and Time Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 69 SpecView User Manual Parameter List Bar Chart Setup 5 3 Data Entry Numeric Data Entry Numeric Used for changing numeric values on the GDW ones Setpoint Current Value 455 0 F Auto Close Close The current value is shown which is used as the start point for the new value To change the value Click the A buttons OR Use the numeric keypad and then click NOTE Each time you click the up down buttons the new value is sent to the instrument The maximum values for the different types of numeric variables are detailed in SpecView Variables Send If you make a keypad error click the Erase button the current value will be re read into the New Value field If the value is not accepted by the instrument an error code will be displayed Check that a valid number is being sent Error Codes Decimal Places To change the decimal place resolution of the value sent with each up down click and select from the list 10 P To permanently change the decimal places of a specific numeric variable edit the Dynamic Attributes of
147. ariables required Create Import any graphics Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 99 SpecView User Manual Add Buttons to the GDW s to switch between them Put numeric values on the GDW Add Trend and Bar Charts 4 Putthe four SpecView pre defined variables for Comms on a screen to show the status of instrument communication 5 Add or remove any variables from Data Logging 6 Choose variables to be included in Recipe 7 Configure the optional Strategy Controller 6 2 2 GDWSs Graphical Display Windows GDW s Graphical Display Windows These are the screens you look at using SpecView GDW s are created or edited in the Configuration Mode and used in the Runtime Mode Data is shown on a GDW in four ways o Instrument Views Numerically As a Pen on a Trend chart Bar Chart The Extruder Graphic shown below uses SpecView drawing tools to arrange data in an unambiguous way and shows both numeric values and Bar charts Creating and Editing GDW s 6 2 3 Extruder Graphic Extruder Graphic This is an example of a graphic made with SpecView s drawing tools with both Bar Chart and Displays Barrel Zones Cie ones Profile Line 8 Profife Line 8 NON A um Customer Paragon Plastics Joo Ho PP 50mm B instruments Trends EventLog Recipes ea e Creating Editing GDW s 6 2 4 Creating Editing GDW s Creating Editing GDW s GDW s contain background graphics and variables Managing Instrumen
148. art will start Horizontal Grid Lines To add horizontal grid lines to the Trend chart use Preferences Runtime from the File menu while in Configuration Mode The setting of Trend Grid Segments draws horizontal lines to divide the Trend chart into this number of segments for example 4 divide into quarters as shown below Saturday 23 March 200 Click Label for Scale Chart ftor Cursor Setup hihSTC In 1 100 0 5 00 50 00 25 00 0 00 14 25 14 30 14 35 14 40 14 45 14 50 1455 Help Using Trend charts in Runtime Mode 9 Bar Charts Bar Charts Bar Charts display variables as a moving vertical or horizontal bar 30 0 50 0 Adding a Bar Chart to a GDW The mouse pointer changes to Click and drag a rectangle to the shape you want for the Bar chart When you Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Bar Charts 140 release the mouse button the Bar Chart Setup box automatically appears NOTE Bar Charts can be used with boolean on off variables Set the bottom value to 0 and the top value to 1 This can be used to indicate alarms Bar Chart Setup Bar Chart Setup Orientation Scales i Vertical C Horizontal None Shown Font Left Side l l Color C Right Side Show Value in Bar Cancel Pp Click Bar Action Alloy chara Transparent Top Value MMATC Input 1 oF Specview C Grow Top Down Mihia TE Color When Up input C Grow Up and Down Inp
149. as a recipe download on every BarCode scanned In the case of B the Strategy Controller could be used to capture the last known value of the BarCode and store it in a SpecView User Variable String in order to retain it on the screen for the operator s reference 4 13 HC900 HCDesigner Modbus Map Import HC900 HCDesigner Modbus Map import facility SpecView can import the modbus map file from HCDesigner to define all the blocks and tags from the HC900 into the SpecView Variables list It is possible to add either a new HC900 instrument into SpecView or update an existing HC900 instrument if for example changes have been made to the HCDesigner file See later in this section for important details about what can be updated There are two types of HCDesigner Modbus Maps for the HC900 Fixed Map and Custom Map SpecView can import both types The following screen shots were taken from HCDesigner V 4 2 later vesions may have slight differences To Export the Fixed modbus map In HCDesigner go to File gt Export Report then click on the FBDs button to drop down a small menu Choose All Modbus Registers from this menu Export Report Select a report category to export Controller Modbus Register Map All Modbus Registers To Export the Custom modbus map Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 64 In HCDesigner go to File
150. at using a Log Report Format for which the Output Path has not been specifically defined then the path for Save to Local will not be displayed although it will function as expected and save to the SpecView Configuration folder on the Local 13 8 Log Report Format Log Report Format This box sets up The variables that will be included in THIS report The name of the file generated and where it is to be stored The start stop times of the Report Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 169 SpecView User Manual Log Format Setup E4 Format Description Replace format Vanables To Include Available ln Log File Order ln Report dla ala Lancel TFS THS 1 Qutput 1 TFS TH5 1 Process Value Aa Aa TFS THS 1 5et Point oneb Output Power ones Process Value ETOWE ones Setpoint Add All All gt erent erent Output filename FS Characters Logit plus O0 to 99 From Speciew String 8 Characters LogReprt ES E Output path E Default From SpecView String E Fixed o Start Time Include Alarm Log Include Event Log Shop T irre Current Time Last Conversion of this format C Var War Format Description Name the format for easy identification for example Line 1 PV s only Line 2 Barrel Zone diagnostics Furnace 3 Run Data An unlimited number of formats can be defined Replace Format and Add to format list These buttons save
151. ate at a multiple of real time If data has been logged every minute default 60x will give one point per second on the replay GDW Max should only be used for trend chart replay Numeric items Bar Charts are not refreshed at this rate 13 17 Historical Replay Options Historical Replay Options History Replay Options Auto Pause on Shortest Trend Chart Fill Auto Pause on Longest Trend Chart Fill CPU Max load Factor 10 Cancel Auto Pause will stop the historical replay when the trend chart has filled with new data If there are two or more charts on the GDW that have different time spans as specified in the Trend Chart Attributes dialog check the box for the one you want to pause the replay The CPU Max load Factor allocates a percentage of the CPU time for replay activity The bigger the number the faster the trend chart s will fill but other computer activity will slow Experiment to get the best performance for your computer 13 18 Batch Tags Batch Tags Often there is the need to mark the start and end of a period of Log file data and label it with a Batch number Then subsequently be able to refer to this data by its Batch number during either Historical Replay or Logfile Conversion To select a Batch for Historical Replay click the Other button on the Historical Replay Control Panel then Find Batch Number To select a Batch for Logfile Conversion click the Find Batch Number bu
152. ations some values are legitimately unavailable these variables will be shown as XXX s This is normal amp correct behaviour for that instrument Two common examples of this are 1 Programmer instruments where segment variables change their availability depending on segment type 2 Instruments where optional hardware is not present for example output boards not fitted or auxilliary inputs not configured fitted Please see the instrument manual for which variables may or may not be available under these circumstances o Is this an intermittent failure o What is the value of the variables SpecView BadComms SpecView GoodComms SpecView CommsErrorCode amp SpecView CommsErrorltem These variables can be added to a GDW and or logged To Log these variables use Database gt Show Logging in Variables List from the Setup menu and check the boxes next to these variables in the Variables List then from Runtime mode use Convert Log File from the Logging menu to create a Log File Convert Format which contains these variables Note that the variables will not be listed in the Log Format Setup box until they have been logged according to the rate defined in Preferences Logging or from the action Logging On Off o Has the wiring between the instrument the PC been checked and tested Has anything been altered or added to either hardware or software o Has SpecView s Address Help for the instrument been checked To view this go into Configuration
153. atus line at the bottom of the SpecView32 screen On the Local you will see the transfer rate on the Remotes gt View Connected Users screen If the transfer rate throughput between Local and Remote is not as quick as expected then this is normally caused by modems negotiating a low baud rate due to compatibility or line quality Try re dialling or replacing one or both of the modems 7 Resends high On the Remote the resends are shown as a percentage on the status bar at the bottom of the SpecView32 screen e g Res 30 00 On the Local the resends are shown as a packet count on the Remotes gt View Connected Users screen e g Res20 High resends such as 20 or more could be due to a very bad line or a modem hardware issue Redial to retry the connection If there is still a high resend rate then prove that the modems are OK by using HyperTerminal to send receive a large text file Use the Zmodem protocol to send a large file say 20Mb or more and watch the Retries which indicate failure to send receive If HyperTerminal reports problems then suspect that there is a modem issue If HyperTerminal shows no issue then contact your SpecView Representative Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 39 SpecView User Manual 3 7 SpecView Networking via Modem Using HyperTerminal SpecView Networking via Modem Using HyperTerminal If you find that SpecView is not making a successful modem connection then the very first thing to try is to
154. ay is limited to replaying the last 4 hours of data e Recipe is restricted to a maximum of 5 recipes e The Multiport option is not available so instrument communications can only be done through a single COM port e No Remote connections are available e DDE server is enabled e OPC client is enabled e All drivers are available e All SpecView s language options are available The language that SpecView will run in is based on the current Regional Settings as set via the Windows Control Panel e Otherwise all the functions within the standard software are available including the save functions Once a dongle has been purchased it is possible to upgrade it to add software options to SpecView This can be done remotely there is no need to send the dongle to SpecView Remote computers used with SpecView s Remote option do not require a dongle to be connected to them The dongle connected to the local computer will need to have been purchased for the required number of simultaneous remote users Each dongle is considered to be a license to use the software There is no concept of a Site License within SpecView There is a Troubleshooting program for the dongle should there be a problem Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Minimum Requirements for running SpecView 236 22 Minimum Requirements for running SpecView Minimum Requirements for running SpecView SpecView is a 32 bit Windows application that will run on
155. ber of seconds after which the connection will be dropped The next step is to register the remote users Use the User Setup menu command on the Remotes menu Each user Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 32 will be assigned a password and will be assigned either Read Only Level 1 or Read amp Write Access Level 2 or Alarm Acknowledge Level 3 Read Only will prevent the Remote user from changing the values of variables on the Local Remotes Password Setup Password Level A Click Add or select the user s name and click Edit Remotes Add Edit User Password Name Po Keyboard Level fi Read Access Password PO g Keyboard Verity Password PO g Keyboard Cancel Note that this is an extra security mechanism for Networking It is independent of SpecView s Password system which will continue to function on the Remote SpecView will decide whether a variable can be changed on the Local based on the Access Level setting for the Remote user in the dialog box above and SpecView s Password system The options are 1 Read Access Allows just Read Only access so that variables cannot be changed from the Remote 2 Read amp Write Access Allows Read amp Write access so that variables can be changed from the Remote 3 Alarm Acknowledge Allows Read amp Write access as well as allowing Alarms to be acknowledged from the Remote We recommend that caref
156. bled on the dongle The BarCode parameter of that instrument will display the last sequence of characters sent from the COM port with a lt CR gt after it There is NO specific action for a bad read within SpecView Some scanners will return the string BAD READ but Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 63 SpecView User Manual SpecView will assume that any string terminated with a lt CR gt is a valid string The case of a timeout will need to be handled appropriately as there might be an issue with timeout when the String goes back to XXX Consider these two different scenarios A If the BarCodes are guaranteed to be different each time because they represent a serial number Then it would be best if the last BarCode received were shown on the screen without going to XXX after a timeout period So it is necessary to use a high value for the timeout such as T 10000 using Setup COM Port from the Options menu to keep the last value on the screen B If the BarCodes could repeat themselves and be the same twice in a row such as when there are two of the same product at a supermarket checkout Then keeping the BarCode on the screen for a long time means that the operator cannot tell the difference between the first item and the second In this case the value of T should be short enough so that the values go to XXX between readings either because they are being counted or because an event is being triggered such
157. bles will have the new names Therefore it may be necessary to edit some labels on screens or re create the instrument views if an instrument has been renamed e After import a Summary screen is shown detailing the changes If this summary indicated items that really should not be altered then proceed with caution e f an instrument is added where the name specified already exists then the name will have 2 or _3 _4 etc automatically added making for example Furnace1 PID_2 If there are any problems with the import or the update then email an Archive of the configuration plus the Modbus Map file that was used to SpecView 5 Using SpecView 5 1 Runtime Mode Runtime Mode Using SpecView Click the Go Online Now button to go into Runtime Mode with the highlighted configuration Configurations Found Auto Online Batch Aun Countdown until auto online bo DEFAULT 33 Stop countdown Networking Remote Automatic Configuration Test Comme for NEWW contig Archiwe Restore Archive Restore Ner Manual Configuration Refresh E sil Seconds This will happen automatically when the countdown ends Click the Stop countdown button to cancel the countdown NOTE To go directly into the Configuration Mode of the highlighted configuration press and hold the shift key while clicking the Go Online Now button Actions are initiated by Clicking on an object such as the value of a variable B
158. bottom left hand corner of the screen this number of pixels in size To use this magic square double click inside it click once outside it and then once inside it again all within a short space of time Then return to Configuration Mode and put a button somewhere on the GDW which has the action GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until next entry to Runtime Mode Date and Time Format Specifications a Abbreviated weekday name A Full weekday name b Abbreviated month name B Full month name c Date and time representation appropriate for the language locale d Day of month as decimal number 01 31 H Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 l Hour in 12 hour format 01 12 j Day of year as decimal number 001 366 m Month as decimal number 01 12 M Minute as decimal number 00 59 p Current language s locale s A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock S Second as decimal number 00 59 U Week of year as decimal number with Sunday as first day of week 00 53 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Preferences 154 w Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is 0 W Week of year as decimal number with Monday as first day of week 00 53 x Date representation for current language locale X Time representation for current language locale y Year without century as decimal number 00 99 Y Year with century as d
159. button NOTE The Last Conversion of this format feature is disabled when the report is generated automatically by either a Button Attribute Logging Convert specific log format OR by a Strategy Controller action When using these features the Start and Stop time must be obtained from SpecView Date Time User Variables see below or from a Batch Tag Automatic Report Generation One of the most popular features of SpecView is to generate log reports automatically when an event occurs The Strategy Controller option is needed to achieve this The two most common are 1 At a fixed time period every day every shift every week etc 2 At the end of a batch process To do this it is necessary to define two SpecView Date Time User Variables One is used as the Start time and one as the Stop time To define the User Variables 1 Open the Variables List Click the Show New button Click the 5 symbol by SpecView Variables Double Click DateTime Enter a name for the first variable Batch Start and click OK Click Close on the default data entry dialog box Repeat these three steps to create the second variable Batch End N O O01 E Y N On the Log Format Setup box click the Var radio buttons and select the User Variables that have just been created Start Time StopTime C Last Conversion of this format C Current Time e Var BatchStar a te War BatchE nd Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 171 Spec
160. button to get the standard pointer Click an object to select it To select or de select multiple objects press and hold the Shift key and click the object s OR Click away from any object and drag the mouse while holding down the mouse button All objects touched by the dotted rectangle will be selected NOTE SpecView draws an imaginary box around each object Touching the object means Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 116 touching this imaginary box You may select objects especially lines drawn diagonally that you do not expect to be included la ily When more than one object has been selected they may be Grouped Object Menu Group OR OR G All objects Selected After Grouping I l HW Objects in front behind others Grouped objects may be saved as GDO files and reused with the Save Object and Load Object menu commands on the Object Menu 6 3 3 Shape Properties Shape Properties Double Clicking or Alt Enter on an object will bring up the shape properties box Shape Properties Outline Weight Cancel Fill R None FLE_Eb i Outline Weight changes the line thickness of the border 0 No Border Click the Fill box to remove the check mark and to fill the object with the currently selected Fill Color Click again adding the check mark to remove the fill color NOTE With no Fill the object is transparent you can see objects u
161. c iew Batch Run SPECYIE El File Logging History Recipe Alarm E Open Close Configuration Mode Preferences Chrl E Print Ctrl P Print Setup Print to JPG Toggle Full Screen mode Restart SpecView Exit Open Use this command to open a previously saved GDW Open ki Look IF E Her do EN Ej Exa S Pec view GOW File name Specview qdw Files of type SpecWiew Files GD Lancel ve Close Closes the current GDW This is the same as the GDW Control Close this screen Configuration Mode Switches to the SpecView Configuration Mode Preferences Shortcut Ctrl E Displays the Preferences dialog box Print Shortcut Ctrl P Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 76 177 SpecView User Manual Printer Epson Stylus COLOR on LETT Cancel Setup Selection Pages From li To Help Print quality 360 dpi 5 Copies li M Collate copies Click the OK button to print the current screen GDW to the printer shown Print Setup NOTE Landscape mode is recommended for GDW s containing Trend charts Print Setup El Printer Name HP Officelet Pra 1170C Series Properties Status Default printer Ready Type HP fficelet Pro 1170C Series Where LFT Comment Orientation f Portrait Letter 8 5 411 in C Landscape Cancel Use this dialog box to select and setup the printer NOTE To change the
162. cView Consider whether the buttons which are being used to navigate between screens should use the action GDW Control Swap to another GDW or GDW Control Close this amp swap to another GDW The Swap to action leaves screens open so these continue to request data for the variables which are on them Whereas Close this amp swap to will close the screen so use this to ensure that only the necessary screens are left open Although screens which contain Trend charts should be left open so that the charts continue to update Similarly check which screens have Auto open on Runtime enabled on them from the File menu The rate that variables update when using SpecView Remote can be altered by editing the Remote connection and changing Update rate Packet size Packet timeout amp Packet count For OPC connections the OPC Server itself can be tuned please refer to the documentation supplied with your OPC Server If all these items have been checked amp yet the update rate is still inadequate then contact your SpecView Representative They will be able to check that the driver commands in SpecView s communications driver such as the timeout amp number of retries are correctly set for the specific instrument s being used This is done by using the Setup COM Port menu command from the Options menu The fastest rate that values can be logged is once per second If a faster rate of logging is required then the SpecView variable FastCo
163. cView 1994 2007 DDE 218 5 When the Assign Macro dialog box appears click New 6 Type or paste the following lines of code in between the 2 lines for example Sub Button1_Click End Sub channelNumber Application DDEInitiate app SpecView topic var Set rangeToPoke Worksheets Sheet1 Range A1 Application DDEPoke channelNumber SpecView Number1 rangeToPoke Application DDETerminate channelNumber Save and close Microsoft Visual Basic Click on the button with MB2 choose Edit Text to modify the button s label Set A1 to for example 20 5 O Click your button to do the Poke Soe For a slightly more complex example which allows the name of the variable as well as the value to be defined by a Cell follow points 1 to 5 above then 6 Type or paste in the example code from the previous help section in between the 2 lines for example Sub Button1_Click End Sub Save and close Microsoft Visual Basic Click on the button with MB2 choose Edit Text to modify the button s label Then set the cells to for example as follows Set B3 to SpecView Set C3 to var Set D3 to the variable to be set for example Zone1 Setpoint Set E3 to for example 20 5 10 Click your button to do the Poke oT This example is for Excel 97 Open a new Sheet inside Excel Show the Drawing Toolbar Choose the Button tool from the Drawing Toolbar Draw out a button on the sheet When the Assign Macro dialog
164. can be pressed However for foreign lanuages it is not possible to enter accented or complex characters using the on screen buttons Also for doing Log Report Setup during Runtime mode it is easier to use a standard keyboard mouse Similarly for configuring SpecView it is recommended to use a standard keyboard amp mouse When using Windows XP Service Pack 2 you may see the Windows Security Alert below because part of SpecView s Remote option attempts to analyse the computer s network during startup E Windows Security Alert I To help protect your computer Windows Firewall has blocked some features of this program Do you want to keep blocking this program S 7 Name S 32 ae Publisher Specview Ltd Keep Blocking Unblock Ask Me Later Windows Firewall has blocked this program from accepting connections trom the Internet or a network IF you recognize the program or trust the publisher you can Unblock it Wher should unblock_a program Click the Unblock button to allow SpecView to complete this analysis SpecView Networking Minimum Requirements Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 237 SpecView User Manual 23 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 23 1 FAQ Index Frequently Asked Questions FAQ For the answers to the following questions please see the relevant section of the FAQ FAQ Installation Upgrade Does SpecView work with Win95 98 NT 2000 Me xP Do need to send the do
165. can rate which is on the Preferences Runtime Tab This controls the rate at which ActiveX Control outputs are invoked Apply fixed value in config mode This is OFF by default When ON this causes the fixed values specified against a control to be applied when entering config mode Delay Output scan until Strategy Running This is ON by default When ON all of the ActiveX Controls inputs are NOT scanned until Strategy start up is complete lf there are no strategy start up events then there is no delay This delay can be useful to ensure Strategy start up actions that set Inputs are completed before anything else such as Outputs could affect the Input values See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 208 15 7 ActiveX Variables Inputs ActiveX Variables Inputs An Input is an input into the Control SpecView setting a value into it Select the control then press ALT X to display the ActiveX Control Links box amp click the Inputs tab M ActiveX Control Links al x Name s ymbol Factory Standard Control 11 Type s ymbol Factor Standard Control l Change allowed on Remotes Ignore first value on Outputs M Receive every value Inputs Outputs Methods lgnore Category lgnore Handle Ignore Type lqnore Picture lqnore Stretch lgnore Flip lgnore Fillolor lgnore BlinkSpeerd Ignore BlinkColor select Color Bandi Color select F
166. complete until its Batch Tag has been changed either to another Batch number or to an empty string As the values of SpecView s User Variables are saved on exit a batch can continue when SpecView is restarted For example if SpecView was monitoring multiple furnaces then create a SpecView Text User Variable to use as the Batch Tag for each furnace such as SpecView Furnace1 Batch SpecView Furnace2Batch etc Here is some sample data showing 3 batches 1 Time FurnacelBatch FurnacesBatch Base Temp Core Temp Hi Temp 24 12 2003 14 52 First Batch 119 1 255 2 2fo 24 12 2003 14 55 First Batch 119 2 255 3 2fo 24 12 2003 14 54 First Batch second Batch 119 3 255 4 2 0 24 12 2003 14 55 First Batch secand Batch 119 4 250 5 2 0 CB 24 12 2003 14 56 First Batch First Batch 1195 5 255 6 2fo 24 12 2003 14 57 First Batch First Batch 119 6 255 7 2fo E 24 12 2003 14 58 Third Batch First Batch 119 7 255 0 2 0 9 241122003 14 59 Third Batch First Batch 119 0 255 4 2 0 This data would be listed as Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 178 MM Batch Number Search Search Criteria Only show batches for last 7 days Only show batches that match f 7 single ch al Y single character wildcard Sort by date C Sort by batch number Batch ag Date Batch Number A Spec yew Furnace Batch Duration E 24 12 03 2 items 24 1203 First Batch 14 51 53 145739 00 05 42 s 24724003 Third Batch 145 35 Running
167. connect Converter T or B to Instrument R Converter T or A to Instrument R and so on Please check this in Eurotherm s Instrument Manual 14 RS485 EIA485 RS485 EIA485 RS485 this is a 2 wire connection and has a maximum cable length of 1 2 km and a maximum of 32 instrument connections Although this is normally a two wire connection some instruments use four wires Follow the instrument manufacturers instructions carefully paying attention to shielding in electrically noisy Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 3 SpecView User Manual environments Two wire converters will have connections marked A or and B or These go to the corresponding connections on the instrument If the instrument has four connections you should use a converter with four connections If you are told by your instrument manufacturer that you can use a two wire converter on the controller jumper the Transmit or B to the Receive or B and the Transmit or A to the Receive or A This leaves you with one or B connection and one or A connection to make to the converter Four wire converters will have two Transmit sometimes send and two Receive connections If your instrument has four connections read the RS422 ElA422 help These marked either amp or A 8 B or both If your instrument has two connections on the converter jumper the Transmit or B to the Receive or B and the Transmit or
168. conoccnnonnnncnnccnnnnnnnnn nr rrnnnnnnnnn nr rrrnnnnnannnrernnnas 27 2 11 Quick Start See how it works in Runtime mode 00nncccccccccccconnnccccnannnoconnnncnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 28 3 SpecView Networking 30 3 1 Setting Up Spec View Networking escocia diana 30 3 2 Specview Networking Local cdt 31 3 3 SpecView Networking REMOlG ii 32 3 4 SpecView Networking Via Modems cccoonocccccnoccncccnnnnanconcnnanncnnnnnnanorcnnnnnncorennnnnrrrnnnnanernnnnans 36 3 5 SpecView Networking via Modem Setup cccoooconccconcconconcnonnnonccnnnanoncnnnannnorennnnerrnnnnannrennnnns 37 3 6 SpecView Networking via Modem Failure csccccceesseeeseseseeeseeesseeeeeeenseeeseeensenseoeess 38 3 7 SpecView Networking via Modem Using HyperTerminal ccccsessseeeeeessseeeeeeees 39 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 SpecView32 Main Help II 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 SpecView Networking via Modem Modem Ty 0cccccoocccccccnnconccnononanonnnnananonennnnnnnonanananens 41 SpecView Networking via Modem TAPI Versions ccccceesseeeeesseeeeenseeseeneeseeeneeeeeaneeses 42 SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Remote oncccconacccononcccnnoncccncnnonnnnanornnannnnas 42 SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Local ccoonccccnnaniconnncccnncncocncnnonennano
169. controls can be enabled disabled using the File gt Preferences ActiveX tab Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 211 SpecView User Manual Invoke 8 Show As Font Invoke 8 Show As Color Some ActiveX controls are written such that they have some Outputs that can be represented as Colors or Fonts However please refer to the Control s documentation for further information on this Invoke The Invoke button can be used to generate an Output to test it See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control 15 9 ActiveX Variables Methods ActiveX Variables Methods A Method is something that can t be classed as an input or output For example something that has no inputs or outputs such as an About box MM Activex Control Links OF E4 Name s ymbol Factory Standard Control 11 Type s pmbol Factory Standard Control T Change allowed on Remotes Ignore first value on Outputs Y Receive every value Inputs Outputs Methods From the return value of Aboto Help Enable Disable Invoke amp Show As Font Invoke amp Show As Color Invoke E me To assign an ActiveX Control s Methods to SpecView variables it is necessary to have first throughly read amp understood the Control s documentation supplied by the author of the control lt is possible to assign one of four kinds of value to a Method 1 Constant values To set a parameter to a constant value replace the word
170. d as GDO files with the Save Object and Load Object menu commands on the Object Menu This menu command is only enabled if more than one object on the GDW is selected UnGroup Shortcut U H Toolbar E and on the Object Menu Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 90 A previously grouped object may be ungrouped for Editing Changing the Dynamic Attributes Changing the Color Dynamics Adding to Recipe Select the object and click the UnGroup tool or choose this menu command This menu command is only enabled if a grouped object on the GDW is selected Align Left Top Right Bottom Distribute evenly horizontal vertical and Realign To Grid If a number of objects on the GDW are selected but NOT grouped then these menu commands will align or distribute the objects evenly For align all objects are aligned with the one furthest in the direction specified for example if a number of objects are Aligned Left then it uses the left most one to align all the others to For Distribute all the selected objects are distributed between the outermost two objects in the selection With the exception of Realign to Grid these sub menu commands are only enabled if more than one object on the GDW is selected Move To Front Shortcut Ctrl numeric keypad Plus Moves the selected object in front of ALL other objects This menu command is only enabled if an object on the GDW is selected Objects In Fr
171. d chart After deleting Pen s click the OK button to save the changes NOT the Cancel button Move Up Move Down Trend chart Enables the eventual position of the Pens listed along the top of the Trend chart to be moved in relation to one another Up is to the left and down is to the right Font Pen The smaller the font the more Pens are available Time Span Trend chart Time ranges are available from 1 minute to 28 days click the box to display the list and select the one most appropriate for your use Check the Page Print checkbox to print the chart s automatically on the printer each time the chart is filled which is when the pen line s reach the right hand side of the chart Axes color Trend chart Select a color from the standard windows chart The time and variable axis will be displayed in the color selected Chart color Trend chart Select a color The whole of the Trend chart will be displayed in this color NOTE Use white if you intend to print the chart Auto open on Runtime This menu command on the Configuration Mode File menu should be used if a configuration has more than one GDW defined which contain Trend Chart s In this case the menu command should be used on each of the GDW s to ensure that their traces start whenever Spec View goes into Runtime Mode NOTE Be sure to click this menu command if the GDW has a Trend chart If you do not the GDW will have to be opened in Runtime Mode before the Trend ch
172. d to as On Line this is SoecView s normal mode of operation SpecView is communicating with the connected instruments Read Runtime Mode Using SpecView When in Configuration Mode use the Enter Runtime Mode menu command from the File menu or the tool to return to Runtime Mode 24 23 Strategy Controller Strategy Controller This is an optional feature of SpecView Without the option enabled on your dongleyou are limited to two events A logic engine based on Events associated with Actions Events can be based on either Time Date or the value of a Variable Strategy Controller 24 24 Toggle Toggle Toggle is a general term for a button or menu command which allows a setting to be turned off and turned on When a menu command is used as a toggle choosing the menu command will swap the option from off to on or vice versa A tick indicator will show whether the setting is on or off An example of a toggle menu command in SpecView is the Show Logging in Variables List menu command accessed from the Database sub menu on the Setup menu An example of a toggle button command in SpecView is the GDW Control Toggle Full Screen mode 24 25 Tooltips Tooltips Tooltips are small information boxes which appear when the mouse is over a button or box The text typically describes the purpose of the button or box some examples are DS olo Preferences Runtime Remote Display Alarm Logging Wi ait for connections from Mo
173. default settings use the printer setup in Windows Control Panel Source In Tray kd If Adobe Acrobat is installed then this will be shown in the list of printers and can be used to create a PDF Portable Document Format file Print to JPG Puts an image of the whole screen including the Windows task bar if it is visible not just the contents of the GDW to a JPG Jpeg format file The filename of the file that is created has the date and time in the format YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS JPG The file is written to the current Configuration folder If more than one request to Print to JPG is made at the same second then the file will be overwritten There is also the Button Strategy Controller action GDW Control Print Screen which allows JPG to be selected from the list Toggle Full Screen Mode Described in Full Screen Mode Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 78 Restart SpecView Restarts SpecView as if the user had exited and started it again Exit Shortcut Alt F4 Exits closes SpecView 5 11 3 Logging Menu Logging Menu Logging Histom Reci Convert Log File Setup Logged data is converted into Log Reports using this menu command 5 11 4 History Menu History Menu History Recipe larm Event Password Enter Historical Replay on this GD This menu starts Historical Replay 5 11 5 Recipe Menu Recipe Menu Recipe Alarmm Event Password Recipe Management Use
174. dem sent IP Port Humber 3413 In order to do this SpecView uses a part of Internet Explorer called comctl32 dll version 5 81 and above If you are using Windows 95 then it is possible that the version of Internet Explorer is too old for this to work Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 258 You could install the latest version of Internet Explorer to obtain the latest version of comctl32 dll Or alternatively you could leave it as it is and accept the fact that SpecView will be unable to display tooltips for its buttons Whichever you choose this will not affect SpecView s functionality in any other way 24 26 Variable Variable Definition A variable is a specific piece of information within an instrument The variable name is always made up of two components lt name of instrument gt lt name of parameter gt Examples Barrel Zone 1 Setpoint Furnace 3 Process Value Variables may be selected and placed anywhere on a GDW used as a Pen on a Trend chart as a value in a Bar chart or selected to be included in a Recipe or data logging There are several Variable Types The Properties of a variable can be changed SpecView itself is considered an Instrument with its own Variables For those who are familiar with the abbreviated variable names used by the instrument s control panel SpecView also has the concept of variable Short Names Read Parameter List 24 27 Variable Types Va
175. dow s clipboard Copy Shortcut Ctrl C Copies the selected object and puts it on the Window s clipboard NOTE Do not copy Dynamic objects Instrument Views Trend Bar charts or variables as the Dynamic Attributes HID_ EDIT DYNAMICATTRIBUTES will be lost SpecView has a quick way to copy drawing objects Quick Copy Paste Shortcut Ctrl V Pastes the contents of the Window s clipboard on the GDW NOTE The selection will be pasted into the same location on the GDW as the Cut or Copy was taken from Hence copied items will be overlaid on each other and will need to be dragged into the correct position Objects in front behind others Delete Shortcut Del ete key Deletes the selected object s NOTE Do not forget that SpecView does not support Undo for deleted objects Replace lf a GDW has been duplicated for use by another identical instrument then this function can be used to rename all the instrument variables on the GDW from for example Furnace A to Furnace B Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 87 SpecView User Manual GD YW Find and Replace Find Replace with M At start of variable only W Exact case M Variables M Text on screen Cancel Note that this will only substitute the variable names that are on the current GDW To use this function the new instrument must be created first in this case Furnace B then do the Replace and then delete the Furnace A instrument Thi
176. during Runtime Via the Switch to Full Screen menu command on the File menu during Historical Replay However once Full Screen mode has been enabled there will be no menus accessible therefore a button should be added to the GDW to reverse the command with the action GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode This button may be placed on another GDW accessed by GDW Control Swap to another GDW NOTE When this mode is enabled there are no menus accessible therefore it is STRONGLY recommended to add a button somewhere on the GDW which has the action GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode If there is no such button then SpecView will display a warning before exiting Configuration Mode However there is an emergency method of getting out of Full Screen mode read Magic Square in Preferences Display Also note that when Passwords are used in conjunction with Full Screen Mode it is important to ensure that there are buttons on the GDW for Login and Logout 8 Trend Charts Trend Charts Trend charts graph or plot variables with respect to time Adding a Trend chart to a GDW Determining the resolution of a Trend Chart SpecView will draw one pixel on the Trend Chart pen line according to the time span of the chart amp the width of the chart in pixels Therefore if the time span of the chart is 28 days amp the chart is 1000 pixels wide then one pixel will be drawn and every 40 minutes This also applies to the rate at which the values shown
177. e Click a Recipe name which has previously been saved using the Save As button and the highlighted values on the GDW will change to the stored values Click the Send button to write the values to the instruments If required the values may be edited before sending click a highlighted value on the GDW to edit it The changes may be stored by clicking Save overwriting the existing Recipe or Save As save as a new Recipe 10 6 Recipe Description Recipe Description Any text may be typed into the description box The description is part of the Recipe so be sure to click the Save tool after you exit the description box Extended Recipe Description E Recipe When running this material MARE SURE that chiller 2 ts fully operational See the supervisor itin doubt Help Cancel Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Recipes 146 10 7 Recipe Hide this box Recipe Hide this box The Recipe box may be covering some of the Recipe variables on the GDW The Hide this box button hides the Recipe box while you edit the Recipe values Recipe Alarm Event Password f Recipe Management Recipe Click OR Recipe to restore the Recipe box 10 8 Recipe Save amp Save As Recipe Save and Save As New Recipes Click the Save button when the lt Current Values gt line is highlighted OR Click the Save As button In either case you will be asked to enter a name Input Required Fa Enter name for Rec
178. e or Ctrl Copy to move or duplicate objects that have variables This includes Instrument Views Trend and Bar Charts RADO aaa a il Click the tool for the type of object you want on i The pointer will change to OR OR OR depending on the tool Click on the screen and HOLD DOWN THE MOUSE BUTTON where you want the top left part of the object and drag the mouse down and to the right Release the mouse button when you have the size you want NOTE The POLYGON tool follows different rules from lines rectangles etc The cursor does not automatically change back to the pointer after you draw the object Use the Left mouse button to draw another object OR The Right Mouse Button to get the normal pointer Select Tool OR Click on the toolbar Use the Shift key to o Snap lines to vertical horizontal etc Snap rectangles to squares Snap ellipses to circles NOTE Once drawn use the Handles to adjust the object Use the corner ones to resize with the same aspect ratio Use the corner ones while pressing the Shift key to change the aspect ratio Use the side ones to adjust width height Drawing an Arc To draw an arc first draw an ellipse of the required diameter then use the polygontool to trace the part of the circle you require then delete the circle Back to Draw Menu 6 3 2 Selecting Grouping amp Saving drawing objects Selecting Grouping and Saving drawing objects Use the Select Tool CEI OR the right mouse
179. e Button menu command on the Draw menu OR click Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions Buttons are used for specific actions such as switching to another screen GDW controlling Recipes and starting other programs The cursor changes to a Click and hold the left mouse button then drag the button to the desired size Click the right mouse button when you have drawn all the buttons you want Double Click the button to edit the Button Attributes Once the Button Attributes have been defined the button can be made to change color on an event using Color Dynamics Buttons can also have multi line text different fonts or bitmaps on them 6 4 Button Attributes amp Strategy Controller Actions 6 4 1 Available Attributes Actions Button Attributes and Strategy Controller Actions Button Attributes and Strategy Controller Action use the same mechanism in the Strategy Controller This box selects the action that will happen when the button is clicked in Runtime Mode NOTE to display this dialog box for a button double click the button in question Button Attributes Caption Close F key lt None Cancel C Bitmap Erowsef Resize to fit text f Text Font Background Colour Action GDW Control Close this screen Alarm OnOff Alarms Show Alarm List Events Show Event List GOW Control Close this and Swap To GD GOW Control Close this screen GOW Control Swap to another GEW GOW Control Toggle Full Screen mode
180. e Strategy Controller create a Value Based event Value to watch SpecView Time Test to perform Changed Value to test against will default to Constant Value 00 00 00 How do I do a Strategy Controller event every minute In the Strategy Controller create a Value Based event Value to watch SpecView Time Test to perform Changed With the Constant Value 00 00 59 My Variables List box doesn t appear why not It may be off screen use File gt Preferences Settings Reset Variables List Window Position How do I animate a graphic using the Strategy Controller Set a SpecView User Variable to represent the phase of the animation Create a number of shapes for the animation Use Edit gt Color Dynamics to make the shapes change color between the background color and another color to make them appear disappear according to the value of the User Variable However it is not possible to animate a bitmap How do make clicking somewhere on a GDW do a button type action This can be used to make a part of a GDW sensitive to a click Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 244 Create a polygon with Outline Weight or line width O and position it appropriately and note its name shown in the Shape Properties dialog box Create a button and position it off screen with the required action Change the caption of the button to be exactly the same as the n
181. e an entry into the Alarm logfile 24 3 Boolean Boolean A Boolean variable is one which has only two possible values On or Off A SpecView Boolean User Variable is not significantly different to a SpecView Integer User Variable except that its values can be given different names such as Yes No Auto Manual etc 24 4 COM Port Settings COM Port Settings When an instrument is being manually defined it is assigned to a COM port If this is the first time this COM port has been used then the Port Settings dialog box will be displayed Port Settings Baud Rate Parity COM S600 Y Driver T COM 19600 Yi Onver COM S600 Y Driver COM4 9600 Driver COMMS S600 Y Driver COME 9600 Yi Driver COM S600 Y Driver T COMES 9600 Yi Onver LOMA S600 Z Driver delle Cancel Typically just clicking OK on this box will be sufficient unless the instrument is using non standard settings Baud Rate If the BAUD rate is known then set it appropriately If there is any uncertainty as to the BAUD rate used by the instrument then leave it set to the default shown Parity The Driver settings will be the factory defaults for the selected protocol Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 251 SpecView User Manual If your instrument is set to other than factory defaults specify the Data bits Parity and Stop Bits you need For further details click the Variable
182. e correct rate A typical use of the SpecView FastCount counter is to write values to a file using the Line Writer to generate a form of Log File faster than the current maximum logging rate of 1 second To do this proceed as follows When writing a line with the Line Writer it is useful to have a better idea of the time interval since SpecView Time is only accurate to 1 second By setting the FastCountRate 100 will give a 10th of a second counter It is possible to extract the 1 10ths of a second from this as follows Create a SpecView Integer user variable set to 1 e g SoecView MinusOne and Two SpecView Text user variables SpecView RawCount and SpecView LastDigit In the Strategy Controller create an event that does Watch for SpecView FastCount Changed by 0 Which has the following actions 1 Copy SpecView FastCount to SpecView RawCount 2 Math Function SpecView RawCount MINUS SpecView MinusOne into SpecView LastDigit The 1 10th digit will be in SpecView LastDigit and this can be put into the lines written to the file SpecView Variables Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 107 SpecView User Manual 6 2 8 Adding Numeric Values to a GDW Adding Numeric Values to a GDW NOTE All numeric values are put on the GDW in the top left corner Move objects out of the way before adding values otherwise they all appear on top of each other Remember you may need f Mx Open the Variables List by clicking
183. e d TCPAIP Protocol Honeywell HE300 Fort 502 Timeout SECS Begin End l Auto Configure Status Checking Checking Click Start Scan to begin Stap Helle ate NAA Skip to Hest Hort Address NAA 7 Auto Build GOW View Firstly if all the instruments to be auto detected are accessible via TCP IP then set the Protocol for all the COM ports to lt None gt Protocol Select the relevant protocol for one of the instruments to be detected Port The port field should be left as 502 unless there is a specific reason to change it Port 502 is the standard Modbus TCP IP port Timeout Due to limitations inside the Modbus TCP IP protocol and the Internet in general scanning for Slave Addresses on a single IP Address can take a long time The Timeout field is used to control this For a LAN the default of 5 seconds is suggested meaning that one slave address per 5 seconds is tested For testing across the Internet a higher value is recommended such as 25 seconds Begin and End This allows you to specify a range of IP addresses this allows all the addresses in the range to be scanned for instruments or if indeed the precise address is not known The Ending IP Address is set to the same as the start address by default this allows for quick scanning of a single IP addressed native instrument or a string on a single bridge The Honeywell HC900 Auto detect is pre set as there can only
184. e different communications protocols SpecView s Multiport option will be required Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 252 24 7 Configuration Configuration A saved database of instruments graphical screens GDW s Recipes logging information etc The configuration name is the name of a sub folder of the SpecView installation folder usually C SV32 Configurations can be Archived and Restored 24 8 Configuration Mode Configuration Mode SpecView has two modes of operation Configuration Mode and Runtime Mode GDW s are created or edited in the Configuration Mode read Creating and Editing GDW s When in Runtime Mode use the File Configuration Mode menu command to return to Configuration Mode When starting SpecView it is possible to shortcut directly into Configuration Mode missing Runtime Mode by selecting the required configuration from the list and then hold the shift key down while clicking the Go Online Now button on the Configurations Found dialog box Configurations Found uto O nine Batch Aun Countdown until auto online bo DEFAULT 33 Stop countdown Networking Remote Automatic Configuration Test Comme for NEWW contig Archiwe Restore Archive Restore Ner Manual Configuration Refresh E sil Seconds 24 9 Data Logging Data Logging Storing on disk the value of selected variables at a pre set time interval Da
185. e events are checked If an event is true the Strategy Controller will execute the actions associated with that event In this example if the program is already running when SpecView is started 010 Watch Program Start will trigger and the time stamp will be done If this is a problem extra Strategy steps and intermediate boolean variables must be used to prevent the unwanted triggering of the event An example of this is shown later in this section NOTE This Edge Triggering is such that once an Event has triggered for example Process Value gt 200 then the Event will not be triggered again until the value has gone below 200 and then above 200 again Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 191 SpecView User Manual 14 4 Event Type Event Type Value Based events test the value of a Variable against either a constant or another Variable Time Based events monitor Time Day Date Day of Week etc 14 5 Value Variable Based Event Setup Value Variable Based Event Setup Examples Variable Based Event E4 Description 010 Watch Program Start T Log To Event Log Value to watch Booth 1 Control Program Status Choose Test to perform Equal To a Value to test against Constant Value Aun Set Value C Other Variable Choose Event Control W Enable On Boolean Specview Program Running Tuell False 0 Choose Disable Event T Startup Event Examples Lancel Description is a text
186. e other windows on the screen to click between as single clicking on a variable by accident will popup the variable change dialog box e Disable COM Port Settings Popup Disabled Used to Disable COM Port Settings dialog box e Archive Resiore Directory This defaults to the folder that SpecView is installed in but it can be set to any drive and folder e Trend DP Override Allows the number of decimal places used by Trend Charts to be set e Line Writer DP The Line Writer is either a button or Strategy Controller action type This specifies the number of decimal places to be used NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until next entry to Runtime Mode Full list of Preferences 11 3 Preferences Remote Preferences Remote Preferences for Remote The devices shown are those which have already been configured in Windows e Port Network IP Port Number e Timeout seconds The devices listed are those which have already been configured in Windows Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 153 SpecView User Manual Click the Port Number to change it but this should only be changed with caution Click the Timeout to change The timeout for Modems is the the time before redialing This is set by default to 50 seconds because many modems require some time to clear down and so therefore a rapid redial will not succeed so we recommend caution before changing this SpecView Remote SpecView Networking via Modem
187. e required parameter on the Fil olor integer Ignore BlinkSpeed integer onoare ivl BlinkColor integer Ignore Input tab amp click the Variables List button amp select the instrument or User Variable to assign the value to When choosing a variable from the Variables List there are checkboxes to allow the type of variables to be changed such as converting a Text variable 25 Dec 2005 to a Date variable 25th Dec 05 Do not convert Color Font Date Time Number with decimals Integer which can be Signed or Unsigned String Display format This is used only when converting a number into a String to specify the number of decimal places or whether scientific notation is required However it is always preferable to use a variable which is itself of the correct type as type conversion should only be required on rare occasions when the control s documentation specifies Note that it is sometimes possible for an output from a control to be split across more than one output parameter For example the Time could be split into 3 separate parameters of hours minutes amp seconds However in this case whenever one of the parameters changes then all 3 will be sent to SpecView from the Control but the other parts of the parameter may not yet have been updated Enable Disable This will enable or disable the selected item or if none are selected then it will enable disable the entire control All
188. e screen 2 Then Select these variables for Recipe 3 The sets of values are then created as follows Recipe AlarmEvent Password From Runtime Mode either click Recipe Management Recipe OR click which is a button that has been previously defined in Configuration Mode to perform the required Recipe action The Recipe dialog box will appear If no items have been previously selected in Configuration Mode for Recipe for this GDW this box will appear Specview 57 AN Mo thems marked for recipe on this GD In AE case the variables need to be selected using B mE on the toolbar in Configuration Mode Warming Recipe Edit Mode Values may not be curent lt Current Values gt Screen values Curent 4 46 4 items Hide this box send Save Save As Import Esport Description Delete e To define the values for each variable click the highlighted values on the GDW itself and enter the new value Do this for each variable However if a variable does not need to be changed in this set of values just click the No Change button on the data entry dialog box for that variable Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Recipes 144 Then click the Save As button to save the set of values to a name This name can then be used when in Configuration Mode for button actions or by the Strategy Controller You can define numerous different sets of values up to 1295 each given a differ
189. e set according to the Batch and the Historical replay will run according to the rate set If there is a Trend chart on the GDW and Auto Pause has been selected in the Options then it may pause on Trend chart fill At the end of the replay of the Batch data it will show End of batch Auto Pause in the Control Panel Replay Control Panel End of batch Auto Pause 15 13 39 Thursday Play January 22 2004 Start h 2h Options Cloze 12H 24h Rate 60x 1s 1min Clicking Play will then continue the replay beyond the end of the selected Batch Hints amp Tips An example of the use of Batch Tags could be where the Strategy Controller is used to watch a Profile running status and when the profile or recipe or program has reached its end state then a Strategy Controller Action sets the Batch Tag to blank to signal the end of the batch If a batch number is to be entered manually then it is useful to put a Text User Variable on the screen which is not marked as a Batch Tag for the number of the next batch For example SpecView NextFurnace1 Batch Then when the batch is started the first action is to copy the NextFurnace1 Batch to Furnace1 Batch before performing the other actions necessary to start the batch 14 Strategy Controller 14 1 Strategy Controller Overview Strategy Controller The Strategy Controller is used to automate functions in SpecView such as e Automatic Recipe Downloading e Automatic
190. e the password system make the amendments test them modify the password system appropriately and then once everything is completed re enable the password system NOTE When setting up the password system it is necessary to ensure that all variables which may need to be changed during Runtime are accessible by at least one user EN SpecView SPECYIE W GDW File Edt Draw Object View Passwords Setup PELE ST sa como NOTE that when Passwords are used in conjunction with Full Screen mode it is important to ensure that there are buttons on the GDW for Login and Logout Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 159 SpecView User Manual When Passwords are enabled it is not possible to use the Shift amp Go Online Now shortcut to go directly into Configuration Mode It is necessary to login as a user who can access Configuration Mode and temporarily disable passwords GDW Setup User Control 12 2 Passwords GDW Setup Passwords GDW Setup Passwords Setup GD Setup User Control Password Operation Setup Selected Objects are ACCESSIBLE at Lewel Select All UnSelect All M Disable Password System Digable Window Controls M Allow Configuration Mode T Show Short List Only W Hierarchical behavior Tree tee Cancel Selected Object Access Levels Password Timeout Timeout Minute a Timeout returns to f Last Logged In Level Level 0 all Locked Level 1 Operator
191. e this OPC Server Since release 2 43 00 of RSLinx OPC Server SpecView builds 812 and 813 will report error E12179 Failed to retrieve any groups from the OPC Server RSLinx OPC Server Ensure that the OPC Server is running and correctly configured Only SpecView builds 814 and later are compatible with release 2 43 00 of RSLinx OPC Server You will need to upgrade your copy of SpecView to be able to connect to release 2 43 00 of RSLinx OPC Server If you have an older version of RSLinx OPC Server than 2 43 00 and you get the E12179 error message from SpecView builds 814 and later then there is a workaround that provides compatibility with older versions of RSLinx OPC Server You will need to shutdown SpecView and add the following lines to the SV32 INI in the SpecView installed folder OPC Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 231 SpecView User Manual BrowseRSLinxOPCServerHierarchically Y Restart SpecView and try to browse the RSLinx OPC Server again Signatrol SL400 This server works with SpecView aside from one problem area The Signatrol SL400 OPC Server will report values as having a bad quality when it is in sleep mode SpecView will report such values as XXXs since they are clearly in an undetermined state The only way to force SpecView to treat the good value as the current value is to setup a strategy event and action to copy the OPC parameter upon change of value In this way SpecView will only copy the good val
192. each one NOTE Any boolean can be selected If for example you want to be alerted when a instrument has been put into manual mode you can check Auto Manual Database List GDW Dynamics to CSV Used for SpecView diagnostics only Database Save Logging Alarm Details Used for SpecView diagnostics only Database Load Logging Alarm Details Used for SpecView diagnostics only Database Set All items on this GDW as Logged Adds ALL the variables on this GDW in logging NOTE Use this feature if you want to Historically Replay ALL the variables on this GDW To remove any unwanted variables from logging use the Show Logging in Variables List menu command from the Database sub menu on the Setup menu Export Variables List Exports a list of all currently defined variables and their properties to a CSV Comma Separated Variable format file which can then be edited using Excel and saved again as a CSV file then subsequently imported using the Import Variables List menu command from the Database sub menu on the Setup menu This is useful if a large number of changes need to be made to the variables list For example some instruments have numerous data registers which must be accessed indirectly using an address offset These variables will then need to be renamed accordingly for example registers named with numbers D000 to D255 with an offset of 2560 will need to be renamed to D2560 to D2815 which can be done quickly using the
193. ecView Date SpecView Time SpecView GoodComms SpecView BadComms SpecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem Then if the Remote computer isn t seeing the expected values on the instruments then it is easy to check if there s a problem with the SpecView Local s instrument communications 2 In either Config or Runtime mode Choose the Preferences menu item from the File Menu and click the Remote tab Check the appropriate box to enable the Modem Preferences Runtime Remote Display Alarm Logging Strategy Recipe Startup History gal 4Vallable connections Device Pot Timeout EJ E Hayes Accura 56K Ext Speakerphone Modem caca e Click the Timeout to change it The timeout for Modems is the the time before redialing This is set by default to 50 seconds because many modems require some time to clear down and therefore a rapid redial will not succeed so we recommend caution before changing this 3 In Runtime mode Choose the User Setup menu item from the Remotes menu and define some User ID s with appropriate Levels Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 38 4 Display the Remote Users Attached List which is displayed by choosing View Connected Users from the Remotes menu This will provide information about the connection status On the Remote 1 At startup Click the Remote button on the Configurations Found dialog box which is displayed at startup
194. ecView click Step 1 to generate the code to give to SpecView Upgrade Stage 1 Generate Code Upgrade Stage 1 Upgrade Step 1 To enable further options please contact Spec iew to discuss the options available to you When you are ready to proceed use the button below to generate a code that you will give to your SpecView representative Note you must only generate the code once If you generate several codes whilst waiting for a response from 5pecYiew the answers from SpecView will not be valid and you will have to re request the upgrade from the beginning Generate the code now Click Generate the code now Be ready to write down the code Do not do this again until you have been given the new codes by SpecView The codes you will be given will only be valid for this code you will generate now Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Upgrading SpecView 224 Upgrade Stage 1 Upgrade Step 1 Give this code to your Spec iew representative 3934 6675 C179 C76F 084C 50139 OF Write down this code and give it to your SpecView contact Click OK and then Exit Upgrade Stage 2 Enter codes Open the Dongle Information box Help menu Registration Info Click Enable Further Options Click Step 2 Enter Codes you have been given by SpecView Enter the codes from SpecView in the box shown below clicking the Use Code button after each Upgrade Step 2 Upgrade Stage 2 Please enter each of the codes
195. ecimal number Z Z Time zone name or abbreviation no characters if time zone is unknown Percent sign Full list of Preferences 11 5 Preferences Alarm Preferences Alarm Preferences for Alarms e Enabled Enabled Whether alarms are enabled e Rate 5 The alarm rate e Popup Enabled Enabled Whether an alarm displays the Alarm dialog box NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until next entry to Runtime Mode Full list of Preferences 11 6 Preferences Logging Preferences Logging Preferences for Data Logging e Enabled Enabled Whether logging is enabled e Rate secs 60 The default logging rate which will be used when Runtime mode is started During Runtime mode the rate can be changed using the action Logging On Off The current value for the logging rate is stored in the SpecView Variable LogRate This variable is Read Only and cannot be changed other than by using the Logging On Off action NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until next entry to Runtime Mode Full list of Preferences 11 7 Preferences Strategy Preferences Strategy Preferences for the Strategy Controller e Enabled Enabled Whether or not the Strategy Controller is enabled e Rate Medium Low Medium High Ultra High The speeds for these settings are defined on the Runtime tab NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until next entry to Runtime Mode Full list of Preferences Copyright SpecVie
196. ection was made The Queue sizes column shows Rx0 00kb Tx0 25kb Receive amp Transmit data rates kb sec HQ0 MQ0 LQO High Medium Low queue sizes HSO MSO LSO High Medium Low packet sizes If the titlebar of this box shows Remote Users Attached List Server NOT running then the Local has not had the networking server started from Preferences this is detailed in Setting up SpecView Networking 5 11 9 Options Menu Options Menu Options oom Window Help Short Pararn List Setup COM Port Toggle DEBUG on COMA Ctrl Shitt 1 Toggle DEBUG on COM Ctrl Shitt 2 Short Param List This menu command toggles the parameter list on Instrument Views between Short List and Full list modes Full List mode lists ALL the parameters for the instrument whereas Short List mode displays just some of the most frequently used parameters NOTE Full List mode is not the same as the Full Names checkbox on the Parameter List dialog which toggles between Full variable names and abbreviated variable names Access to the Full Parameter List can be restricted by Password Log In Level Setup COM Port Displays the COM Port Setup dialog box and allows the COM port s settings to be changed and driver commands added during Runtime Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 81 SpecView User Manual COM Port Setup comi COM2 Driver SWModBus E aud seno Driver Commands T 5 H 1 Change Add Delete
197. ections for SpecView Networking For SpecView Networking the connection can be made in 4 possible ways 1 Via TCP IP over a LAN Local Area Network 2 Via TCP IP over a WAN Wide Area Network using an always connected phone line or Broadband connection 3 By making the Local computer available to the Internet so that the Remote computer s can access it over their Internet link However this has security implications so is not recommended 4 Byusing modems for SpecView to make a direct dial connection between the computers when needed The diagrams below show example configurations Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Installation 6 Specy lew Remote Il LAN AWAN Modern link oeral Comms Instruments spec view Local E gt It is possible for a PC to run one SpecView Local and several copies of SpecView Remote simultaneously Specview Remote Serial Comms Instruments Specview Local E gt LAN apecylew Remote Serial Comms Instruments VAN Modem Specview Local EA gt link specie Remote Serial Comms Instruments Specview Local _ gt Setting up SpecView Networking 1 8 Installing SpecView Installing SpecView If there are any doubts about the suitability of the computer for installation of SoecView or if you are using Windows XP please check the Minimum Requirements for Installing SpecView To install SpecView choose one of the following methods CD Vor double click the 3 tup
198. ee also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control 15 10 ActiveX Register ActiveX Register MM Register Controls O Registered Controls SymbolF actor CutarayCtrl 1 LC NPROGR ATS MBOLT 1 Sum ack oc SymbalFactory StdEtrl 1 LAPROGRAS AS YT MBOLTT Sym ack ace SYSINFO Spslmto 1 CAWIAN S patema ASSY SINFO OCK Spsmon 3 CWINS S ystenrse syeron OCH TabDlg 55T ab 1 CMW INS Systems TABETLS2 05 TOCE TOCEH CWINS S ystenrse std ac ThumbCtl T hurnibltl 1 CAIN S patera ebria all ThumbCtl T humbietl 2 CAIN Systems ebria dl TrialE nd TrialE rid 1 C Program Files Internet Explorer Connection Wizard straloc dll VideoRenderCtl VideoRenderCtl 1 CAIN systems gdyd dll VisModelbrowser YM Browser C Frogram Files Microsott Visual Studios Commons T oala CM VisualStudio Analyzer Button 1 LA Program Files Microsott Visual Studios Commons T oals S E WSFLEA veFlem rrayCtrl 1 CAIN Systenns YS FLES SOL WSOPFLES veFlexStringltrl 1 LAMA IAS pate 4 S FLE 3 OLS Af eH ei oldericon W ehian F alderlc ATS Seber TA eb ati cll Register Urnegeter ReTegster Close Registering a control is similar to installing it Most sets of ActiveX controls will come with their own installation program which is likely to register the control automatically However some controls maybe where one has been written as a bespoke control will need to be registered Copyright SpecView 1994 2007
199. eeccecnsseeceecnnnseceecnasseeseenasseseecnnaseseeenass 251 COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL cuisine i 251 CONTIG UN ATION ai 252 CONnTIGUMAll Ol Mode icsiesiccivecesendineonsciccceesitnceicseieadeieueciavtadedieceessapinvbecianasivesziswetwesasisiesosd 252 Data LOG GUNG entrada risa ciia n 252 Decimal Places ini 253 DOW GIG AAA 5 necte a Ea a a i 253 DVNAMICATTIDUTOS ss eos cc reece nietet aceon cahadeta dir 254 GDO Graphical Display ODJECE ansiada a 254 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 IX Contents IX 24 14 GDW Graphical Display Window oooocccconncicnncccccocononenonncccnnncnnnnnnnornnanorennannrrnanerenannrrnnannnnas 254 2419 MNSTUMEN U e cums letcvesasewewede vavcucaxvedae sateneuee deneaalessveueuiee cba vueacavecweVeestesstuadetedan 254 24 16 Instrument VIO Wins aa 254 ZANT LOG REDON ii an 255 24 19 loo o AAA Pon a Ea aapa aaa Eao 255 24 19 R dio BUMONS ui iaa 256 24 20 Read ONIY Variable sina a E E 256 24 21 RECIPE ln a seGiaietigel 256 24 22 RUNUME OCG sorna aa a E aA a E aE GE 256 2423 trate dY CONTONE iii di 257 2424 TOG GIS aan 257 24 25 VOOMID S iraa cdot sexadeanaseeacadeeeenenvneassaceuc E E aE aaa aa E 257 24 20 Vania ar a a a 258 2427 Variable YPES csaa aaa a a a SE A a 258 24 29 N AVIADIOS LIS Dinimi iii 258 24 29 WED SETVEr AAA aea eaaa 258 24 30 Windows THENAMING TUE iisu aaae aaaea Eaa a aaraa aa ana aaas 259 24 31 Willeable Variable rcntas a a eect oyveteeteesi 259 Index 260 Copyright SpecVi
200. een Set the defaults for your printer to landscape mode NOTE Use a white Paper Color Accessed from the View Menu as a background for the GDW and a white chart Background colors and detailed graphics will use a lot of ink when printed Add Edit Pen Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Trend Charts 138 Pen Attributes Varable lt Not Yet Defined gt Label lt Unused gt O Set Point 4 hdlir po O SetPoint2 O a Set Point Selected Max O SP Rate Linit 0 0 LJ a Alarm SP1 OF E l Es Alarm 1 Status O a Alarm SP2 Color Es Alarm 2 Status ae O a Alarm SP3 Es Alarm 3 Status O a Alarm SP4 Es Alarm 4 Status E Sensor Status E Loop Status E Heater Status All defined instruments previously selected using the Variables and Instrument list will be shown in the window Click the Plus sign alongside the Instrument to expand the variables list then pick from the defined variables shown by double clicking the variable Fill in Min and Max parameters for the Trend chart These can be changed during Runtime Mode if required Further details as follows Variable Trend chart To assign a variable to a chart Pen 1 Click the Plus sign alongside the Instrument to expand the Variables List 2 Double Click the required variable The Pen label will be automatically assigned however you can modify this if required to your own label NOTE that for variables with more than one decimal place it is
201. elp hlp Change paths as appropriate SpecView can only run programs with the filename extension EXE COM or BAT and the program s filename must be specified in full including the extension SpecView cannot run shortcuts which are of type LNK This command has the ability to accept the name of variables in the line Each variable should be enclosed in double percents like this showing an example of using SpecView Time SpecView Time Another example run the program C TEST EXE passing in the number contained in Zone1 PV CATEST EXE Zonel PV Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 134 You can have multiple variables as long as they are always enclosed in the double If a program is specified without the full pathname then SpecView will first assume the program is in the current configuration s folder for example C SV32 DEFAULT If it is not there then it will use the PATH setting to find the program alternatively specify the full path see examples below NOTE Put double quotes around commands or commandline parameters containing spaces Some examples of these are MyCommandFile bat MyData CSV CAMY UTILITES SGMSMASTER EXE n07777555666 The furnace is overheating CAWINDOWSICOMMANDIXCOPY32 EXE C My Documents Sample doc C Temp Program Launch Failed WExec error code 2 This error will occur during Runtime mode if the program name has been incorrectly specified WE
202. enabled then the Show Alarm in Variables List menu command will be disabled ables List by coking LB Open the Variables List by clicking on the toolbar Yarables Ea List Options Shor Mew Include Name Short List i Full Names AddItem ber Properties Varnables LUGGING state matt sa x Process Value E Setpoint LJ e Error E Output Power O Load Current The crosses show which variables are logged Click the box to check uncheck each one NOTE To include ALL the variables on a GDW in logging see the Set All items on this GDW as Logged menu command from the Database sub menu on the Setup menu Disk Space for Logging for file size details as logging more variables will increase disk space requirements Database Show Alarm in Variables List Shows in the Variables List which boolean variables will be considered alarms when they become true To add delete a variable to from alarm monitoring im Se cll DES Open the Variables List by clicking on the toolbar Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 95 SpecView User Manual Yaniables List Uptions oho New W Include Name Short List i Full Names Add ltem Properties Variables ALARAM state O a Set Point 1 2 O a Set Point O a Set Point Selected O a SP Rate Limit 0 0f LJ a Alarm SP1 Es Alarm 1 Status O a Alarm SP2 Es Alarm 2 Status O a Alarm SP3 The crosses show which variables are Alarms Click the box to check uncheck
203. ent Recipe Name but typically only a few sets are needed for most requirements If the Recipe dialog box has been hidden using the Hide this box button then Recipe Alarm Event Password Recipe Management Recipe l click OR Recipe to restore the Recipe box NOTE Those items in the Recipe will show Color Dynamics based on the Recipe value This can cause confusion in some cases if some color dynamics are a result of the Recipe and others are not The sets of values can then be associated with a button or Strategy Controller event 4 In Configuration mode Setup these sets of values to be used This could be by defining a button to do a button action for Recipe such as Recipe Download Specific Recipe or via the Strategy Controller to do a Recipe action 10 4 Recipe Warning Recipe Warning The highlighted values on the GDW are no longer updated once the Recipe dialog box is on the screen When a Recipe has been selected on the list or if a highlighted variable has been edited the values shown are no longer current while the Recipe dialog is being shown Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 145 SpecView User Manual 10 5 Recipe Names Recipe Names Warning Recipe Edit Mode Values may not be current 23 5 Current Values gt High alues TestSethngs E E S Screen values Curent 1 4 55 6 terms Hide this box send Save Save As Import Export Description Delet
204. ents and display instrument views 17 ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control 202 B ActiveX Control Not Licensed 214 ActiveX Insert Control 206 ActiveX Licensing 205 ActiveX Manage Control List 213 ActiveX on SpecView Remote 206 ActiveX Overview 202 ActiveX Preferences 207 ActiveX Register 212 ActiveX Variables Inputs 208 ActiveX Variables Methods 211 ActiveX Variables Outputs 209 Actual Values on Screen 99 Add a variable to the GDW 20 Add a vertical bar chart 2 7 Add buttons to switch between GDWs 26 Add Rename Instruments 58 Adding Instruments 50 Adding Numeric Values to a GDW 107 Adding Trend Chart Pens 136 Alarm 110 250 Alarm Acknowledge on Remote 31 Alarm Logging 172 Alarm Scan Rate 123 Alarm Window Position Reset 78 Alarms Deleting 172 Alarms Show Alarm List 124 Alarms Menu 78 Alarms On Off 123 Aligning Text 120 ALM logfile 172 Annunciating Alarms 139 AnyAlarm SpecView variable 101 Archive 47 Archive and Restore 47 Background color of screen GDW 91 BadComms SpecView variable 101 Bar Charts 139 Bar Charts Creating 121 Bar Codes 129 Barcode 61 Barcode Scanner support 239 Batch IDs Using Batch Tags 176 Batch Numbers Historical Replay 175 Batch Numbers Logfile Convert 167 Batch Numbers Using Batch Tags 176 Batch Tags 176 Batch Tags Historical Replay 175 Batch Tags Logfile Convert 167 Bitmap Properties 119 Bitmaps ona GDW 119 Bitmaps on buttons 122 Boole
205. eposition BOTH the value of the variable amp ts name as a pair press G on the keyboard to Group them together remember to Ungroup them afterwards by pressing U The Full Names checkbox toggles between showing the variables full names and the abbreviated names The Short List checkbox toggles between showing the all the instrument variables amp just those instrument variables which have been selected for inclusion in the Short List by having Short List checked in the Variable Properties box The Variables List box can be resized 8 repositioned The size and position is remembered when the box is closed The position of the Variables List can be reset using Preferences Settings Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 101 SpecView User Manual 6 2 6 SpecView Variables SpecView Variables The first Instrument shown in the Variables List Variables List is SpecView these are the variables that exist only in SpecView but have all the same properties as other variables and can be Logged Included in Recipes Put on Trend charts or Bar Charts SpecView boolean variables are used as switches to control events in the Strategy Controller There are two kinds of SpecView variables Pre Defined and User SpecView Pre Defined Variables a Date a MHewAlarm a AnyAlarm o Passwordliser o PassworgdLevel o PasswordTime e GoodComms o BadComms 8 CommsErroricode 8 CommsErrortem a FastCount o LogRate
206. er then contact your OPC Server s administrator to see if the OPC Server is running correctly o Ifall of this has been checked then please contact your instrument s supplier O Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Installation 4 If SpecView has been working successfully but has now stopped working or if just some of the instrument s variables are displaying as XXX then o Firstly be aware that some instruments are designed in such a way that depending on the instrument setup instrument mode or program considerations some values are legitimately unavailable these variables will be shown as XXX s This is normal amp correct behaviour for that instrument Two common examples of this are 1 Programmer instruments where segment variables change their availability depending on segment type 2 Instruments where optional hardware is not present for example output boards not fitted or auxilliary inputs not configured fitted Please see the instrument manual for which variables may or may not be available under these circumstances o Is this an intermittent failure o What is the value of the variables SpecView BadComms SpecView GoodComms SpecView CommsErrorCode amp SpecView CommsErrorltem These variables can be added to a GDW and or logged To Log these variables use Database gt Show Logging in Variables List from the Setup menu and check the boxes next to these variables in the Variables List then from Runtime
207. er which can be Signed or Unsigned String Display format This is used only when converting a number into a String to specify the number of decimal places or whether scientific notation is required However it is always preferable to use a variable which is itself of the correct type Note that it is sometimes possible for an input to a control to be split across more than one input parameter For example the Time could be split into 3 separate parameters of hours minutes amp seconds However in this case whenever one of the parameters changes then all 3 will be sent by SpecView to the Control but the other parts of the parameter may not yet have been updated 3 Colors Choose Select Color and select the required color The color will be shown in notation for example Color_65280 not as the name of the color for example Green 4 Fonts Choose Select Font and select the required font The font will be shown in notation for example Font_Arial 10 0 400 0 not as the name of the font for example Arial Regular 10 Note that If the name in notation form of a color or font needs to be assigned to a string then the name will need to be enclosed in double quotes otherwise SpecView will substitute the actual color or font in place of its name Enable Disable This button will enable or disable the selected item or if none are selected then it will enable disable the entire control All controls can be enabled dis
208. er OPC Server then start this server first as it does not like contending for COM ports with other software You must set the access list to the level that you want to retrieve parameter tags for e g if you wish to see Level 3 Registers and below then you must set the access level to 3 Most Item IDs are supported as Strings which appear to be writeable however the server accepts no writes Numerics are writeable If any of your PC software crashes whilst this server is running then you will have to reboot your PC to get this server working again Hexatec This server allows you to monitor PC disc space see http www hexatec com Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 OPC Client Support in SpecView 230 There are no known issues with this server Honeywell HMX RAE OPC Servers There are 2 OPC Servers that SpecView will find The Hmx RaeServer_ is an in process server which SpecView will not communicate with The Hmx RaeServer_O will only work locally with SpecView builds 762 and later prior builds may cause SpecView to crash when run on the same PC you will need SpecView builds 770 and later to browse this OPC server remotely TrendServer Pro This server will work with SpecView but has the following limitations lf the instrument being monitored by the OPC Server is very busy then it s communications may not be current and the OPC Server will report back bad values which a
209. er Variable Choose Event Control Enable On Boolean True ul O False 6 Ehonze T Disable Event Startup Event Examples a Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 185 SpecView User Manual In the Description window enter Watch Program Start Events are listed in alphabetical order so it is a good idea to use a numeric prefix so that related events may be grouped together in the list this is for convenience list order has no impact on how events are tested Then click the Choose button to select the variable that the Strategy Controller will monitor Yariable Based Event dh Specview Description jor D Wtatch Program Start Booth 1 control o Process Value Yale to gage J i Setpoint o Output Power a AutosManual Test to petom Program Status El o Prog Running The Variables List will appear Find the variable that you want to monitor to determine the start of the log report In this case the parameter is Program Status The type of instrument that you are using will determine which parameter you want If in doubt please contact the instrument manufacturer Walue to watch 2A Click the arrow to drop down the list for Test to Perform eco eon pk a adrenal elie In this case we want Equal To Test to petom AA mi gt Not Equal Booth 1 control Program Status El EEE i Current Value lt 0 gt Hew Value DR eset 1 _ Send Next Click the
210. er the telephone number of the modem on the Local and click Dial and watch the call status until it shows Connected Then characters typed will echo into the other HyperTerminal screen To disconnect use the Disconnect tool on the toolbar If any of this doesn t work then contact your computer s administrator and ask them to Check the modem drivers have been recognised by checking the Windows Control Panel Modems on the PCs at both ends of the connection Check the wiring connections Check that the number being dialled is correct Do the noises being heard reflect what s going on for example is a ringing tone heard It is very important to ensure that these steps work correctly BEFORE attempting to use SpecView Remember If HyperTerminal cannot do it then SpecView cannot either 4 Once the above steps have been completed and are all working OK then Use SpecView to make the connection first ensure HyperTerminal isn t running because SpecView amp HyperTerminal cannot run at the same time using the same COM port Run SpecView Local and setup the connection Then in the Remote PC run SpecView and click the Remote button Either click New to add a new connection or Edit to edit an existing connection Ensure the number to dial amp settings are correct as described in setup Click Save then Connect Modem Troubleshooting 3 8 SpecView Networking via Modem Modem Types SpecView Networking via Mode
211. er to do a Recipe action Each screen GDW in SpecView can have one Recipe associated with it When the Recipe mode is selected a highlight appears around all the variables selected for Recipes The Recipe defines the set of variables and there can only be one of these per GDW but there can be up to 1295 different sets of values for these variables which are saved as files to disk However each set of values may not need to set all the variables in the Recipe therefore in order to set only some of the variables at a time the value N C No Change can be used NOTE Recipe in effect is made up of two parts Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Recipes 142 e The full list of variables which can be included in a Recipe and there can only be one of these per GDW e The sets of values for these variables and there can be 1295 different sets of values Recipe names may be any length and include spaces and any special characters A description which for example may include special instructions to the operator can be associated with each set of Recipe values Button actions or the Strategy Controller can make use of Recipes The order that values are downloaded into variables can be defined using Recipe Levels SpecView will automatically retry Recipe value downloads if there is a failure Selecting Variables to be Included in Recipe Recipes Using Recipe Warning Recipe Names Recipe Description Recipe Hide this
212. es Settings 156 Preferences Startup 155 Preferences Strategy 154 Naming Instruments 58 Network 30 Networking Setting up Local amp Remote 30 New Manual Configuration 45 NewAlarm SpecView variable 101 Preferences Web Server 156 Numeric Values toa GDW 107 Printing screen to an Adobe PDF file 76 a O a Printing the Screen 125 Programming the Strategy Controller 180 Object Menu 89 Q Objects in front behind others 116 OPC Fequently Asked Questions FAQs 231 OPC PC Specification Performance 232 Quick Copying of Drawing Objects 117 Index 264 Quick Start 11 Radio Buttons 256 Ratio One value the ratio of another 129 Read amp Write Access on Remote 31 Read Only Variable 256 Reading Barcodes 61 Recipe Access from another GDW 132 Recipe Definition 256 Recipe Download Specific Recipe 132 Recipe Recipe Manager Read Only Mode 132 Recipe Recipe Manager Read Only Send To Mode 133 Recipe Recipe Manager Send To Mode 133 Recipe Show Recipe Manager 132 Recipe SpecView variables 101 Recipe Send To 148 Recipe Send To Problems 149 Recipe edit 146 Recipe Import Export 146 Recipe Menu 78 Recipe Names 145 Recipe on Remote 150 Recipe Save amp Save As 146 Recipe Send 147 Recipe Send problems 147 Recipe Send To Warning 149 Recipe Warning 144 Recipes 141 Recipes Using 143 Release Notes 82 Remote Setting Preferences 152 Remote Alarm Acknowledge 31 Remote Read
213. es List Options Show Defined Add ltem Properties of Specview Variables ar ABB Kent Taylor e ACS600 oF ADAM ar Allen Bradley Instruments of Anafaze 16 Loop OPC of Anafaze 32 Loop of Anafaze 8 Loop oP Anafaze AB oP AutoMeters Information Ce oP Barb Col Modbus OPC Browser Supported OPC Servers OPC Frequently Asked Questions FAQs Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 227 SpecView User Manual OPC PC Specification Performance 19 2 OPC Browser OPC Browser SpecView s OPC Browser will list the available OPC Servers see below If your OPC Server is not listed then it may not be running if so click the Cancel button on the OPC Browser screen start up the OPC Server and then restart the OPC Browser If you wish to use SpecView to monitor control an instrument controller via an OPC Server that has access levels in it then you should set the required access level in the instrument controller before you start up the OPC Browser If this is not done then when you try to create a SpecView instrument you may find that SoecView cannot retrieve the parameter s or tag s that you require OPC Browser 4 Eurotherm Modbuzs5erver 1 of FactorySoft Sample 1 sg FactormSoftinProc 1 s Hexatec PCO ata 1 oq KEPWare KEPServerEx v4 s ND SinulationSyr1 1 sa NDI SinulatianSyre 1 s ND SinulationS yr3 1 OPC Server Name Ada Remote PC Name Create Inst Cancel Fin
214. es identified Others such as Modbus do not tell SoecView how many decimal places the variable has The driver will have a setting in the address field to tell SoecView how many decimal places to use This is accessed from the Variables List Add Rename Instruments box 6 2 13 Color Dynamics Color Dynamics This box allows you to setup how the color of the following e Value of a variable e Button e Graphical drawing object e Grouped object will change based on the value of a variable Change outline as well as fill color Press lt F1 gt for help Color Choose Variable Unassigned gt Set Value lt Unassigned gt Seb yale Eala house varane E r Seb Valve olor hose varate E Seb Vale alar Ehomse varane m o Oblect Test 19 Ee SaS Re e T When this box iS checked the outline color of the object will change to the selected color Unchecked the outline color will stay the same Up to four color changes per variable can be specified so that with the default fill color a total of five colors are available NOTE A different variable and test can be selected for each level The last one defined will have priority over the others If the update rate of the Color Dynamics appears to be slow then ensure that the actual value of a variable is on an Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 113 SpecView User Manual open screen This will ensure that the value a
215. es to the current Level selected When NOT checked the Configuration Mode menu command is not available on the File menu to this level of user Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Passwords 160 Short List Only this applies to the current Level selected When checked the parameter button on Instrument Views will be restricted to the short list The Short Param List menu command on the Options menu will also be disabled This will also affect the contents of the Parameter list which is displayed by the button or Strategy Controller action Parameters Show Full Parameter List NOTE If a variable is listed in the short list and the user has access to the Parameter list either via the Instrument view s button or via another button then they will be able to change the value of that variable Hierarchical Behavior this applies to ALL Levels When checked each level behaves in a hierarchical way i e When an object is marked as ACCESSIBLE at level 3 it is ACCESSIBLE at levels 1 and 2 NOTE The following example should be studied in order to understand how this behavior could be confusing An object say Zone 1 Setpoint is marked as accessible at Level 1 Operator It is therefore accessible at all higher levels The user switches to Level 4 Configuration e The user clicks by mistake on Zone 1 Setpoint de selecting it Seeing the mistake the user clicks again on Zone 1 Setpoint to re select it
216. eseeeeennes 63 Using SpecView 67 RUN tIMEe Mode iisosipidcnic o ono a 67 A A 68 Dala EnUy lt NUMGIIG ori li 69 Dala Entry BOCA iii 70 Data Entry ENU Mera ON instinto aA aa a a aa 70 DatavEniry TOxt SINGS iia 71 Data Entry Date and TIME in 71 Parameter LISE cosina a acia 73 Tend Chain tii idos 74 Trend Chart GUISO Sata csa iio a scvieeabesecaen 74 RUNUME Menubar psp iia 75 RUNTIME MOUSE 75 File Menu RUNTIME ia ini e 76 AA E Sacieeacncecctet sands aeea E a EE 78 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Contents CUSTOMER ita 78 Recipe MEM cca a soa seusveuenuesuue iis etuecueuzcuaca tev vencuceeeesdevee Adevetacnerivees 78 Alarms MOM ci A A A AA AA AA ai Ai 78 Password Menu CRUE cuisine 79 Remotes MENU aunar A A A AA AA A E A AAA da id A dad 79 OPUOMS MA aaa 80 ZOOM MEN iii A e e A A SA A A EIA weavers A A a ai ai 81 WINdAOW Menu ROA TMO isis 82 Help M nu RUANO A ds 82 6 Configuring SpecView 83 6 1 Configuration Men Da ii sidecases a AR a AE 83 Configuration Men ubar amp Toolbar raeson unn anea aaa e 83 File Men CORTGUEATION cui A A id 84 ECM ia 86 Draw Menu aci A a ia 88 Opilec ISM aia 89 VIEW MGR a A a 91 Password Menu Configuration isc aia 93 SOU MOI A A a atte aa 94 Window MENU Configurator aa A A A aa 97 Help Menu Contig uration aii A ici 97 6 2 Configuring GDWs Graphical Display WindoOWS oooonnccconnnnccconnccccoccnncnnconcnnnnncrnnnnanannnnnnnas 98 CONT
217. etails on this version If you need to contact SpecView s Technical Support you may be asked to click the Technical Information button to provide further details of your specific installation Registration Info Displays the serial number and status of the SpecView Dongle This dialog box is used to upgrade the Dongle Click Enable Further Options to upgrade the dongle Release Notes Details changes made to SpecView such as new features and fixed problems Technical Support For further information contact Technical Support 6 2 Configuring GDWs Graphical Display Windows 6 2 1 Configuring SpecView Configuring SpecView Here are the basic steps in setting up SpecView The order can be changed to some degree and each step can be edited at any time Firstly you will need to select either Manual or Automatic Instrument Detection 1a Manual Configuration of instrument s This is only required in the following cases e lf the instrument s are not physically connected to the computer for auto detection e lf the instrument s are special such that they cannot be auto detected e lf the instrument s are being added to an existing configuration Define the instruments you are going to be using by clicking the Show New button to display the full list of available variables Or 1b Auto Instrument Detection Then 2 Add Rename Instruments Edit the names of each instrument if required 3 Create your GDW s Define any SpecView User V
218. ew 1994 2007 1 SpecView User Manual 1 Installation 1 1 Instrument Installation and Wiring Instrument Installation and Wiring NOTE If you cannot establish communications between SpecView and your instruments first check your instrument s manual for correct wiring instructions For further assistance please contact the instrument manufacturer Many have test programs that will check your converter and connections t computers have built in standard RS232 9 pin ports specified as orts Data carrier detect Receive data Ring indicator If the intention is to use RS232 wiring to connect the instrument then the wiring and the connection to the instrument will be specified by the instrument s manufacturer RS232 is point to point therefore it has a maximum of a single instrument connection RS422 amp RS485 If the intention is to use RS422 or RS485 wiring to connect the instrument then an external converter from RS232 to either RS422 or RS485 as appropriate must be used SpecView recommends and can supply converters made by B amp B Electronics The reason the B amp B device is recommended is because it has Automatic Send Data Control this automatically switches from transmit to receive and so works very well with SpecView RS232 485 Convertor A B Gng Instrument 1 A B Gna BIC Please note that RS422 485 connections should be terminated correctly please see the instrumen
219. ew FastCount Variable SpecView FastCount Variable The SpecView Pre Defined Variable called SpecView FastCount is a count up counter that counts accurately and continuously at rates up to 100 times per second This counter can be used as the basis for a Strategy Controller Event that needs to be checked frequently SpecView FastCount can be reset to Zero by writing Zero to it but writing other values will have no effect The counter will count up to 4294967295 and then reset At a rate of 10 counts per second this will take about 13 5 years At 100 per second it will take about 500 days The SpecView FastCount counter is set to Zero whenever SpecView enters Runtime Mode The rate at which the counter counts is determined by a value in SETTINGS INI SpecView FastCount will only have a value if this rate is set otherwise it will show XXX In the RUNTIME section add a line FastCountRate MS Where MS is a number of milliseconds Typical values might be FastCountRate 500 Twice per second FastCountRate 100 10 times per second FastCountRate 50 20 times per second Note that when using the SpecView FastCount as a Strategy Controller event such as Watch for SpecView FastCount Changed by 0 it is possible for the Strategy Controller to miss counts if the computer Is very busy and the FastCountRate is very fast Although the Event might not trigger for every change of SpecView FastCount the number in SpecView FastCount will increment at th
220. ew s current configuration s folder or in a folder specified by the PATH setting in Windows then just the filename can be used Example bat or if there are spaces in the name use double quotes Example Two bat Similarly use double quotes around commandline parameters with spaces Example bat This is an example with spaces Alternatively specify the full pathname again using double quotes if there are spaces in the name for example CAMy Documents Example bat Also you may wish to write the BAT file so that any output or errors are redirected to a file and then set the Close on exit property on it using Windows Explorer so that the MS DOS Prompt window closes immediately the BAT file has finished running How do setup the Strategy Controller to do a delay for example 5 seconds Create a Countdown Timer User Variable Set the value to 6 Use a Value Based event to watch for the Countdown Timer becoming 1 Going from 6 to 1 is better than going from 5 to O because once it has reached 0 it will remain there How can make a button on a GDW do more than one action Create a Boolean SpecView User Variable amp set it to Off Create a button that sets the Boolean to On Use a Strategy Controller value based event to watch the boolean when it is set to On do the required actions then as the last action set the boolean back to Off How can make a button toggle a Boolean so that successive clicks t
221. exe icon Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 7 SpecView User Manual NOTE It is strongly recommended to install into the default location C SV32 Spec iew 32 Setup Select Components Choose the components Setup wall install Select the components pon want to install and clear the components you do not want to install Description ool Help Files ag Drivers ABE Instrumentation p Advantech ADAM 2 Allen Bradley SLC ST Autometers or Bardac Drives Fla Barber Colman amp ERO JCal Controls hd Space Required on C obed E Space Available on C 564404 E InstallShield Back Lancel Specyiew main program files Demo Configurations There are a number of fully functional example configurations pre prepared for many of the instruments that we support These configurations can be easily installed and may be modified to meet your exact requirements When installing from a CD by default all the Demo Configurations are installed Run SpecView then at the first screen Configurations Found select the one that you require Each Configuration is stored in its own sub folder within the installation folder which is by default CASV32 The sub folder can be copied using Windows Explorer therefore it is easy to make a backup of a configuration by making a copy of it or by using SpecView s Archive Restore facility These configurations can if required be modified from Configuration Mode
222. f it is required to AND a variable that is not a boolean such as a number an intermediate event must be defined For example 06 00 on Monday AND Zone 3 Process Value gt 300 A SpecView boolean User Variable must be defined Zone 3 over 300 A Strategy Controller event action Zone 3 Process Value gt 300 gt Parameters Download Specific Value of On to SpecView Zone 3 over 300 turns on the boolean A second event 06 00 on Monday AND SpecView Zone 3 over 300 True completes the required statement In such an example do not forget to have an event to turn OFF the boolean since the Strategy Controller has no implied ELSE function When this box is checked the Strategy Controller will NOT test the event Disable Event 14 7 Strategy Controller Actions Strategy Controller Actions For more details on these functions see the descriptions for Button Attributes Choose an Action off the list Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 195 SpecView User Manual Action E Description Close T Event Log Cancel Action Parameters Copy From Ta GOW Control Close this screen ie GOW Control Swap to another GD GOW Control Toggle Full Screen mode GOW Control Print Screen Logging Convert Specific Log File Format Logging On Off Logging Purge Log Files Parameters Alter Value Interactivel Parameters Copy From To Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Math Function PCS3000 Sequence Recipe from String
223. face this currently means that all OPC Servers are supported if in doubt then check with your SpecView representative In order for OPC to function you must have the OPC option in your dongle Since OPC is treated within SpecView as another channel you can mix OPC instruments with COM port and TCP IP based instruments OPC is implemented in SpecView in both Configuration Mode and Runtime Mode In Configuration Mode you can use SpecView s OPC Browser to view all of the OPC Servers currently available This is achieved either by using the Test Comms for NEW Config button then clicking the OPC button for example Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 OPC Client Support in SpecView 226 Ports and Protocols Port Protocol E aud Pate comi MOD MUXModues famo y Hep orc come lt None gt 0 Yd to COMS lt None gt tsi Auta y Settings coma Mone a COMS eons tsi suto y Lancel come Mene a comz Hons J Jett comes etenes a coma enano fito d TCPAIP Protocol Honeywell HE300 Fort 502 Timeout SECS Begin End l Auto Configure Status Checking Checking Click Start Scan to begin Stap Hele Hel Nee Skip to Hest Hort Address NAA i Auto Build GOW View or the New Manual Configuration button then clicking the Show New button on the Variables dialog box then clicking the OPC button for example Variabl
224. field to identify the event Events are listed in alphabetical order so it is a good idea to use a numeric prefix so that Description p10 Watch Program Start related events may be grouped together in the list When the Log to Event Log box is checked qq each occurrence of the event will be time stamped in the Event Log If the event log has LogToEventLag been set to record specified events Value to Watch is where the variable is selected that SpecView will check or watch This can be any variable including SpecView variables from the Variables List Value to watch o Heater Status Booth 1 Control Program Status Program Status Choose 8 Prog Running Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 192 Test to perform This is where the type of test SpecView will apply is specified Equal lol E Changed means changed by more than the amount given Equal To This includes time booleans and values When using this with a lt gt Hot Equal boolean it is necessary to ensure that the Value to test against is lt Less han gt Greater Than set to False Ml are Saal Comms Error will become true any time SpecView does not Changed receive a response from the instrument when the variable is Comms Error requested This can be used to alert an operator that LComms OK communications has been lost or corrupted The Value to test against may be a constant value OR
225. from the first resolution to the second Variables and Instruments Toolbar Hex Toggles the Variables List On and Off Zoom Zooms the current GDW This is useful for detailed editing and precise positioning of objects Zoom 100 Returns the GDW to normal size Zoom 150 Zoom 200 Zoom 300 Zoom 400 Zoom 500 Zooms the GDW to the specified percentage of normal size Recipe Mode Toggles the Recipe Mode On and Off NOTE You can also cancel the Recipe Mode by clicking the Right mouse button 6 1 7 Password Menu Configuration Password Menu Configuration EN SpecYiew SPECYIEW GDW File Edit Draw Object View Passwords Setup PELE I sa como These commands are detailed in Passwords Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 94 6 18 Setup Menu Setup Menu View Passwords Setup Window PCSOOO Help Database Show Logging in Variables List TO nt E Show Alarm in Variables List List GD Dynamics to Caw Event Lagging Strategy Controller elt Save Lagging Alarm Details Setup COM Ports Load Logging Alarm Details Check COM Port Set All items on this GD as Logged Swap COM Ports Export Variables List Import Variables List ee ee m Database Show Logging in Variables List Shows in the Variables List which variables are logged To add delete a variable to from logging NOTE If the Show Logging in Variables List menu command is
226. ge or create new recipes 6 4 27 Recipe Show Recipe Manager Send To Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Send To Mode This Button Attribute will display the Recipe Manager in the Send To mode This is used when there is more than one identical instrument that the recipe could be sent to and allows the instrument s to be chosen This will only send instrument variables to the specified instrument it will not affect SpecView User Variables The user is able to change or create new recipes 6 4 28 SpecView Exit Program SpecView Exit Program This Button Attribute will cause SpecView to exit 6 4 29 SpecView Maximize screen Minimize Screen Restore Screen SpecView Maximize screen Minimize Screen Restore Screen SpecView Maximize screen Enlarge the GDW to use the whole screen This is not the same as Full Screen Mode SpecView Minimize Screen Removes SpecView from the view but leaves it running The icon on the Windows toolbar across the bottom of the screen can be used to restore it SpecView Restore Screen Restore the GDW to its original size These three actions have the same function as the Windows control buttons on the top right hand corner of all windows 6 4 30 SpecView Run External Program SpecView Run External Program This Button Attribute will start another program Example To start your own custom help program called myhelp hlp that is in your SpecView folder enter C windows winhlp32 exe C SV32 myh
227. git address of the instrument in decimal P Number of decimal places for user defined items see Note 1 below Y Type of protocol J for J Bus M for Modbus see Note 2 below O Optional Address offset see Note 3 below Examples 1 1J Address 1 1 decimal place J Bus parameters 2 1J 2 Address 2 1 decimal place J Bus parameters offset by 2 10 0M Address 10 0 decimal places Modbus parameters Note 1 Decimal Places 0 1 2 3 SpecView will put a decimal place in the position indicated by this setting The setting affects those variables where the number of decimals required is based on an instrument setting such as the range that has been selected Some items such as Output Power are fixed at a given number of decimal places and are not affected by this setting AutoDetect may assume 0 decimal places when detecting instruments This might result in values being 10 or 100 times too large on displays If this is the case then edit the address for the instruments from AA OT to AA 1T See below for the meaning of this Note 2 Protocol If in ANY doubt do not enter anything for this item SpecView will add it for you There is often confusion between Modbus Registers and Addresses With SpecView the user does not need to fully understand the difference but the correct setting MUST be made here When J for J Bus is used the Address that has been pre defined by SpecView is sent to the instrument When M for Modbus is used
228. han one SpecView installed either by specifically installing into another folder or by copying SpecView s installation folder to another location then it is possible that the GDW which is being clicked on is not in a configuration sub folder of the folder where the Windows registry currently believes SpecView is installed To find all the locations that SpecView is installed use the Windows search facility to search for all files named SV32 EXE NOTE When SpecView is being started by any of these three means the startup dialog boxes will be displayed but will automatically be actioned by SpecView as it goes through its startup sequence Therefore it is not necessary to click on these dialog boxes 4 5 Instrument Definition Detection Instrument Definition Detection Conventional supervisory systems require you to define each of the instrument s parameters or variables that you want to access from your computer Some instruments have hundreds of parameters In larger systems this can mean tens of thousands of tags and defining these from scratch could take weeks SpecView has a built in database containing information on a very wide range of different instruments and their associated parameters Special configuration tools are used by SpecView s engineers to define the database These are available for some drivers only to qualified users and only then in certain circumstances lt is not possible to add variables to pre defined instrument
229. he date format in Preferences Display to prevent these commas from adding unnecessary columns to the CSV file Using SpecView s Driver Debug If all the above has been thoroughly checked then the next step is to send your SpecView representative Debug files These debug file s need to be as small as possible at the same time as being as relevant as possible The extra effort taken to create these will be much appreciated by your SpecView representative and will enable them to give you an answer promptly Therefore the aim is to have a minimal configuration by using the New Manual Configuration button with just a single GDW displaying just one of the instrument variables which is causing trouble Alternatively create a new GDW in an existing configuration and put just one of the variables which is causing trouble out on to it Then using File gt Preferences disable Logging on the Logging tab disable Alarms on the Alarms tab and Strategy on the Strategy tab Ensure that none of your other GDWs have File gt Auto open on Runtime enabled NB Once the problem has been resolved these changes will need to be reversed To create the Debug file s follow the steps below If your instrument is NOT using the Modbus or Modbus TCP IP protocol then use DEBUG 1 Note Not all drivers support DEBUG 1 in which case you will see the error Driver commands not accepted if this occurs please contact your SpecView representative If you
230. he first GDW Graphical Display Window she Now click the New GDW tool Ly to get a new blank GDW Click the Trend Chart tool and draw a second chart Any variables may be used even the same ones as before Also many types of variable can be plotted on a Trend chart including boolean On Off functions 4 al i Click the Save tool and give this new GDW a name so it can be saved NOTE When SpecView enters Runtime Mode it will normally start by opening the GDW last edited To specify which GDW is opened on Runtime use the Set As First GDW menu command from the File menu while in Configuration Mode New Ctrl P Oper Ctrl 0l Close Save Ltrl S Jave As set 4s EE Auto open on Runtime Enter Runtime Mode Preferences Ltrl E Print iter Print Preview Print Setup Print to JPG 1 Specview gdw Restart Specview Exit Speci ew Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 26 To open more than one GDW use the Auto open on Runtime menu command It is highly recommended that this feature is used for all GDW s that contain Trend Charts in order to start their trace lines Add buttons to switch between GDW s 2 9 Quick Start Add buttons to switch between GDW s Quick Start Add buttons to switch between GDWs To put a button on the GDW click the Draw Buttons tool E E E l Close Draw the button by clicking and dragging the mouse until the button is the size and shape you
231. he number of mouse clicks required to insert many instances of the same type of control See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 214 15 12 ActiveX Control Not Licensed ActiveX Control Not Licensed MM Message Ml x Actes Control 5 Average30 Control ts not licensed to run with Specview 32 Please contact pour vendor for further details DE This error will be displayed if the SpecView dongle does have the ActiveX option enabled but the class of the ActiveX license on the dongle is incorrect SpecView has a number of classes of ActiveX licensing each Control has a class such as Class1 Class2 Class3 etc and the dongle s ActiveX licensing will also have a class assigned to it and only Controls of the correct class will run The dongle will require upgrading Please refer to ActiveX Licensing for full details on ActiveX Control licensing See also ActiveX Overview ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control 16 DDE 16 1 DDE Dynamic Data Exchange Overview DDE Dynamic Data Exchange The SpecView DDE Server allows the retrieval and setting of Instrument parameters across the Windows DDE Interface NOTE DDE is an option for SpecView If the option has not been purchased DDE will not function To find out if it is available see the list under Help Registration Info You can upgrade your copy of SpecView by
232. he values for Low Medium High Scan Rates are specified above Which of these is being used for a given parameter is defined in Dynamic Attributes When any two parameters from an instrument cause consecutive timeouts that whole instrument is treated as gone all parameters revert to XXX and a special primary parameter usually the Process Value is requested If this primary parameter can be acquired over comms then the whole instrument is returned to active comms use However if the Primary Parameter still times out it is backed off as before Then Comms Back Off Multiplier x Scan Rate seconds later the primary parameter only is retried and the process detailed above starts again The effect of this is that instruments that are switched off will cause very little effect on comms to other daisy chained instruments that are still communicating e Parameter List PPS 15 When the Instrument View s parameter list button is clicked in Runtime Mode this is the number of values read per second Points Per Second in order to display the parameter list e Disable Config Access Disabled Used to Disable access to Configuration Mode e Hide Status Bar Disabled Used to Hide the Status Bar to maximize screen space e Single Click Alter Enabled In Runtime Mode this is used to determine if values can be changed by just a single click or a double click This is useful if Maximized is disabled on the Startup tab see below and there ar
233. hen click Skip to Next Port otherwise if there are no further instruments click Stop A window will be displayed to inform you that all channels have been scanned Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 19 SpecView User Manual Spec iew xx Click OK to continue and enter Configuration All channels scanned Press OK to continue or Cancel to re scan Mode Cancel The Configuration Mode screen will look something like that shown below However if no Instrument View s appear then SpecView is not communicating with the instrument s Check your connections and settings and rescan If problems persist contact your instrument supplier File Edit Draw Object View pelma s ojo 1 E 3 L 4 5 L 6 T L ST The actual Instrument View displayed will depend on the instrument type other examples of Instrument Views are shown below Hurnidit Monitor 1 Zone 1 53 amp EJ KA o Pak T JC I Ee You have now created a GDW containing Instrument Views The Instrument View s you see will depend on the kinds of instruments you have connected to your computer Now move the Instrument View to a different position on the GDW by clicking and then dragging to move it down the GDW a little way i al i Click the Save tool and then the Save button to save this GDW as Specview gdw in the configuration sub folder File Edit Draw Object View Passwords Setup Window Help Djs alt h fojo
234. his setting will affect all programs run by SpecView from that configuration The reason that the default setting is Minimized is because this command was originally added in order to run programs to for example play a sound file where it would be innapropriate to display the program s window How can send email from within SpecView lt is possible to setup SpecView s Strategy Controller to send email s when a certain condition occurs such as an alarm There are 2 ways to do this 1 Using SpecView Run External Program There are programs available but we don t currently know of any specific examples which have a command line interface so that the email address amp the file containing the message to send can be specified on the command line 2 Using SVEmail SVEmail was written by us to send an email via a MAPI compatible email program However due to the recent tightening of security on the use of MAPI to send emails because of the problems caused by automated spamming this will only work on older versions of Microsoft Outlook such as Outlook 2000 We are not aware of which other email programs it will work with although there are a great many email programs available so it should be possible The best thing to do is to try it out please contact your SpecView distributor to request SVEmail free of charge How can improve the speed that SpecView starts up When SpecView starts up it loads all the Instrument Definition Files
235. hoose Event Control W Enable On Boolean Species Timer On Off Tuell False 0 Disable Event Startup Event Examples Cancel OK 14 11 Cascade Control Cascade Control The Strategy Controller can be used to trim the set point of one controller based on the output of another This is used in many applications where the desired measurement is thermally remote from the heat source Examples include Controlling from the internal part sensor of a furnace Using Deep Shallow thermocouples on an extruder barrel In this example the output of the Master controller is used to adjust the set point of the Slave controller If the master is a programmer type controller then Master Working SP should be added to the SpecView SP Trim instead of the Slave SP The example below shows the use of a SpecView User Variable to give more flexibility in tuning Define two SpecView Number with decimals User Variables called Cascade Gain and SP Trim Add a value based event Value to watch Master Output Test to Perform Changed Add an action Parameters Math Function COPY FROM Master Output MULTIPLY SpecView Cascade Gain COPY TO SpecView SP Trim Add a second math function action COPY FROM Slave Setpoint ADD Strategy Controller SP Trim COPY TO Slave Setpoint The Strategy Controller boxes for this example are shown below Event Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 199 SpecView User Manual
236. ibrary Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 91 SpecView User Manual If a variable a Trend chart a Bar chart or a Button which uses variables is saved as a GDO then the variable s information including its Dynamic Attributes amp Color Dynamics will be lost when the GDO is re loaded This menu command is only enabled if an object on the GDW is selected Load Object Toolbar feu Loads a previously saved object or grouped object Once loaded the GDO can be positioned resized amp modified as required The default folder to load the object from is SymbolLibrary in SpecView s installation folder so typically this would be CASV321SymbolLibrary Name Used for SpecView diagnostic purposes only This menu command is only enabled if an object on the GDW is selected 6 1 6 View Menu View Menu 5 File Edit Draw Object View Passwords Setup Window Grid Lines Chrl l jem A NI Grid Gize Faper Color W Show Objects SHOW screen sizes Screen sizes line color Screen sizes font w Toolbar w Status Bar Resize Screen d Variables amp Instruments oom Recipe Mode Grid Lines Shortcut Ctrl G Toggles the editing grid on and off The purpose of the Grid is to help with alignment of objects when positioning them with respect to each other as objects will appear to jump by the Grid Size HID_VIEW_GRIDSIZEsetting see below which saves having to move the mouse quite so precisely
237. ic variable on a GDW use the Dynamic Attributes menu command Name of Instrument Names can be any length and include spaces and special characters etc NOTE Do not make them too long That will make list boxes very wide Port Select the communications port COM1 to COMS9 that this instrument is to be connected to Address Type in the address for this instrument Click Address Help if you are not sure Add to GDW Click this button to add an Instrument View to the GDW Any changes to Name Address or COM Port are also saved Help for Instrument Address Help for your instrument s may be included if provided by the instrument manufacturer Address Help will detail how to define the address SpecView uses to communicate with this instrument Rename Only Saves any changes made to Name Address or COM Port without adding a new Instrument View to the GDW Delete Instrument NOTE Please read Precautions Deleting Creating Instruments under Manually Defining Instruments before deleting Instruments Clicking this button will delete the Instrument To continue with Configuration go to Configuring SpecView If you have the configuration the way you want it go to Runtime Mode Using SpecView 4 11 Troubleshooting Instrument Communication Troubleshooting Instrument Communication What to do if your instrument is just displaying XXX instead of the correct values when in Runtime mode Is this a new installation of SpecView
238. ile menu instead The Preferences dialog box accessed by Preferences on the File menu allows modification of almost all the configurable items in Settings ini This file is in the Configuration s sub folder within the installation folder which is by default CASV32 The exceptions are e MaxPorts default 9 set in the COMMS section of Settings ini Allows support for COM10 and above This is initially set to 9 but can be increased up to 40 to allow the use of com ports from COM1 to COM40 Note that changing the COM port settings BAUD rate etc will need to be done by hand by editing Settings ini using Notepad this is because the Setup COM Ports dialog box from the Setup menu only has space for up to 9 ports e AutoSaveUserVars default 3600 set in the RUNTIME section of Settings ini To alter the rate in seconds at which SpecView saves the values of User Variables The default 3600 is every hour If you have a large number of SpecView User Variables then do not save them very often as this will slow down the system especially on heavily loaded computers e RunExtProgDispMode default M set in the Settings section of Settings ini This specifies whether programs run using the action SpecView Run External Program are started with the program s window minimized normalized or maximized Where the choices are M means start Minimized which is the default F means start using Full screen N means start in a Nor
239. ill immediately bring you into Configuration Mode displaying a blank Graphical Display Window GDW grid E HIE ele DES ee Click the Variables List tool on the Toolbar to display this dialog box At this stage the only item Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 14 listed will be SpecView NOTE When using the Toolbar move the pointer over a tool and the Tool Tip will tell you what it does Click the Show New button which will list the pre defined instrument types List Options zis outs Show Ner Short List W Ful Hames meanen item Properties oF Specview oF Specview Variables ar ABE Kent Taylor ce ADAM oF Allen Bradley Instruments of Anafaze 16 Loop of Anatfaze 32 Loop of Anafaze 8 Loop oP Anataze Ab of Barb Col Modbus ar Barber Colman of Barber Colman 560 Seriel i Include ane Sher irst Full Wemes Add tem Properties Scroll down the list of available instruments to find the name of the instrument you intend to connect Click the 57 symbol beside the instrument you require to display the specific instrument types Select the appropriate one then click Add Item Yariables x List Options TT Show Defined OPC i pa Add ltem Properties a Add Rename Instrument Hame Monitor TC s 1 8 Port Com a Address 1 14 Help For Instrument Address Help Rename Url Delete Lancel a MMETCISI eee ee eee I l I T l l l
240. imum number of bytes sent between the Local and the Remote Adjust this together with Packet count according to the type of network For rapid transfer of data over a lightly loaded LAN connection set Packet size to 8000 and set Packet count to 50 For a Direct Modem to modem connection to allow a timely response to user initiated activities set Packet size to 1000 amp Packet count to 5 If you experience reductions in transfer rate such as on a heavily loaded LAN then a higher Packet count would be advisable however this will adversely affect the response time to operations like Parameter Downloads by the user The minimum Packet count is 5 and the realistic maximum value is 500 User Name amp Password The user name and password to be used to connect to the Local If these fields are left blank then the Username amp Password will be prompted for when the connection is made which is useful if many users will be using this connection These will need to have been previously set up using the User Setup menu command on the Remote menu on the Local computer Then click Save Now clicking Connect on the Connections dialog will display the Network Status dialog Local computer is running DEFAULT dated 28 06 2002 15 25 08 C Duck update Full update Update amp Go Online saree Caen send Conta back to local machine Help SpecView Remote will check to see if it already has a copy of the configurat
241. in SpecView are made up of more than one Instrument View This is done when an instrument has a large number of parameters In this case the parameters for the instrument are split into logical groups for example Programmer amp Controller which are assigned the same instrument address Each logical group has its own Instrument View Typically when an instrument is AutoDetected all the required Instrument Views for it are detected amp automatically added to both the screen amp the Variables List However for some modular instruments it isn t possible for SoecView to automatically detect all the modules in the instrument so they will need to be added manually as described above If in doubt at this stage please contact your SpecView representative When all the new Instruments have been created click the Show Defined button to switch back to show the list of instruments amp variables which have already been defined This is now configured as if the instrument was connected and you had chosen Automatic Configuration by clicking the Test Comms for NEW config button You can now add an Instrument View or individual numeric values to the GDW Precautions Deleting and Creating Instruments When an Instrument is defined in SpecView it is given a unique identity code Unique ID When any variable from that Instrument is used SpecView identifies it by the Unique ID NOT by name NOTE If an Instrument is deleted IT IS GONE FOREVER All variables
242. in that instrument has been selected for logging The cross in the white box means that that variable has been selected for logging Varables LOGGING state Bop Specview amp E Booth 1 control Ele Process Value E Setpoint Os E Output Power O e Load Current To ADD a variable to logging click on the empty box by the variable To REMOVE a variable from logging click on the x in the box by the variable Variables may also be selected for logging by using the Properties dialog box NOTE The Properties box should be used to select the same variable in multiple instruments For example if you have a large number of the same instrument and you want to add Working Setpoint to logging for each of them you should use the Apply to All feature of the Properties box To view the Properties box open the Variables List and click on the variable you want with the RIGHT mouse button OR select the variable with a SINGLE click and then click the Properties button In this picture the variable Zone5 Process Value is being logged If the Apply Log To All box is checked then the Process Value parameter of ALL the same type of instrument will be included in logging Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Data Logging Properties for Mame Information Instrument Hame one Instrument Type 2400 Seres Original Full Name Process Value Original Short Hame PY Hew Full Hame Process Value Mew Short Hame Py Re
243. in until the event has become false and then true again 14 6 Time Based Event Setup Time Based Event Setup Examples Time Based Event Descriptions joza Even Monday 3 0600 M Event Log Hour Minute Second Day OF Week Day Month Year og foo foo Monday Any Any Any Repeat Repeat every Ml E Examples Event Control W Enable On Boolean Specview AutoRecipeload Tuell False 0 Choose coa ar Description is a text field to identify the event Events are listed in alphabetical order so it is a Descriptions joza Even Moday 3 0600 good idea to use a numeric prefix so that related events may be grouped together in the list When the Log to Event Log box is checked each occurrence of the event will be time stamped in the M Event Log Event Log If the event log has been set to record specified events Disable Event The time at which the event will trigger is determined by the settings in these lists Hour Minute second Day OF Week Day Month ear 06 foo 00 Monday Any Any Any This event will last for one second every Monday at 6 o clock in the morning If Any had been left in the Second field the event would be true any time between 06 00 00 and 06 00 59 But the event will only be triggered ONCE during that minute and will not trigger again until next Monday at 6am Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 194
244. in your configuration Change the scan rates in File gt Preferences under the Runtime tab and retry 80010108 RPC _E DISCONNECTED The OPC Server has gone off line Go into Configuration Mode or exit SpecView Then OPC Server must be shutdown and restarted Then go online to SpecView 80040154 REGDB_E CLASSNOTREG Upgrade to build 693 or above If you are using a build of 693 or above then contact your SpecView representative to pass on your svdata txt 800706BA RPC S SERVER UNAVAILABLE OPC Browser is trying to connect to remote OPC Server OPC Browser cannot connect to remote OPC Server as either it is not running or you do not have security access to it or access to DCOM 800706D3 RPC_S UNKNOWN_AUTHN_SERV OPC Browser is trying to connect to remote ICE OPC Server OPC Browser cannot connect to remote OPC Server as you do not have security access to it or access to DCOM C0000005 Shutdown and restart your OPC Server C0040007 OPC_E UNKNOWNITEMID Contact your SpecView representative to pass on your svdata txt C004000C OPC_E DUPLICATENAME Contact your SpecView representative to pass on your svdata txt Further information http www opcfoundation org http www opceurope org Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 OPC Client Support in SpecView 234 Microsoft s article Q174024 DCOM95 Frequently Asked Questions 20 Technical Support 20 1 Contact Information Technical Support If you encounter
245. ing Processor Memory Time taken to Time taken to load up the Time taken to system Mb RAM for OPC Eurotherm ModbusServer create an Browser to 1 with Groups and Items instrument for appear in the OPC Browser the 2404 with 4 438 parameters Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 233 SpecView User Manual 2000 Windows 98 Pentium 100 48 5 8 seconds 1 minute 39 seconds 3 minutes 54 seconds The above test was used to give a worse case scenario it is doubtful that any user would put 4 438 parameters on open GDW s However it is good at pointing out that using a good specification of PC is worthwhile Debugging SpecView can generate debug messages for errors generated by the OPC Browser To turn debugging on or off use Preferences Debug from the File menu SpecView Error Codes You will see these if you have turned debugging on and look at the debug txt file in your configuration folder e g C SV32 DEFAULT 18219 OPC Server status cannot be obtained The OPC Server must be shutdown and restarted 18229 OPC Server status indicates not running The OPC Server must be shutdown and normally restarted The explainations for other codes are in Error Codes and Error Codes Protocol Specific OPC Error Codes You will see these if you have turned debugging on and look at the svdata txt file in your SpecView installation folder e g CASV32 0004000D OPC S UNSUPPORTEDRATE The OPC Server cannot handle the scan rate
246. ion takes the two Copy From values and puts the higher value into the Copy To variable e The Min Math Function takes the two Copy From values and puts the lower value into the Copy To variable Doing math on types not listed above or not of the same type will usually result in no action being performed Occasionally however unpredictable results may occur To avoid confusion only perform math on items of the same type or those listed above 6 4 21 Parameters Show Full Parameter List Parameters Show Full Parameter List This Button Attribute will display the parameter list of the selected instrument Whether the full list or short list will be displayed is determined by the Options menu This action is not available from the Strategy Controller Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 132 6 4 22 Password Log In or Log Out Password Log In or Log Out This Button Attribute will display the Password login dialog from the Password menu This action is not available from the Strategy Controller 6 4 23 Recipe Download Specific Recipe Recipe Download Specific Recipe This Button Attribute will download the selected Recipe It allows you to download a Recipe from any other GDW Often used as the action following a Time Based Strategy Controller event First select the GDW the Recipe is on then choose the specific Recipe Caption Green Widgets F key Cancel Action Recipe Download Specific Recipe
247. ion which is running on the Local computer There is the option of either copying the configuration which is running on the Local computer to the Remote computer using the Update amp Go Online button or vice versa using the Send Config back to local machine button Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 36 The Update automatically next time checkbox will have the effect of clicking the Update amp Go Online button automatically Full update takes the whole configuration so that it can be worked on off line at the Remote A SpecView configuration can be created modified on either computer To do this on the Local computer SpecView s Configuration Mode can be used directly However on the Remote computer SpecView s Configuration Mode is disabled therefore SoecView will need to be run in Stand alone mode To do this select the configuration and then hold the shift key down while clicking the Go Online Now button on the Configurations Found dialog box Once the Update amp Go Online button or the Send Config back to local machine button has been clicked it will then go on line Note that if the configuration is the same as it was last time then it will immediately go online without the need to click a button When a GDW is displayed on the Remote computer the values of the variables on the GDW are sent from the Local computer SpecView Local is able to process requests from multiple Remote comp
248. ipe la er long recipe name Keyboard Cancel Names may be any length and include any characters SpecView assigns the file names A maximum of 1295 sets of recipe values are allowed per GDW NOTE This is the same data entry dialog box as used for Configuration names and SpecView text User Variable names Existing Recipes The Save button saves the current values overwriting the old ones NOTE There is NO overwrite existing warning dialog box 10 9 Recipe Import Export Recipe Import Export Recipe Import and Export are used to save a recipe to a file in a format that may be edited using Microsoft Excel and then subsequently imported into SpecView This allows you to distribute recipes to other SpecView users in an easy to use manner The exported recipe is in Comma Separated Value CSV format and can be directly edited in Excel Editing restrictions are detailed below Recipe Import The Import button on the Recipe Management screen is always enabled Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 147 SpecView User Manual Warning Recipe Edit Mode Values may not be current Current Values gt Recipe Import E Filename lle EAN Browse Cancel Screen values High alues 4 items Hide this box Send The recipe which is imported does not relate to the one which is currently selected It is just used to create the default name Hence the default name will be the lt name of the recipe curren
249. is MSIModbusOPCServer RegServer MSL Datascan See http www msl datascan com If you are using version 1 11 or later of this server then it will work with all SpecView builds If you are using an older version e g 1 10 then you must use SpecView build 755 or later prior to this build this server was NOT supported OPC SimaticNet This server is supplied by Siemens and works with their PLCs By default it will NOT put items into groups which is what SpecView requires and so will NOT work with SpecView You have to copy program your inputs outputs etc into a local dbase and then import them using the supplied OPC Scout into groups Once you have done this then SpecView will see the groups and you can then create SpecView instruments from them SpecView build 810 or later will allow you to create a SpecView instrument from the top level OPC Server group in the tree list This version also fixes previous problems when talking to the OPC SimaticNet OPC Server RSLinx OPC Server This server is an integral part of RSLinx It only becomes available to clients when an activation key is installed that enhances it to one of the following RSLinx versions Single Node 1 local client no remote clients OEM local clients no remote clients SDK local clients no remote clients Professional local clients no remote clients Gateway local clients remote clients You will need to have installed SpecView build 812 or later to us
250. is e Title screen delay 5 The duration that the copyright logo splash screen is displayed during start up while instrument definitions are being loaded NOTE indicates A change will not take effect until SpecView has been restarted Full list of Preferences 11 10 Preferences History Preferences History Preferences for Historical Replay e Auto Pause on Short Trend charts Enabled Historical replay will be paused when the Trend chart line s hits right hand edge of the Trend chart on the GDW with the shortest overall duration on the horizontal axis e Auto Pause on Long Trend charts Enabled Historical replay will be paused when the Trend chart line s hits right hand edge of the Trend chart on the GDW with the longest overall duration on the horizontal axis e CPU Replay Factor 10 A number where the units are undefined which defines how much CPU is used by Historical Replay The bigger the Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Preferences 156 number the more CPU and hence the faster it goes but the slower other functions in SpecView will run while a Historical Replay is in progress Full list of Preferences 11 11 Preferences Settings Preferences Settings e Reset Variables List Window Position e Reset Password Options Window Position e Reset Alarm Popup Window Position e Reset Event Popup Window Position e Reset Parameter List Window Position Resets the respective dialog box window s position
251. is not valid this box will appear Check the exact spelling on the Variables List However the preferable method for changing a variable s name is to use the Replace menu command on the Edit menu As this will change all references to this variable name on this GDW to the new name In Recipe Level In Recipe is checked if this variable is included in this GDW s Recipe and can only be changed using the Recipe Mode The Level can be changed and determines the order that the values will be sent to the instruments Scan Rate Scan Rate Medium T Medir esa Ultra High Sets the rate SpecView gets the value from the instrument Use this setting to change the rate at which the value of a variable is read over communications The times associated with the four settings are defined under the File Menu Preferences Display Format Display Format Free Cancel Sets the number of decimal places used to display a numeric value on a GDW Free means that the display will take the value reported by communications D P Sci means display in scientific format Hex Integers only display in hexadecimal Some examples are Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 112 Process Value 17 7 Process Value 1 8E 001 Process Value 1 7 E 001 Process Value 1 7 0E 001 specView Integer1 45 opecView Integer1 2D NOTE Some instruments send data to SpecView with the correct number of decimal plac
252. ish When you click an OPC Server SpecView will contact that Server and retrieve a list of Groups and ultimately Item IDs this process can take a long time If the required OPC Server isn t listed because it is running on another PC then enter the name of the OPC Server into the OPC Server Name box being careful to type the name accurately amp enter the network name of the Remote PC into the Remote PC Name box amp click the Add button The Groups and Item IDs are pre programmed and stored in a hierarchy by the OPC Server s manufacturer SpecV iew will then display this hierarchy for example Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 OPC Client Support in SpecView 228 OPC Browser Local PAE Eurotherm ModbusS erver 1 H E COM H E COMe H E COMS H E COMA H E COMS H E COME H E COM H 9 COME a oq Factor Soft Sample 1 so sg FactorSoftinProc 1 s Hexatec PCData 1 oq KEPware KEPServerEx 44 3 NDI SimulationS wr 1 23 NDI SimulationS v2 1 oq NDI SimulationSwr3 1 OPC Server Name Ada Remote PC Name Create Inst Cancel Finish You can then click the individual Groups to open them up to see further Groups or a list of their Item IDs for example Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 229 SpecView User Manual OPC Browser Local PIE Eurotherm ModbusS erver 1 e 29 COM 5G _Diagnostics
253. ith instrument communication SpecView will search for the presence of the dongle for licensing purposes Without a dongle SpecView will run in Demo Mode this is described in more detail under Licensing Troubleshooting If SoecView has a problem reading the dongle gives an error or if it doesn t detect the dongle amp continues to run in Demo mode displaying the box Spec iews2 Mo copy protection key dongle connected Start in REMOTE Made Then on the SpecView Installation CD there is a folder containing the program SuperproMedic which may help resolve the problem Although the folder is called USB_Dongle this program will work for parallel dongles too This program is also available for download from SpecView s FTP site access www specview com then click the Download link and click FTP site Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Glossary of Key Terms used in SpecView 254 24 12 Dynamic Attributes Dynamic Attributes These attributes are associated with a variable on a GDW They are e Scan Rate The rate at which this value is read from the instrument e Recipe Whether or not the variable is included in the Recipe e Recipe Level The order in which the Recipe values are downloaded e Decimal Places The number of decimal places shown for this variable Dynamic Attributes dialog box 24 13 GDO Graphical Display Object GDO Graphical Display Object Graphics made with SpecView s drawing tools c
254. jolaalAlo a a m s Mi x El e Add a variable to the GDW Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 20 2 6 Quick Start Add a variable to the GDW Quick Start Add a variable to the GDW re les To add a variable to the GDW Graphical Display Window click the Variables List tool to display a list of the instruments that SpecView has detected Varnables E4 List Options Shor Mew M Include Name Short List W Full Names Add ltem Properties ar Specview ar MiB TE The name SpecView also appears in the list as this represents a list of variables that are associated with SpecView not one of the connected instruments If the Include Name box is checked in the Variables List dialog then the name of the variable will also be displayed on the GDW together with the value of the variable itself represented by XXX To reposition BOTH the value of the variable amp its name as a pair press G on the keyboard to Group them together remember to Ungroup them afterwards by pressing U The Full Names checkbox toggles between showing the variables full names and the abbreviated names The Short List checkbox toggles between showing the all the instrument variables amp just those instrument variables which have been selected for inclusion in the Short List by having Short List checked in the Variable Properties box Click the 5 symbol next to an instrument name to see all the parameters
255. k beware that you will be editing registry settings possibly losing personalized settings and rebooting your PC several times Read these instructions through VERY CAREFULLY Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 OPC Client Support in SpecView 232 before trying them If you are still having problems then it could be that DCOM has not been configured on the OPC Server PC to Enable remote connection to do this is rather involved and may require reboot s of your PC What you have to do is to run DCOMCNFG EXE which is normally found in your Windows SYSTEM folder This in itself may require you to go to the Network icon in the Control Panel and set User level access control under the Access Control tab and the Obtain list of users and groups from to be your Computer Name from the Identification tab before DCOMCNFG EXE will run NOTE This step will cause your PC to lose ts Shares and personalized settings for all users DCOMCNFG EXE has a tab called Default Security Go there and check that Enable remote connection is checked If it is enabled then you have a separate problem if it is not checked then check it and probably after a reboot go back to the Network icon in the Control Panel and set Share level access control under the Access Control tab on your OPC Server This whole process will have removed any Shares that you had setup on the OPC Server PC so reset them as the last step If you are still having problems then ensu
256. kground function Variables do not have to be on an open GDW to be logged Conversely a variable on an open GDW may not be being logged Three types of data may be logged Variables This is the saving of the values of all variable types Alarms SpecView time stamps and saves all items marked as alarms Events SpecView records all actions of specified types made by the user Data logging is active by default at a rate of 60 secs when SpecView is started to de activate use Preferences Logging or adjust the Logging Rate to zero Which variables are logged by default has been pre configured by SpecView as part of the initial instrument definition Typically this is only specified for control instruments Process Value Set Point and Output Power are the normal selections For indicators or data acquisition modules Process Value is selected To see which variables are being logged use the Show Logging in Variables List menu command on the Database sub menu from the Setup menu This is described in Data Logging Variables The logged data is used for two purposes 1 Historical Replay of a GDW If an item has no value when using Historical Replay it is probably not included in logging Add the variable to logging as described in Data logging Variables 2 Creating a text file Log Report which is stored on any drive folder in your system Log Reports can also be generated from the Remote computer which is detailed in Log Reports from the Remote
257. larm 294 0004 14 15 09 294 0003 14 15 48 294 0005 14 10 40 Zone 1 High Alarm SOAS TET Ts 294 0005 14150 294 0005 141731 El Pressing the spacebar on the keyboard on the keyboard once will Acknowledge the Alarms pressing it again will close the window This is a quick way to Acknowledge amp Close th This shows all the alarms since runtime was last entered If SoecView is just re started either the program or by coming from Configuration Mode all of TODAY s alarms are shown There is no way to clear or delete alarms This window cannot currently be printed To get a printable report of the alarms convert any log format for the time span required with the Include Alarm Log checked Logrpt csa opened in Excel Time Occurred Time Cleared Time Acknowledged TZ Zone 1 Low Alarm 9 30 97 14 56 NA 0 30 97 14 56 3 Zone 1 High Alarm 9 30 97 14 55 9 30 97 14 55 9 30 97 14 55 4 Zone 1 High Alarm 9 30 97 14 38 9 30 97 14 54 9 30 97 14 38 13 11 Data Logging Events Data Logging Events A very powerful feature of SpecView is to record all specified actions made by the user in Runtime Mode Any changes made to the connected instruments are logged Which events are logged is set up using the Event Logging menu command on the Setup menu Event Log Setup Include these operations in Event log i Wale Setting Strategy Controller C NO Actions Recorded ALL Actions Recorded Record only those specified Value I
258. lay the relevant historical data Force CSV filename to Batch Number This checkbox is only shown when finding batches for Logfile Conversion This overrides the filename that the specified format would normally produce replacing it with the name of the selected batch Any characters in the Batch number which don t fit with the Windows Filenaming Rules are converted into underscores There is no way to delete batch information from SpecView s data Logfiles without also deleting the data Logfiles themselves The action Logging Purge Log Files also purges batch information Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 179 SpecView User Manual Note In order to ensure that a batch contains all the relevant data it is necessary to ensure that the Batch Tag is changed to mark the start of the batch before the batch starts for real Similarly the batch run must have completed before the Batch Tag is changed to mark the end of the batch When a Batch has been selected for Log File Conversion The Start From Stop At dates amp times will be set according to the Batch and the Batch number will be shown in the Log Report Setup dialog box Start From 24 1 222005 i 4 53 08 Date DrMr Time H M 5 Stop t 24 1 222005 i 4 55 23 Date De Time H M 5 Find Batch Number Current Time Batch Number Second Batch When a Batch has been selected for Historical Replay The Start From date amp time will b
259. licking the symbol if it is not already open Wariable lt Not Yet Defined gt Variable lt Not yet Defined gt Label lt Unused gt oP Specview Label lt Unused gt ar Specview ul 1 Mir o fga hide TE Min a input o inputa a input 4 a inputs o Cw e Color a input 6 Cancel Y a Input o input amp Double click the variable you want to put on the Trend chart then set the scale for this Pen by entering values in the Min and Max boxes If you want to change the label for the Pen change the text in the Label box NOTE If the variable is NOT now listed under Pens ensure that the variable was double clicked in the list not just single clicked Change the color of the Pen by clicking the Color button Click OK to close the Pen Attributes dialog box Add some more pens to the chart giving each a different color then click OK to close the Trend Chart Attributes dialog box i al i Click the Save tool to save this GDW again To subsequently edit the chart while in Configuration Mode double click anywhere on the chart Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 25 SpecView User Manual Friday January 11 00 Click Label for Scale Chart for Cursor Setup MiMSTC 1 in dd ohIMSTC 1 In 2 mMhisTCE 4 1n 3 OF 55 03 00 08 05 OS 10 05 18 Define a second GDW 2 8 Quick Start Define a second GDW Quick Start Define a second GDW You have already saved t
260. lient to only make one Poke request at any time The Status of the write process is reflected in the SpecView DDE Status Information This DDE items can have one of the following values Idle Writing Written Write Error X When a Client makes a DDE Poke request it should monitor the PokeStatus item This will be changed as the state changes The Client will only know that the Poke request actually gave data to the instrument if the PokeStatus shows Written If Write Error X is shown then the write failed for the reason given Idle is shown before the very first Poke request is actioned and never afterwards because Written or Write Error is shown after any Poke Data is sent to SpecView using the CF_TEXT format and SpecView formats it to the correct type depending on the variable prior to sending This may or may not require more or less decimal places for numbers that is supplied Spec View will add or truncate as necessary so it is always best to send the full resolution all decimal places to be written Return to DDE help topics Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 217 SpecView User Manual 16 8 DDEPoke Examples DDEPoke Examples The following example shows just the Poke section of making a DDEPoke request the client program should include code to monitor the status of the Poke using the Status Hot Links provided by the SpecView DDE Status Information For Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access
261. ll Names Alter M Full Names Alter Barrel one 1 PY 20 1 a Process Yalue 20 1 SP 2r Setpoint CE l d Al 6 9 Deviation Yalue 6 9 Outl 100 OutputPower 100 AJh uto Auto fHanual Auto gt Phi 205 7 setpoint High Limit 205 7 oPLo 0 0 setpoint Low Limit 0 0 rP 0 0 setpoint Ramp Rate 0 0 OPhi 100 Output 1 Max Power 100 Ctl 32 Output 1 Cycle Time 32 Ct2 32 Output Cycle Time 32 rAtE 1 15 Derivative Time 1 15 Frint Help lo Help Close To change a value Single click a variable and then click Alter OR Double Click a variable Click the Print button to save the file to disk for future printing To send the file directly to the printer use the name of the printer for example LPT1 as the filename Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 74 5 9 Trend Charts Trend Charts Thu Octi6 Click Label for Scale Chart for Cursor Setup fone 1 PY Zone 1 0F one PY Zone 2 0P 14 06 1407 14 08 14 03 14 10 14 11 To see the scale of any Pen click the label for example Zone 2 PV However this will only become noticeable if the Pens have different scales This can be made more obvious if the Pens have different colors as then the color of the scale will change too Cursors the vertical lines are used to display exact times and values To edit the chart click Setup 5 10 Trend Chart Cursors Trend Chart Cursors These are the vertical li
262. luded 3 0 Windows NT Server 4 0 Version s included 2 0 Version available for download 2 1 which is in Service Pack 6a SP6a From http www microsoft com ntserver nts downloads recommended SP6 allSP6 asp Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Version s included 2 0 Version available for download 2 1 which is in Service Pack 6a SP6a From http Awww microsoft com ntserver nts downloads recommended SP6 allSP6 asp Windows 98 Version s included 2 1 Windows 95 Version s included 1 4 Version available for download 2 1 From ftp 62 49 124 34 TechNotes TAPI Win95_tapi21 exe SpecView Networking via Modem General Modem Troubleshooting 3 10 SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Remote SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Remote The following will be seen by other Remotes connected to the same Local computer Changing values of variables being displayed on the GDW Changes to Recipes using the Recipe Manager These are only stored on the Local computer Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 43 SpecView User Manual However the following will not be seen by other computers Remotes or Locals Swapping the GDW which is being viewed Changes to Trend charts such as adding pens Edits to Trend charts on the Remote will be overwritten the next time the connection is made Therefore permanent changes need to be made on the Local Viewing the Alarm or Event log windows
263. m Modem Types The Modem models which have been used are Ambient 56K bps External MD5660 Modem Bluetooth Modem Conexant SmartHSFiV 9x 56K Speakerphone PCI Modem Conextantd480 MDC V 92 HayesAccura 56K Speakerphone External HayesAccura V92 Speakerphone External Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 42 Intel V92 External Modem Actually Generic unbranded modem Practical Peripherals PM288MT II V 34 Standard Modem Actually Generic Rockwell 28 8K internal ISA card modem Sportster 33600 FAX VOICE EXT SupraExpress 56e PRO SupraMax 56K USB not recommended for connection to a Local However this is not a complete list it should be considered more as a guideline Therefore if the modem being used is not listed there is still a good chance it will work correctly SpecView Networking via Modem General Modem Troubleshooting 3 9 SpecView Networking via Modem TAPI Versions SpecView Networking via Modem TAPI Versions SpecView32 requires at least TAPI version 1 4 as this was the version bundled in Windows 95 and is designed for 32 bit applications This allows SpecView to support Windows 95 and hence versions of TAPI included with more recent versions of Windows SpecView has been tested with TAPI versions 1 4 2 1 and 3 1 Windows XP Pro Version s included 2 2 amp 3 1 Windows XP Home Version s included 2 2 amp 3 1 Windows 2000 Version s inc
264. mal window This setting will affect all programs run by SpecView from that configuration For further details on the Preferences dialog box tabs the default is also shown for each setting Preferences Runtime Preferences Remote Preferences Display Preferences Alarm Preferences Logging Preferences Strategy Preferences Recipe Preferences Startup Preferences History Preferences Settings Preferences Web Server Preferences Logfile Conversion Preferences DDE Preferences Debug 11 2 Preferences Runtime Preferences Runtime e GDW Refresh Rate 1 10s 4 The rate at which values on a GDW page are redrawn e Low Scan Rate 1 10s 100 The speed of this Scan rate at which values are obtained over the wire Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Preferences 152 e Medium Scan Rate 1 10s 20 The speed of this Scan rate at which values are obtained over the wire e High Scan Rate 1 10s 10 The speed of this Scan rate at which values are obtained over the wire e Ultra High Scan Rate 1 10s 5 The speed of this Scan rate at which values are obtained over the wire e Trend Grid Segments 0 Puts in horizontal lines to divide into this number of segments for example 4 divide into quarters e Comms Back Off Multiplier 30 If a value can t be accessed over comms then this number is multiplied by the scan rate of the parameter and used as a delay factor before retrying T
265. mething like COPY LINE TXT REPORT CSV FINAL CSV Then use the action SpecView Run External Program to run JOIN BAT How do archive logfiles There are up to 6 files which make up a day s logfiles LOG LNM EVT ALM IDX BTC These are detailed further in Data Logging Disk Space Requirements Using Windows Explorer go into the configuration sub folder and sort by name This will ensure that all logfiles are listed first These can be copied or zipped as required The first part of the logfile names are in the format YY_DDD where YY is the current year number and DDD is the current day number within the year starting from 000 So for 1st January 2003 the file names will be 03 000 Or see the example below that uses xcopy How do I delete logfiles The best method is to use the Strategy Controller or Button action Logging Purge Log Files I am confused about the difference between Log Files and Log File Reports created by Log File Conversion Log Files are automatically created and updated all the time that SpecView is in Runtime Mode There are a set of up to 6 files which make up a day s data log The contents of Log Files cannot be viewed directly they must first be converted into a Log File Report using Log File Conversion In order to generate a Log File Report first a Report Format will need to be setup this defines which values in the Log Files should be listed in the Log File Report and in what
266. mode use the Variables List tool select the instrument s name and click the Properties button then click Address Help o Has SpecView s Online Technical Notes been checked for this instrument tyoe Access www specview com then click Download and click FTP site and open the TechNotes folder O Using the Line Writer to troubleshoot comms problems This will create a file which lists the date time amp cause of any comms errors This will be a file separate to SpecView s standard Log Files or Log File Reports To do this create a Strategy Controller value based event When BadComms changes that watches SpecView BadComms and when it changes does the action SpecView Write Line to file printer of CommsErrors csv W VSpecView Date VY V SpecView Time V SpecView GoodComms SpecView BadComms S pecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem lt is also a good idea to remove the commas from the date format in Preferences Display to prevent these commas from adding unnecessary columns to the CSV file Using SpecView s Driver Debug If all the above has been thoroughly checked then the next step is to send your SpecView representative Debug files These debug file s need to be as small as possible at the same time as being as relevant as possible The extra effort taken to create these will be much appreciated by your SpecView representative and will enable them to give you an answer promptly Therefore the aim is to ha
267. mode use Convert Log File from the Logging menu to create a Log File Convert Format which contains these variables Note that the variables will not be listed in the Log Format Setup box until they have been logged according to the rate defined in Preferences Logging or from the action Logging On Off o Has the wiring between the instrument amp the PC been checked and tested Has anything been altered or added to either hardware or software o Has SpecView s Address Help for the instrument been checked To view this go into Configuration mode use the Variables List tool select the instrument s name and click the Properties button then click Address Help o Has SpecView s Online Technical Notes been checked for this instrument tyoe Access www specview com then click Download and click FTP site and open the TechNotes folder O Using the Line Writer to troubleshoot comms problems This will create a file which lists the date time amp cause of any comms errors This will be a file separate to SpecView s standard Log Files or Log File Reports To do this create a Strategy Controller value based event When BadComms changes that watches SpecView BadComms and when it changes does the action SpecView Write Line to file printer of CommsErrors csv SpecView Date Y SpecView Time SpecView GoodComms Y SpecView BadtComms S pecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem lt is also a good idea to remove the commas from t
268. n and run SETUP EXE An alternative method is to Unzip all the files into a single temporary folder on your hard disk and then run SETUP EXE If you have difficulty during installation please contact your SpecView distributor Quick Start Starting SpecView 1 9 Upgrading SpecView from a previous version Upgrading SpecView from a previous version Upgrading SpecView from an earlier version of SpecView 32 to a more recent version is just a matter of checking the Upgrade Repair check box in the InstallShield Wizard Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Installation 10 InstallShield Wizard Welcome Modify repair or remove the program Welcome to the SpecView 32 Setup Maintenance program This program lets you modify the current installation Click one of the options below Modify Add remove drivers from Installation Select new program components to add or select currently installed components to remove Does NOT upgrade versions Reinstall all program components installed by the previous setup This also Upgrades existing installations C Remove E Remove all installed components InstallShield Back Lancel However upgrading to SpecView 32 from the older 16 bit version called SpecView Plus is complicated by the fact that the default installation folder changed from CASPECVIEW in the 16 bit version to C SV32 in the 32 bit version Upgrading from the 16 bit version is still
269. n example 7 though the numbers don t seem to make sense To test that they are correct Note SpecView will multiply by the scale then it will add the offset therefore First 32 F 932 0 555555 17 7777 0 0001 which is approximately zero Next 212 F 212 0 555555 17 7777 99 9989 which is approximately 100 And one other value that is known 40 reads the same in C as F 40 0 55555 17 7777 39 9997 6 2 10 Boolean Names Boolean Names On the Variable Properties dialog box Edits the names that appear on the boolean data entry box Enter the name for the O or Off state and for the 1 or On state J Manual Boolean Parameter Settings j Auto Cancel 6 2 11 Alarms Alarms An alarm is a status flag within an instrument which is typically set when a value goes beyond a setpoint SpecView will display the Alarm dialog box and write an entry into the Alarm logfile when an alarm status is received from an instrument SpecView Boolean User Variables can also be set to be alarms by selecting the boolean variable in the Variables List clicking the Properties button to display the Variable Properties box and checking the Alarm attribute checkbox This will cause SpecView to display the Alarm dialog box and write an entry into the Alarm logfile when this boolean variable becomes true Using the menu command Show Alarm in Variables List from the Setup menu causes the Variables List to indicate which
270. n selecting the name of the GDW from the list and clicking OK Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 27 SpecView User Manual Click the Draw Buttons tool and draw a button on this GDW As before double click this button and change its attributes Change the caption to say for example Go to second screen From the Action list select GDW Control Swap to another GDW then select from the Swap To list the name that Old you gave to the second GDW click OK Click the Save tool Ela a Add a Bar chart 2 10 Quick Start Add a Bar chart Quick Start Add a Bar chart Adding a Bar chart to a GDW is very similar to adding a Trend chart al 3 Click the Draw Bar Chart tool a and the cursor changes to Click and drag on the GDW to draw a rectangle as shown below When you release the mouse button a Bar chart is drawn on the GDW and the Bar Chart Setup dialog box is displayed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 28 Bar Chart Setup Orientation Scales Vertical None Shown Font Horizontal C Left Side l l Color C Right Side Show Value in Bar Click Bar Action Cancel P slan chara i Transparent Top Value MMATC Input 1 C Grow Top Down ap SpecView WMT Color When Up input C Grow Up and Down a put 2 input 3 olor when Down Input 4 Input 4 Input E f Grow Bottom Up Bottom ale This is used to choose the variable
271. n the menubar in SpecView if this menu is not present then the HC900 protocol option is not enabled in the dongle please contact SpecView for this option EM SpecView SPECVIEW1 GD3 E Fie Edit Draw Object wiew Passwords Setup Window Aya PCSODO RAD Help DS sl a D clolololalalalol Import He oi AE Aarmm 30 1 01 Alarm 1 01 Als 1 01 Loop 01 l Loop2 PAR PAR PAR eee bee eee I Choose Import HCDesigner File the following dialog box will be shown Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 66 Import HCDesigner Modbus Map File Add Update f Add as new HCS00 C Update existing HC900 File name c WimplHCS00ReportExport csw Browse Address Prefix for Instruments Byte Format Use name in file le FP_B E FP_LB None f Use Cannot be changed later iW Create Instrument Views on screen a coca on Choose Add as new HC900 to add this file to SpecView as a totally new Instrument or Choose Update existing HC900 if this file is an update to an HC900 previously imported See section below on importing Type in or Browse for the name of the file to import Select an optional Prefix for the instruments in the Prefix Section Using a prefix can help if there is more than one HC900 either now or in the future e Use Name from file will use the name given in the HCDesigner file for this HCDesigner configurati
272. ncrement Failed Downloads Password Login Password Logout Password Auto Logout Recipe Download le Alam Acknowledge Recipe Send To i Specview Runtime Recipe Download Failure le Specview Config Mode Log File Convert SOW Swe Cancel Print Screen aaa dada da tata la la is These are the default settings NOTE there are separate settings available for the Strategy Controller This is a very powerful tool for helping to debug complex strategy events and actions To view the Event Window in runtime use the bmc menrevni omp menu command Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 174 Time Occurred Type 0930797 14 41 24 Log file Convert 09730797 14 40 42 Value Set Zone 1 _Proportional band 1 000 09730797 14 40 35 Value Set Zone 1Alarm 5P1 25 000 0930797 14 40 03 Value Set Zone 1_Setpoimt 92 000 09730797 14 39 56 Alarm Ack 09730797 14 39 54 Value Set Zone 1 _Setpomt FF 000 0930797 14 39 43 Enter Runtime Area l 5PECVMIEW GDW The event list shown will include all the events since the Runtime Mode was entered If SoecView is closed or Configuration Mode is entered the current days events will be shown This window cannot currently be printed To get a printable report of the events generate any log format for the time span required with Include Event Log checked This is an example of a event report cse file opened in Excel 4 09 30 97 09 30 97 14 39 54 value Set Zone 1 Setpoin
273. nd hence the Color Dynamic is regularly updated It is also a good idea to ensure that the items on the screen which have Color Dynamics are not Grouped together with other items 6 2 14 Insert New Object Insert New Object Dialog Box Accessed from the Insert New Object menu command on the Edit menu NOTE Use this command with caution SpecView can only offer limited support as it uses features of Windows which are outside our control This command has been known to cause problems with SpecView Make a backup of your configuration before proceeding It is particularly recommended NOT to use this for inserting bitmaps Use the tool instead SpecView does not allow you to access another program using this feature in Runtime Mode so it should be primarily used for graphics objects Insert Object El tal VideoSott SDrawbO VideoS oft SPrinter 6 0 Cancel Videos ott SYiewPort 6 0 Adobe Acrobat Document Bitmap Image Comic Chat Room DataLtl Class dwdopt Class hd Create New C Create from File Display As Icon Result Inserte a new VideoSott YS Draw 6 0 object m Into Your document This will insert a new object from another Windows program into the GDW The box below inserts an existing object Insert Object Ed C Create New File Cancel Create from File ICASV32 new Link F Display As Icon Inserte the contents of the file as an object into pour d
274. nd instrument variables to the specified instrument it will not affect SoecView User Variables Problems 10 12 Source and Target Instruments Source and Target Instruments If more than one instrument has Recipe values on the GDW they will be shown in the Source Instrument window Select one and then select one or more Target Instruments to receive the values associated with that source instrument Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 149 SpecView User Manual Then select the next Source Instrument and select target s for its values and so on In this example the values for Furnace 1 on the GDW will be sent to Furnace 1 2 4 and 5 When all required targets have been selected click the Send Now button NOTE At least one target must be selected 10 13 Recipe Send To Warning Recipe Send To Warning No Target Instruments have been selected to send the recipe to for the Source Instrument Furnace 2 10 14 Recipe Send To Problems Recipe Send To Problems If at least one Target Instrument has not been selected to send the recipe to for each Source Instrument svsupdig dil Warning Instrument Furnace 2 is not beng sent anywhere Press Yes if this le correct or No to re select Click Yes or No as required If an instrument does not accept the value sent by SpecView Sending Recipe Recipe Send To Skip Entire Instrument SpecView will not attempt to send any more values to that target instrumen
275. nd to run then select it and click the Go Online Now button and continue from Runtime Mode Using SpecView Note that it is possible to do a shortcut directly into Configuration Mode by holding the Shift key while clicking the Go Online Now button Alternatively clicking either Test Comms for NEW config or New Manual Configuration will display the Input Required dialog box Input Required Enter name for new Contig DEFAULT keyboard Lancel Enter a name for the configuration SpecView will create a sub folder with this name in the SpecView folder which is normally C SV32 the name you enter should follow the Windows file naming rules and should not be too long Remember this name This folder will be where all your log files and configuration files will be stored Log Reports will also be stored here unless another folder is specified Then continue from Instrument Definition Detection Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 47 SpecView User Manual 4 2 Archive and Restore Archive and Restore Configurations Found Batch Aun uto O nine Countdown until auto online bo DEFAULT 33 Stop countdown Networking Remote Automatic Configuration Test Comme for NEWW contig Archiwe Restore Archive Restore New Manual Configuration Refresh E xit Seconds The Archive and Restore buttons allow you to Archive or Restore entire configurations This can be used
276. nderneath To mask objects fill the object with the Paper Color 6 3 4 Objects in front behind others Objects in front behind others Objects can be arranged in layers one on top of another If an object is masked by another then it will need to be moved out of the way The easiest way to do this is to select the one that is in the way and then use Move to Back or Move Back from the Object menu which will reveal the one behind However an alternative way to select the object s underneath is to click the top object WITHOUT MOVING THE MOUSE click again The object underneath will be selected even though you might not be able to see it If you hold the mouse button and drag the object underneath will move Subsequent clicks without moving the mouse selects successive layers down This shows the second object selected Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 117 SpecView User Manual 6 3 5 Quick Copying of Drawing Objects Quick Copying of Drawing Objects NOTE Do not use this feature to copy ANY objects with variables This includes Trend and Bar Charts Instrument Views or any grouped object containing variables as the variable information will be lost To make a copy of a drawing object or Grouped object 1 Press and hold the Ctrl key 2 Click the object and STILL HOLDING THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON 3 Drag the mouse A copy of the selected object will be made To copy an object between GDW s use either
277. ne to finish a Configuration Ideally all the GDWs need to be finished and there should be a thorough understanding of how the screens will be used in practice in terms of who needs to use which parts of which screen For example if there are 3 screens MAIN GDW TRENDCHART GDW amp SUPERVISOR GDW and 2 users Administrator amp Operator then to setup the Password system use the GDW Setup menu command and go to each screen in turn and choose the Level of the user 1 for Operator amp 4 for Administrator then select the objects on EACH screen that the user needs to have access to Remember to save the changes to the screens For the Admin level it is advisable to check the Allow Configuration Mode checkbox and for Operator level have this unchecked This will just allow the Admin level user to enter Configuration Mode It may also be worth considering using Full Screen mode In this case it will be necessary to put a Button with the action Password Log In or Log Out on at least the first screen Put a Button to Toggle Full Screen Mode onto a screen which is accessible by the Admin level user To Setup users use the User Control menu command to create user IDs and Passwords for the users at the required level Finally uncheck the Disable Password System checkbox on the GDW Setup dialog and test that each user has access to the correct parts of each screen For future changes to the Configuration it is a good idea to disabl
278. ned for that Pen Go to second screen Clicking on the which may look similar to this button will switch to the other GDW which you defined Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 30 Fille Logging Histor Recipe SlarmEvent Password Remotes Options oom Window Tuesday August 0G 2002 Click Label for Scale Chart for Cursor MMSTC In 1d MMSTC In2 hinSTcC ins 11 10 11 15 Return to first screen CONGRATULATIONS You have just created your own custom multi screen supervisory system in just a few minutes Remember to make a backup of your configuration using SpecView s Archive Restore facility Now explore the Data Logging and optional Historical Replay features Then you can go back into Configuration Mode and explore the custom graphics Recipe Networking and other features of SpecView Use the help system by pressing the F1 key to find out about SpecView s advanced features 3 SpecView Networking 3 1 Setting up SpecView Networking Setting up SpecView Networking Six Quick Steps Further detail on all these steps is provided below but in brief On the Local which is the computer connected directly to the instruments e Ensure the dongle connected to the Local has the Networking Option enabled for the required number of simultaneous remote users e From Runtime Mode use the Preferences menu command from the File menu Click the Remote tab and ensure that at least one of
279. nes which appear on the chart Single click anywhere on the body of the chart to get a cursor The time at the cursor is shown and the numeric values under the labels show each value at that time Thu Oct16 Pen Values Cursor Setup fone 1 PY one OP Zone 2 PY Zone 2 0P Tey 14 08 7 14 09 14 10 14 11 14 12 Help 14 08 27 Double click the chart and a second cursor appears The time between the cursors is shown and the numeric values change to the difference in value between the cursors Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 75 SpecView User Manual Thu Octi6 Pen Values Cursor L Cursor R Setup fone 1 PY Zone 1 0FP one2 PY zone 2 0P 14 07 1408 14 09 14 10 14 11 1412 Help 14020 41 41 0 0 NOTE Click the cursor times shown along the bottom of the Trend chart to remove the cursors For further details on Trend charts which includes adding horizontal grid lines 5 11 Runtime Menubar 5 11 1 Runtime Menus Runtime Menubar EN SpecYiew SPECVYIEW GD lm File Logging History Recipe SlamiEvent Password Remotes Options Zoom Window Help Accessed from the Enter Runtime Mode menu command on the Configuration Mode s File menu File Menu Logging Menu History Menu Recipe Menu Alarm Event Menu Password Menu Remotes Menu Options Menu Zoom Menu Window Menu Help Menu Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 5 11 2 File Menu Runtime File Menu Runtime ay Spe
280. ngle back in order to get it upgraded to to add further options Will upgrading affect my existing configurations Can copy SpecView to another PC how can this be done During installation get an error about DCOM FAQ Instrument Why am getting XXX s on the screen where the instrument s values should be On my generic Modbus instrument how do access higher registers Why are the instrument values shown 10 or 100 times too big or too small Why are the wrong values being returned from the instrument How do use a BarCode Scanner with SpecView How can avoid affecting communications throughput if some instrument s need to be turned off or disconnected for a reason FAQ SpecView Runtime Can monitor SpecView remotely How do view previous Event Logs How can restore the Historical Replay Control Panel window to its original size Why am getting steps or gaps on my Trend Chart rather than a smooth curve am getting empty logfiles what could be the reason for this How can performance be improved so that the rate that instrument variables are updated is increased How can make the color of things on a GDW change according to a value How can modify one of SpecView s Demo Configurations so it will work with my instruments Running a program using SpecView Run External Program the program s window is minimized How can improve the speed that SpecView starts up
281. nly uses a single disk then ensure it is in the floppy drive and just click OK Restore for Furnace AN Insert last disk E Cancel Once restored a Configurations can if required be modified from Configuration Mode However modifications will only affect the restored Configuration folder not the archived SVA file therefore the SVA file can be considered as a backup WARNING If an Archive of a Configuration is to be copied onto another computer in order for changes to be made to it 4 then to be subsequently Restored back onto the original computer then CAUTION must be observed to avoid losing logged data this is detailed in Restore Overwrite Configuration Warning Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 49 SpecView User Manual 4 3 Restore Overwrite Configuration Warning Restore Overwrite Configuration Warning MM Message Ma E ET 22B2 WANING The configuration Furnace exists Proceeding will overwrite the configuration However logfiles in the existing configuration will be preserved Do you want to overwrite the configuration Furnace Cancel If an Archive of a Configuration is to be copied onto another computer in order for changes to be made to it amp then to be subsequently Restored back onto the original computer then CAUTION must be observed to avoid losing logged data There are a number of checks that are performed by SpecView before the restore is allowed such as If
282. nnected Users menu command from the Remotes menu The address or network name and port number will be displayed in the title bar Ensure this is what is being used by the Remote then click the Check button on the Remote to confirm it can reach the Local computer 2 ls SpecView Local running and is it in Runtime Mode On the Local has Networking been enabled Ensure that on the Local at least one of the checkboxes for Network and Modem have been checked on the Preferences Remote tab This is accessed by using the Preferences menu command on the File menu 3 Are there remote users setup i e login names passwords and are there enough remote users setup 4 Is the version of SpecView running on the Local the same as the version running on the Remote If this is the problem then the Event Window on the Local will show that there has been a connection failure with error code 20022 If you see the message TCP IP is not installed on this PC and you are using Windows95 Then the version of Windows Sockets WinSock will need to be upgraded to version 2 2 in order for SpecView to communicate using TCP IP To do this download the Sockets2 upgrade from http www microsoft com windows95 downloads contents wuadmintools s_wunetworkingtools w95sockets2 If the Remote appears to be running slowly Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 44 Then it is useful to look at the information on the Remote s Status bar
283. ns There are a number of different ways of doing this Make some text on the screen GDW appear disappear using Color Dynamics making the text the same colour as the background color will make it seem to disappear Swap the screen GDW to a screen with the text on it Remember to put a button on the new screen to swap the screen back Use Run External Program to run a program such as Notepad to display a file containing the text For example c Windows notepad exe C SV32 Furnace FurnaceWarning txt Change paths as appropriate Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 249 SpecView User Manual However to ensure the Notepad window is seen you will need to set RunExtProgDispMode default M which is minimized to N normalized in the Settings section of Settings ini See Preferences Use Run External Program to display a HLP file for example C windows winhlp32 exe C SV32 Furnace FurnaceHelp hlip Change paths as appropriate Set RunExtProgDispMode to N as described above How can I run a Help HLP file from a button on the screen Use Run External Program to display a HLP file for example C windows winhlp32 exe C SV32 Furnace FurnaceHelp hip Change paths as appropriate Set RunExtProgDispMode to N as described above How can I use COM ports 10 and above Firstly to use more than one COM port to connect to instruments the Multport option will be required The default number of COM ports is
284. nt Number ES Wanable Target SetPoint Y In Scan Rate Medium segment Time ES O3rd Level Cancel Select the required level SpecView will send the Recipe in the specified order DAth Level O5th Level There is a pause between levels to allow the controller the instrument enough time to register the values and be ready for the next data This pause is adjustable inPreferences Recipe O6th Level Dlg ml AEDE Lp La ren Oth Level 08th Level Then click the Save tool and the Runtime tool to save and run 10 16 Recipe on Remote Recipe on Remote Recipes are stored on the Local they are downloaded by the Remote whenever the Recipe Manager is invoked A change to a Recipe on the Remote will cause the change to be sent back to the Local lt is possible that a Recipe may be edited by both the Local amp Remote or indeed by more than one Remote at the same time If this occurs then SpecView will display a warning when the Recipe is edited Saving the recipe under these circumstances should only be done with caution as changes may be overwritten Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 151 SpecView User Manual 11 Preferences 11 1 Preferences Dialog Box Preferences Dialog Box In earlier versions of SpecView modifications to SpecView s program settings had to be done by hand by editing the Settings ini file It is now strongly recommended to use Preferences from the F
285. o Is the instrument s baud rate and parity correctly specified in SoecView From Runtime mode use the Setup COM Ports menu command on the Options menu click the tab for the appropriate COM port Check the baud rate amp note down the name amp version number of the driver When the Settings are show Default that means that the data bits parity amp stop bits have been set according to the factory defaults as specified in the instrument manufacturer s manual o Is the instrument using the correct protocol for example ASCII protocol versus modbus protocol Is the instrument terminated correctly o Do you need a converter which is needed for RS422 or RS485 serial comms The reason the B amp B converter is recommended for SpecView is because it has Automatic Send Data Control which automatically switches from transmit to receive o Does the converter work Has it been wired up correctly according to the wiring diagram supplied with it Does it require power and is it switched on Have any dip switches been set according to the instructions Do other connected instruments work Is it possible to swap it around to test it o Has SpecView s Online Technical Notes been checked for this instrument tyoe Access www specview com then click Download and click FTP site and open the TechNotes folder o Some instruments have to be setup to allow their variables to be read For example setting the access level o Ifthe XXX is coming from an OPC Serv
286. o re tries etc that the variable is not online 16 2 DDE Application Name DDE Application Name This setting defines the name that the SpecView DDE Server registers when SpecView starts It is defined in Preferences DDE Although you can choose anything for the application name it is recommended that this setting be left as SpecView Return to DDE help topics 16 3 DDE Topic Name DDE Topic Name This setting defines the topic for which SpecView s DDE Server will listen for requests for real time data on It is defined in Preferences DDE By default it is set to var meaning variables The fixed Status topic is not affected by this setting Return to DDE help topics 16 4 DDE Status Topic DDE Status Topic There are 3 items that SpecView registers for DDE under the Status topic LastError The last reason for failure of a DDE request Errorltem The item that caused the above failure PokeStatus The running Status of the current or last poke command NOTE The upper lower case of the requests is significant unlike the variables Examples 1 Suppose a request is made for Specview var AName ThatDoes NotExist This will cause LastError to be set to Unknown Variable and Errorltem to be set to ANameThatDoes NotExist 2 A DDEPoke request to set a setpoint above the Setpoint High Limit for that particular instrument might result in the final PokeStatus being Write Error 18023 Return to DDE help topics
287. o the Local computer The next step is to ensure that the required SpecView configuration has been created Further detail on SpecView configurations can be found in the SpecView Users Guide When developing a SpecView Configuration which is intended to be accessed by SpecView Remote it is very useful to put all of these SpecView pre defined Variables on to an accessible screen GDW SpecView Date SpecView Time SpecView GoodComms SpecView BadComms SpecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem Then if the Remote computer isn t seeing the expected values on the instruments then it is easy to check if there s a problem with the SpecView Local s instrument communications Then once the development of the Configuration is complete from Runtime Mode use the Preferences menu command from the File menu Click the Remote tab Preferences Runtime Remote Display Alarm Logging Strategy Recipe Startup History 541 4Vallable connections Device Pot Piet DO J Standard 56000 bps Modem EL 192 168 1 14 3413 25 Check the appropriate box for whether the Remote is to use the LAN or Modem for the connection If more than one of the devices is checked then SpecView will listen on both for remote connections Note that these will take effect immediately you do not need to restart SpecView for changes on the Remote tab to take effect The Timeout value is used in the event of a network failure This is the num
288. o to Drawing Basics for general instructions NOTE This tool uses different rules from the other drawing tools 1 At the start point of the polygon click and release the mouse button 2 Move the mouse to the next apex and click and release again 3 Repeat for the all the apexes 4 To finish the polygon EITHER double click the left button OR click the right button or press the Esc key Polygons may be re sized by clicking on an apex and dragging the mouse Use the Ctrl Copy feature to make exact copies of the object Double Click the object to edit the Shape Properties Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 119 SpecView User Manual 6 3 12 Bitmaps on a GDW Bitmaps on a GDW Co A x Draw menu Bitmap OR al Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions Open ef El 2400 Ec ero bmp 53400 rap 5808 brn DEFALILT HA Fah1000 bmp f Sq2404 bmp 2 sq 08T bn Euro2400Demo Sf Fgh2000 bmp S 5q2408 bmp 24 5 818 bry Euro2600Demo SF Rked100 bmp 4 Sq2416 bmp al 5 842 bm New AA RAkcl400 bmp Mf Sq570 bmp 45847 bry 10311 bmp a 5 2200 bmp a 5590 bmp a 5 9900 bn Files of type Bitmap Files bmp Cancel Locate the bitmap file and click OK Look irr a svz2 E Ze The bitmap will appear on the GDW Double Click the bitmap to edit its Properties 6 3 13 Bitmap Properties Bitmap Properties NOTE Some video cards are known to have problems sizing bitmaps so SpecView Bitmaps are
289. ocument so that you may activate it using the program which created it Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 114 6 2 15 Edit Links Edit Links Dialog Box Accessed from the Links menu command on the Edit menu NOTE Use this command with caution SpecView can only offer limited support as it use features of Windows which are outside our control This command has been known to cause problems with SpecView Make a backup of your configuration before proceeding Links ae a eee Update How Open Source Change Source Break Link Source Type Update 7 Automatic Manual Help 6 3 Drawing Basics 6 3 1 Drawing Menu and Toolbar Drawing Basics The Draw menu and Tools are accessed from the Configuration Mode menubar They are used to draw graphics on a GDW You can also add Bitmaps bmp files to a GDW Menu Draw Object View P e Select Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Bitmap Text Button Trend Chart Bar Chart Fe S Sl A cm Select Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 115 SpecView User Manual Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Ellipse Polygon Bitmap Text Button Trend Chart Bar Chart SpecView uses most standard Windows rules for drawing Selecting Grouping and Saving Objects Shape Properties Selecting objects in front or behind others Quick Copying of Drawing Objects NOTE Do not use Cut Copy and Past
290. og File Format may be done from the Remote However it is not possible to create or edit a Log Report Format from the Remote so those buttons have been disabled When the Generate button is clicked the Log File Conversion Destination dialog box is displayed lt allows the user to decide whether the resultant Log File Report should be stored on the Local or the Remote computer lf saving to the Remote then the folder may be specified lt is also possible to save the Log File Report to a network drive Log File Conversion Destination Save to Local LAS S2 Monitor Save to Remote CAS aA Monitor Factory C Save to Remote ir C LogReports Browse Help Cancel In this example the name of the Remote connection is Factory and the SpecView configuration on the Local computer is called Monitor When the configuration is copied by SpecView to the Remote it is named lt ConfigurationName gt lt ConnectionName gt hence the name Monitor_Factory The filename is determined from the selected Log Report Format If the Output filename in the selected Log Report Format has the 6 Characters box checked where SpecView adds a number to the name automatically then SpecView will create the next file in the sequence depending on which files already exist in that particular folder and that may be different on the Local and Remote If a Button is used to perform the action Logging Convert Specific Log File Form
291. ol See also ActiveX Overview 15 5 ActiveX Insert Control ActiveX Insert Control MA Insert Activex Control SY Average Control iy DisplayT ext Control SVE lipse Control teas See More Actives Controls Please refer to ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control for full details on inserting an ActiveX Control The error below can be caused when a class of ActiveX control has not been Registered Specv iew IN Failed to create control Class not registered Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 207 SpecView User Manual 15 6 ActiveX Preferences ActiveX Preferences Preferences Alarm Logging Strategy Recipe Startup History Settings chives web Gemei Enabled Design Mode Rate Ultra High a Apply fied value E n contig mode Delay Output scan until v Strategy Running Will not take effect until nest entry to Runtime Enabled This is ON by default Allows all ActiveX controls to be enabled disabled throughout SpecView Design Mode This is OFF by default Some controls have a run mode and a design mode amp behave differently this allows Design mode to be used It is important to read documentation supplied with a ActiceX Control This is a SpecView wide setting to set this on a per control basis select the control amp use Object gt ActiveX Control gt Design mode Rate Default is every 2 seconds This is the heartbeat same as S
292. oller to generate an automatic log report for a duration of a process Event Type Value Variable Based Event Setup Time Based Event Setup Strategy Controller Actions Examples of Value Based Events Turn on a digital output on a New Alarm Count Up Timer Cascade Control Totalizer Examples of Time Based Events In the FAQ there is also an example of using the Strategy Controller to generate a daily log report at midnight covering the previous 24 hours 14 2 Programming the Strategy Controller Programming the Strategy Controller The Strategy Controller is an event driven engine and therefore requires a completely different approach to programming from the more traditional procedural programming such as Basic The events are edge driven so that they only fire when a change occurs Therefore in event that says for example If Bool1 On will only fire once and will only fire again if the Boolean goes to Off and then back to On The order which events fire cannot be pre determined The only way to ensure a particular sequence is to use the Enable if mechanism For example Event When Temp gt 100 Event When Pressure gt 20 If it is important that the Temp is checked first and its actions performed amp then the Pressure use AND via the Enable if This example uses a SpecView User Variable Bool1 Event When Temp gt 100 enable if Bool1 is Off Action Action Set Bool1 to On Event When Pressure gt 200 en
293. omputer time The Other button lets you choose the start date amp time from the log files in the configuration Historical Replay Start Time Log Files Available 24 12 2005 14 20 46 241 222005 14 23 20 2321222005 10 51 18 231222005 13 3730 19 12 2003 09 08 10 134 22005 09 09 07 141222005 11 11 38 17714 2003 13 43 31 121222005 18 15 26 15 14 2003 08 31 37 1441222003 11 3342 1141 222005 17 24 51 0941200 nn nnan 09412 en 40 58 04 Start From mE Date DM Time H M 5 Find Batch Number Enter a start date amp time in the boxes NOTE Click on any of the Log Files Available and the start time of that file will be inserted automatically 13 15 Historical Replay Find Batch Number Historical Replay Find Batch Number Historical Replay Start Time Log Files Available 24 12 2005 14 20 46 241 222005 14 23 20 2321222005 10 51 18 231222005 13 37 38 19 12 2003 09 08 10 134 22005 09 09 07 1411222005 11 11 38 1771242003 13 43 31 121222005 18 15 26 191222005 08 31 37 1141222003 11 35 42 1141 222005 17 24 51 nadaa nnn nn 09412 en 40 58 04 Date DM Time H M 5 Find Batch Number The Start time can also be set by clicking the Find Batch Number button to find a set of data based on its Batch Tag Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 176 13 16 Historical Replay Rate Historical Replay Rate Rate 24Ux 1x to 240x sets the r
294. on To use the Strategy Controller you must first plan the steps needed and define any SpecView variables that will be required In this example we want to watch a programmer controller to see when it starts a program and note the time it starts When the program is complete we want to note that time and create a log report that covers the duration of the run These steps are required Create two SpecView Date Time User Variables one for the start time and one for the stop time In Runtime Mode define the log report format that you want to use Define the first Strategy Controller event that watches for the start of the program Define an action to time stamp the program start Define the second Strategy Controller event that watches for the end of the program Define an action to time stamp the program end Define another action to generate the log report NOOR ON Step 1 Create two SpecView Date Time User Variables one for the start time and one for the stop time Open the Variables List by clicking the tool Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 182 Variables ES List Options Show Defined UPL Add ltem Properties Variables Click the Show New button and the click the blue plus sign by SpecView Variables Yariables List Uptions Show Hew T Include Mame Specview Variables Short List M Full Names gt Boolean Ont Add Item Properties a Numbe
295. on Outputs checkbox This is OFF by default When checked this means that the very first value out of each Output for this control is ignored This maybe desirable when the first value is a start up condition or to be considered as an out of range value Receive every value checkbox This is ON by default When ON this means that the control receives all changes in values that are set for Inputs to this control When set to OFF this means that the control is just sent the latest value when its Inputs are set This can be used when it is NOT necessary to see all values on a heavily laden system particularly when the control is being used on a SpecView Remote or if accurancy is not the control s purpose or if the latest value is the only relevant value that is needed to be processed Invoke button This can be used to run a Method to test it Enable Disable button Will enable or disable a control All controls can be enabled disabled using the File gt Preferences ActiveX tab For example If the control is a graphic amp it has an Input such as BlinkSpeed then in order to set this it is necessary to read the author s documentation to find out the following information The type of the value for example an Integer or a Number with decimals The units of the value Seconds tenths of seconds etc The range of values Then also whether a related Input parameter needs to be set for example to turn on the blinking To set the
296. on as the prefix for all the SpecView instruments For example this could give the names FURNACE1 PID or FURNACE1 Variables None will add no prefix to the instruments resulting in names like PID or Variables Use will use the prefix supplied For example if the prefix was F1 then all the instruments will have that prefix a hyphen will be added automatically F1 PID or F1 Variables Choose the Byte Format for the instrument using the options given this cannot be changed later The available Byte Formats are FP_B Big Endian 4 3 2 1 FP_LB Little Endian Byte Swap 2 1 4 3 SpecView does not currently support the byte formats FP_BB Big Endian Byte Swap 3 4 1 2 FP_L Little Endian 1 2 3 4 For more information on byte ordering please refer to the Help in HCDesigner If the Create Instrument Views on screen box is checked then the SpecView standard Instrument Views will be created after Import for all new blocks Press the Begin button to start the import process This could take a few minutes Notes on Updating an HC900 using this import facility e ltis stongly advised that a backup Archive of the configuration is made before attempting to update although this process has been tested changes in the future to HCDesigner might mean that the update routine spoils the existing instrument definitions within SpecView This import facility cannot be used to update an HC900 inside SpecView that was not ini
297. one 3 over 300 turns on the boolean A second event Zone 1 Process value lt 200 AND SpecView Zone 3 over 300 True completes the required statement In such an example do not forget to have an event to turn OFF the boolean since the Strategy Controller has no implied ELSE function When this box is checked the Strategy Controller will NOT test the event Disable Event The Startup Event is a special event that is always true when SpecView is started or Runtime Mode is entered from Configuration Mode It is not necessary to define any variable to watch or specify any test Startup Event Using Event Control Enable On Boolean to specify the order of Events If the order that events are tested is important then it is possible to force SpecView to do one set of actions before another by the use of the Event Control Enable On Boolean To do this create a SpecView Boolean User Variable then add an action to the events to set the Boolean and use the Enable on Boolean to determine which will be invoked as follows For example the 2 events can have their sequence controlled as follows Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 193 SpecView User Manual Events If ProcessValue changed amp Bool is Off Set Bool On Do your required action If ProcessValue changed amp Bool is On Set Bool Off Do your required action NOTE When an event has been tested as true the event will not invoke ts associated actions aga
298. ont Behind others Move To Back Shortcut Ctrl numeric keypad Minus Moves the selected object behind ALL other objects This menu command is only enabled if an object on the GDW is selected Objects In Front Behind others Move Forward Shortcut numeric keypad Plus Moves the selected object up one layer This menu command is only enabled if an object on the GDW is selected Objects In Front Behind others Move Back Shortcut numeric keypad Minus Moves the selected object back one layer This menu command is only enabled if an object on the GDW is selected Objects In Front Behind others Save Object NOTE Do not include variables or Trend charts or Bar charts or Buttons which use variables in saved objects Objects and grouped objects can be saved for re use Only a single entity can be saved as a GDO such as a single rectangle or a single group However a group can contain 100 s or even 1000 s of other objects These grouped objects can be a combination of SpecView drawing objects such as rectangles lines ellipses polygons text and bitmaps and buttons The objects are saved in a file with the extension gdo Graphical Display Object A GDO can be re used any number of times on any GDW in any SpecView configuration A GDO file can only be viewed edited using SpecView The default folder to save the object to is SymbolLibrary in SpecView s installation folder so typically this would be CASV321SymbolL
299. ont Band2Color lqnore BandsColor Help Enable Disable Invoke Enabled Cancel To assign an ActiveX Control s Inputs to SpecView variables it is necessary to have first throughly read amp understood the Control s documentation supplied by the author of the control It is possible to assign one of four kinds of input 1 Constant values To set a parameter to a constant value such as BlinkMode 1 to turn on blinking replace the word Ignore with 1 Note that to assign a constant that is the same as a SpecView variable or parameter it is necessary to enclose it in double quotes Otherwise SpecView will substitute the value of the variable rather than just sending its name in For example SpecView Number1 sends the value of Number1 to the control whereas SpecView Number1 sends the string SpecView Number1 to the control 2 SpecView variables or Instrument parameters Click the required parameter on the Input tab then click the Variables List button Ignore Parameter 1 of Filllolor lanore GIT Parameter 1 of BlinkSpeed Ignore Parameter 1 of Blinkcolor amp select the instrument or SpecView User variable to link it to When choosing a variable from the Variables List there are checkboxes to allow the type of variables to be changed Do not convert Color Font Date Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 209 SpecView User Manual Time Number with decimals Integ
300. or this item SpecView will add it for you Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 17 SpecView User Manual There is often confusion between Modbus Registers and Addresses With SpecView the user does not need to fully understand the difference but the correct setting MUST be made here When J for J Bus is used the Address that has been pre defined by SpecView is sent to the instrument When M for Modbus is used ONE is subtracted from the pre defined address SpecView pre defined instruments ALWAYS assume the address and NEVER the register Unless advised otherwise by SpecView either leave the letter out or use J Note 3 Address Offset Some instrument companies use an address structure so that a particular instrument view can be re used with the appropriate address offset This feature is also used with SpecView s Generic Modbus instrument views The addresses for each instance of the instrument are the same offset by a fixed number See Generic Modbus for more details Also where this feature is required for a specific instrument refer to the help for that instrument The rate at which the Modbus driver will supply the values of variables from the instruments is defined by the driver command WTTL default 19 tenths of a second This can be set using the Setup COM Ports menu command on the Setup menu For Instruments using Modbus TCP IP The address as detailed above is prefixed with the full IP address foll
301. order The Log File Conversion can then be done directly by a user action either from the Logging menu during Runtime or from the Button Strategy Controller actions Logging Convert Specific Log File Format or Logging Show Log File Convert Manager The Log File Report can then be viewed using any program which can read CSV Comma Separated Variables files such as Excel How can I setup a Log File Conversion to occur on a regular basis for example every day at Midnight For a detailed example of setting up the Strategy Controller to do an automatic Log Report at the end of a process run please read Example Automatic Log Report Below is an abbreviated example specifically for doing a Log Report at midnight For any automatic report generation you will need two SpecView DateTime User Variables one for the start time of the report called ReportStart and one for the stop time called ReportStop Put both of these DateTime User Variables on a GDW NOTE The Date Time variables used for the start and stop times of the report MUST be on an open GDW in runtime for the report generation to work They can be small or even behind an object like a trend chart but they must be on an open GDW In this example a SpecView Text User Variable is going to be used called BatchRef for the Report s file name Create this variable and put it onto the GDW Also set the BatchTag property on this variable so that it can also be used for Hist
302. orical Replay purposes Ensure the Instrument and User Variables which are needed to be in the Log File Report are marked for logging To do this check the Loggeo attribute for the variables shown in the Variable Properties dialog box or by selecting Show Logging In Variables List on the Setup menu In Runtime Mode click the current value of BatchRef and enter a name such as a batch number Setup the Report Format Save all GDW s and go into Runtime Mode Select the Convert Log File menu command from the Logging menu Click the Create button on the Log Report Setup Box Edit the fields as follow o Give the format a name such as MidnightReport o Add the variables required in the report for example by clicking Add All gt Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 246 o Check the From SpecView String checkbox and choose BatchRef from the options o Check the Start Time from Var checkbox and choose ReportStart from the options o Check the Stop Time from Var checkbox and choose ReportStop from the options Then click Add to Format List Click Cancel to exit the Log Report Setup box Select the Configuration Mode menu command from the File menu The actual Log File Conversion can be done automatically using the Strategy Controller Select the Strategy Controller menu command from the Setup menu e Adda Time Based Event called At midnight generate Log Report and set H
303. ormat Logging On Off Logging Purge Log Files Logging Show Log File Convert Manager Parameters Alter Value Interactively Parameters Copy From To Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Math Function Parameters Show Full Parameter List Password Log In or Log Out Recipe Download Specific Recipe Recipe Show Recipe Manager Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Send To Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Send To Mode SpecView Exit Program SpecView Maximize screen Minimize screen Restore screen SpecView Run External Program SpecView Write Line to file printer 6 4 2 Alarm On Off Alarm On Off This Button Attribute turns alarm checking On and Off and sets the rate at which alarms are checked LE Ion __ ___ _ _ Rate in secs 0 OFF E A rate of 5 seconds the default means that SpecView will check the booleans identified as alarms every 5 seconds A Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 124 value of 0 seconds will disable alarm checking Adding variables to Alarm Monitoring 6 4 3 Alarms Show Alarm List Alarms Show Alarm List This Button Attribute will open the Alarm list duplicates the function of the View Alarm Window menu command on the Alarm Event menu 6 4 4 Events Show Event List Events Show Event List This Button Attribute will open the Event list duplicates the function of the
304. ortDP 1 Produces 1 DP e g 0 1 ReportDP 2 Produces 2 DP e g 0 12 ReportDP 3 Produces 3 DP e g 0 123 ReportDP 4 Produces 4 DP e g 0 1234 ReportDP 1 Produces 1 DP Scientific Notation e g 1 1E 000 ReportDP 2 Produces 2 DP Scientific Notation e g 1 12E 000 ReportDP 3 Produces 3 DP Scientific Notation e g 1 123E 000 ReportDP 4 Produces 4 DP Scientific Notation e g 1 1234E 000 Save the file overwriting the original Next time you startup SpecView32 the report settings will be overridden Note that this value is read from SV32 INI pb the startup of SpecView32 NOT during a File gt Restart so you must exit SpecView for this change to take To remove the override remove the line from SV32 INI This facility is only in SVLOG32 DLL version 769 16 808 9 and above To determine the version Run SpecView and go online Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 172 Choose Help gt About SpecView Press the Technical Information button Find SLRESENU DLL in the list its version number indicates the version of SVLOG32 DLL Log Reports Decimal Places 13 10 Data Logging Alarms Data Logging Alarms CAUTION SpecView s alarm monitoring MUST IN NO WAY be used as a safety feature Use fully redundant approved safety devices only Which boolean variables are monitored as alarms is set up using the Setup menu In a similar way to selecting removing variables from logging View Password
305. our 00 Minute 00 Second 00 the others leave set to Any e Add the Action Time stamp ReportStop to do Parameters Download Specific Value using the variable ReportStop setting it to Current Time by checking the box e Add the Action Generate Log Report to do Logging Convert Specific Log File Format using the format just created e Add the Action Time stamp ReportStart to do Parameters Download Specific Value using the variable ReportStart setting it to Current Time by checking the box Click OK Enter Runtime Mode and enter a name for tonight s converted log file report into BatchRef For the first day that this is run ReportStart will need to be set manually so this value will need to be put on a screen in a convenient place so it can be manually set on the first day Can Log Files be written into another separate folder It is possible to set this in SETTINGS INI This file is in the Configuration s sub folder within the installation folder which is by default C SV32 Add to the Logging section or create a Logging section if it is not there the line for example Path C MyPath NOTE However there is a problem if this folder is on a networked computer because should the network fail then SpecView will fail when it attempts to write to the logfile So we recommend this is only used for logging to a folder which is on the same PC as SpecView is running Also if the folder which is specified is not
306. owed by a comma For example 192 168 1 99 1 2J 2 5 Quick Start Automatically detect instruments and display instrument views Quick Start Automatically detect instruments and display Instrument Views Automatic Configuration Test Comme for HEW config Click the button to detect your instruments automatically The Input Required dialog box is displayed Input Required Enter name for new Contig DEFAULT Keyboard Cancel Enter a name for the configuration SpecView will create a sub folder with this name in the SpecView folder which is normally C SV32 the name you enter should follow the Windows file naming rules and should not be too long Remember this name This folder will be where all your log files and configuration files will be stored Log Reports will also be stored here unless another folder is specified When you have entered a name for the configuration and clicked OK the Ports and Protocols dialog box is displayed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 18 Ports and Protocols Port Protocol E aud Pate comi MOD MUXModues famo y Hep orc come lt None gt 0 Yd to COMS lt None gt tsi Auta y Settings COM4 auto gt COMS eons tsi suto y Lancel come Mene a comz Hons J Jett comes etenes a coma enano fito d TCPAIP Protocol Honeywell HE300 Fort 502 Timeout SECS Begin End l
307. pan of the chart the width of the chart in pixels Therefore if the time span of the chart is 28 days amp the chart is 1000 pixels wide then one pixel will be drawn and every 40 minutes This also applies to the rate at which the values shown along the top of the chart will be updated To ensure the current values can be seen put the values out onto the screen from the Variables List If the values still aren t updating as expected then put the variables SpecView BadComms SpecView GoodComms SpecView CommsErrorCode amp SpecView CommsErrorltem onto the screen to check instrument communications Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 243 SpecView User Manual FAQ Index 23 5 FAQ SpecView Configuration FAQ SpecView Configuration Can I develop complex screen s for one instrument e g Furnace1 then copy it them for another instrument of the same type e g Furnace2 Yes once you have created the screen s for the first instrument and you are happy with them use File gt Save As to save them to different names Ensure the other instrument s are in the Variables list either by adding them Manually or by having initially done an auto detect of all connected instruments Then go to one of the newly saved screens using File gt Open and use Edit gt Replace to substitute the names e g Furnace1 to Furnace2 This will change all occurrences but only on the current GDW so if there is more than one GDW per instrument
308. phone Contact your SpecView distributor for details DDE Application Name DDE Topic Name DDE Status Topic SpecView DDE Restrictions Getting data from SpecView via DDE DDE Read and Example of getting data Setting data into SpecView via DDE DDE Poke and Examples of setting data The SpecView DDE Interface is somewhat unorthodox in its implementation due to practical considerations as follows Normally a DDE server would register a whole set of topics and items for which conversations can be transacted For SpecView this would mean that each and every variable in the SpecView Variables List would have to be registered and furthermore each one would have to be requested over the comms link to supply any DDE Client that happened along This is clearly unfeasible Consequently the SpecView DDE Server registers no variables by default nor does it request anything from the Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 215 SpecView User Manual comms When a DDE request comes in from a DDE Client if it is the name of a variable or parameter that SpecView understands then that variable begins to be requested over comms In the meantime SpecView must have answered back to the DDE Client to allow the client to continue processing SpecView can only answer back that the request succeeded even if the instrument is down or the comms link has failed this is because it could be up to 3 or 4 seconds before the comms engine knows due t
309. possible BarCodes then having an event for each possible BarCode is reasonable The Strategy Controller is set up as Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 62 Event BarCode ABCDEFGH Action Recipe Download Specific Recipe Blue Widgets However it is probable that there are a far too many combinations to do a direct mapping a part of the BarCode can be extracted using SpecView s Math Function to get the relevant characters For example the fourth character might identify the recipe to be used for this process To extract D from ABCDEFGH use divide by 4 giving DEFGH and subtract 1 to give D The Strategy Controller is now simplified to Event BarCode D Action Recipe Download Specific Recipe Blue Widgets How do use a BarCode Scanner with SpecView There are two ways to communicate with a BarCode scanner from SpecView 1 By connecting the BarCode scanner interface to a Serial port SpecView will read from the Serial port and the sequence of characters is then seen in SpecView as a String Variable 2 In series with a keyboard sometimes called a keyboard wedge This method allows the BarCode Scanner to act exactly like a keyboard The user must make sure that SpecView is ready to accept keyboard entry This can be done by touching the variable or it can be linked to a button For example the operator touches a button marked Ready to S
310. possible without the need to re create existing configurations by just copying the configuration s sub folder from CASPECVIEW over to the new installation in C SV32 Although it may be that different folder names were used during installation If so then use the replacement folder names accordingly Below is an example of copying a configuration folder called MM8TC using Copy and Paste First navigate to the old CASPECVIEW folder Find the MM8TC folder in the list of icons and right click the folder A popup menu will appear Choose Copy from the menu Navigate to the C SV32 folder Find a blank space in the folder that does not have any icons in it and right click again This will display the popup menu as follows choose Paste Note that it is important to click on a blank part of the window because clicking on an icon will result in the folder being pasted into that folder which will not result in a useable configuration Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 11 SpecView User Manual S SPECVIEW File Edit View Favorites Back gt ise File Edt View Favorites Toole F d Back EN Search Cy Open Explore 1O300 ivw 10302 ww Search ax Scan for Wiruses E _ _ E View Sharing ESTADO El b l Arange Icons A EA TUSUS rw Line Up Icons Send To Refresh aq y A Cut Customize This Folder MME Copy 10350 ry Paste gt eee f Fa
311. ppear as XXXs in SpecView There is a limit of 100 items per SpecView Update Rate in the OPC Server If your variable is constantly showing XXXs then change it s Update Rate in SpecView Ensure that you are running version 1 0 0 23 or later of the OPC Driver SVOPC as a fix was applied to correct Strings which are shown as constantly changing inside SpecView but in reality are constant in the OPC Server Tools This server allows you to monitor control Eurotherm instrument controllers see http www eurotherm3 com itools The only known issue with this server is running it on a different operating system than that of your OPC Client If you have this situation then open Tools ModBus Server goto Edit Server Settings Advanced Check Bypass NT COM DCOM security settings This must be a solid black check not grayed out KEPServerEx This server allows you to monitor control a wide variety of instrument controllers PLCs see http www kepware com There are no known issues with this server when using build 702 onwards prior to this build not all of the groups items were visible MSI Modbus OPCServer This server allows you to monitor control a Marathon Sensors aka Marathon Monitors Inc instrument controllers There are no known issues with this server aside from possibly having to register the OPC Server to Windows if it does not appear in the Local OPC Servers list this is covered in the OPC Servers manual but the command line
312. put 1 Choose Font Justification Use CTAL ENTER for a new line in text box Object Name Text_3 Cancel Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 22 Make the changes to it that you require then click OK to close the dialog box NOTE To change the default text font use the Text Font menu command from the Object menu Cc teal Click the Save tool and then Save to save this GDW again Click the Runtime tool to enter Runtime Mode to start communicating with your instruments Values will be displayed on the Instrument Views and in the variable you added to the GDW File Logging History Recipe Alarrn Event MM8TC 1 Input 1 25 1 1 2 a 4 5 Fi T a If an Alarms dialog box is displayed close it by clicking the Close button NOTE The immediately obvious differences between Configuration Mode and Runtime Mode are that Configuration Mode displays a grid across the screen GDW Although it is possible to disable the grid this is not recommended as it helps with aligning items when positioning them on the screen GDW Variables in Configuration Mode are normally displayed as XXX There are also significant differences between the contents of the menus in the two modes Configuration Mode also has a toolbar If you do not have instrument s connected then the values will remain at or change to XXX Draw a Trend Chart Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 2
313. r with decimals o nteger Variables Text oF Specview a o Time ar Booth 1 control a DateTime ar Booth 1 prog o Date 8 Countdown Timer Variables List Options Double click on DateTime and enter the name Show Defined OPC Program Start Time Input Required Click OK to create the User Variable The DateTime data entry box will appear Ehle mewe Vel uta Program Start Time Keyboard Cancel o nteger o Text Specview Program Start Time Since the Strategy Controller is going to be setting the values for us it is not 00 00 00 Thursday January 01 1970 necessary to enter any default value Click the Close button Current Yalue New Value Repeat the above steps to create a rt Poo second User Variable called Program i o J Stop Time Date MDY Time H M 5 eJ ee a Ki HBB w Step 2 Define the log report format that you want to use for the file In runtime create the Log Report Format to be used for the automatic report Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 183 SpecView User Manual Log Format Setup Format Description Booth 1 standard Report Replace format Variables To Include Available In Log File Order In Report Add to format list Cancel Specv ew BATCH No Spec iew CURRENT RECIF Booth 1 control Working Set Booth 1 control Process Valu Booth 1 control Curent Si a Booth 1 control Error Booth 1 control Output Pe Booth
314. r and then start up the OPC Server then go back into SpecView s OPC Browser If the OPC Server still does not appear in SpecView s OPC Browser then try reinstalling the OPC Server The SpecView instrument created does not have all of the Item IDs in it that were listed in SpecView s OPC Browser This is either because e The access level in the instrument controller is not set high enough so that the Item IDs can be accessed Or e Notall of the Item IDs data types are supported see Supported Data Types below XXXs are shown for some Item IDs but not all The OPC Server is returning the value back for the XXX Item IDs as bad hence SpecView shows them as XXXs Consult the OPC Server manufacturer for the cause of the bad value cannot connect to a remote server that know exists and is running Check that the case of the OPC Server and PC name you have typed in is correct and try again If you are still having problems then it could be an authorization issue Does the remote PC with the OPC Server running have authorization for the PC with SpecView running on it In other words the user logged onto the PC with SpecView running must be setup as a user with the same password of the PC with the OPC Server running on it and possibly even logged in and running the OPC Server This is all dependent upon which version of Windows you are running NOTE The following steps are taken at your own ris
315. r codes can be returned when attempting to write data to a parameter 3 Timeout Response not received from instrument 18000 Internal IDF Error Seek advice from SpecView 18001 Address too long Too many Characters in the address field 18002 Address too short Not enough typed in 18003 Address is invalid for this Protocol 18004 Incorrect information after the comma 18005 Precision specification is incorrect 18006 Parity Error at Instrument end 18007 Rx Overflow on Instrument 18008 Rx Overrun at Instrument end 18009 Instrument message was corrupted 18010 Tx Buffer overflow at Instrument 18011 Instrument message was corrupted 18012 Parameter value was incorrect for this parameter 18013 Internal IDF Error Seek advice from SpecView 18014 Rx Buffer overflow at Instrument 18015 Instrument message was corrupted Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 SpecView Error Codes 220 18016 Write to read only parameter 18017 Internal Instrument Error Yokogawa RJC error 18018 Internal Instrument Error A D Converter Failure 18019 Parameter value was incorrect for this parameter NOTE With Yokogawa UT550 and UT750 the setpoint is a read only variable To change the SP you must edit Target SP 1 8 which are available on the parameter list 18020 Parameter value was incorrect for this parameter 18021 Internal IDF Error Seek advice from SpecView 18022 Rx Buffer overflow at Instrument 18023 Internal Instrument Error Con
316. r instrument is using the Modbus or Modbus TCP IP protocol then use DEBUG 15 DEBUGSIZE 1 DEBUGAUTODEL 9 This will create up to nine 1Mb files To set these up From SpecView s Runtime mode use the Setup COM Port menu command from the Options menu click the Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 5 SpecView User Manual appropriate tab for the port being used In the bottom left hand box enter DEBUG then in the next box enter either 1 or 15 appropriately then click the Add button COM Port Setup comi COMZ Driver SWModBus E aud seno Driver Commands T 5 R DEBUG JE Change Add Delete The Driver Commands box will now show the value for DEBUG Then if required do the same for DEBUGSIZE 1 and DEBUGAUTODEL 9 Then wait for at least one minute but no more than three minutes then Exit SpecView In your configuration folder under SpecView s installation folder usually C SV32 you should now find some TXT files where the names start with debug for example debug_COM1 txt Email these file s to your SpecView representative You will also need to email an SVA SpecView Archive of your configuration To do this use SpecView s Archive button which is on the Configurations Found dialog box when SpecView starts up Ideally this should be done with the Include log files checkbox un checked Remember to set Debug back to zero afterwards 1 7 Connections for SpecView Networking Conn
317. ra High rate The actual rate used depends on the settingsfor the config For example Zone pv Gets process value at medium rate Zone1 Process Val The same Zone1 PV m The same zOnE1 PROCess VAL M Still the same Zone1 PV U Gets the PV at the Ultra High Rate When a request for a new variable comes in via the DDEAdvise mechanism it is checked by SpecView to see that the variable exists If it does exist then SpecView begins to request that variable over comms and from then on supplies the Client with the data at the given rate or faster until the Client signals that data is no longer required If the variable does not exist then the SpecView DDE Status information reflects this NOTE Due to the potentially long startup time of any given request a blank answer is sent back to the DDE Client first Thus the very first item of data from SpecView should be ignored for each new item that is requested In the event of comms errors or missing instruments no data is sent across DDE Return to DDE help topics 16 7 Setting data into SpecView DDE Setting data into SpecView DDE Data can be sent down to the Instrument using the DDEPoke command Read the DDEPoke Examples Due to the fact that A there can be a significant time delay before the data is sent and B the data may not be accepted by the instrument over range etc the SpecView DDE Server reports back immediately that the DDEPoke succeeded It is the responsibility of the C
318. rded by SpecView The Event list can be displayed by the Events Show Event List IDH_alarms_show_alarm_listibutton attribute 5 11 7 Password Menu Runtime Password Menu Runtime Alarm E vent Password Options Zoom m Use this menu to Log In to SpecView with a Password Password Log In can be accessed by the Password Log In or Log Out button attribute Log In Log Out Select the user from the list and enter the password Password Entry Current user Current Level O Fully Locked New user Supervisor Password 7 Keyboard Cancel Log Out to Locked Log In For setting up passwords in Configuration Mode read Passwords 5 11 8 Remotes Menu Remotes Menu Remote Options Zoom Window Help User Setup Ctrl Shift A Mew Connected Users Chrl Shitt U The menu items on this menu are only enabled on the Local The User Setup menu command is detailed in SoecView Networking Local View Connected Users gives information about each Remote connection Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Using SpecView 80 Remote Users Attached List nine 3413 092 168 1 9 Build Connection Duration Bran Bld 4745 32 08 19 2002 12 50 51 DueRx0 00kb Tel 25kb HOO MOO LOO HS0 MSOLSO Iri John Bld 4745 32 08 19 2002 1725219 DueRx0 00 b Tx0 51 b HOO MOO LOO HSO MSOLSO Iri The columns show The User ID The version of SpecView running on the Remote Date amp time the conn
319. re that the following registry entry has the value 1 this is documented in Microsoft s article Q174024 DCOM95 Frequently Asked Questions HKEY_LOCAL MACHINE Software Microsoft Ole LegacyAuthenticationLevel NOTE If you are still having problems then consult the OPC Server manufacturer If you still have a problem then consult SpecView s website http www specview com I am experiencing problems with an OPC Server such that the OPC Server crashes or runs up and then disappears Try adding the following to SV32 INI which may solve the problem OPC OPCServersToBeTraversedByBranch1 lt OPC Server Name gt 1 OPCServersToBeTraversedByBranch2 lt OPC Server Name gt 1 etc Replacing lt OPC Server Name gt with the OPC Server Name For example OPCServersToBeTraversedByBranch1 MSL Datascan 1 Supported Data Types Currently SpecView only supports the following OPC data types VT_BOOL VT_BSTR VT_DATE VT_FILETIME VT vT_12 VT_14 VT_INT VT_R4 VT_R8 VT Ul VT_Ul2 VT_UI4 VT_UINT If your SpecView instrument does not contain the Item IDs that you expect then check with the OPC Server s manufacturer to see if it is a type in the above list 19 5 OPC PC Specification Performance OPC PC Specification Performance To provide some idea of the overhead that OPC puts on a PC we ran SpecView build 693 and created configuration that included a Eurotherm 2404 connected to running Tools running on the same PC Operat
320. read Alarms amp request all variables marked for logging as well as anything which is being used by the Strategy Controller So the 30 PPS isn t just reading the ProcessValue of each instrument SpecView s Instrument Views Parameter lists have been designed to request data in blocks where possible to increase comms throughput The amount of time that a block of data is stored can be changed using the Driver Command TTL Time To Live The difficulty is tuning the setting of Time To Live too long amp the data on the screen won t get updated from the current instrument values but too short amp the block could have timed out before SpecView has had a chance to use the data in the block amp so will have to re request it This is especially the case if a number of instruments are turned off or if there is a poor comms connection Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 241 SpecView User Manual It is well worth creating a test Configuration with just one or two instruments defined amp just the minimum number of parameters out on a screen together with GoodComms BadComms CommsErrorCode amp CommsErrorltem as detailed below and noting the PPS rate The load can be spread over more than one COM port by using SpecView s Multiport option When SpecView fails to read a parameter the Comms Back Off Multiplier default value 30 is used as a delay factor before retrying This is set from Preferences Runtime If instruments
321. resolution of the Trend Chart The fastest rate that values can be logged to SpecView s Data Log files is once per second Although it is possible to write values to a separate file at a faster rate using FastCount However the different parts of SpecView request values at rates that are specified below Screen Preferences Runtime Medium scan rate default 20 tenths of a sec To adjust the rate at which individual variables on a GDW are sampled edit the Dynamic Attributes Data Logger Preferences Logging Rate default 60 secs maximum 1 sec Parameter List Preferences Runtime Parameter List PPS Points Per Second default 15 Strategy Preferences Strategy Rate default Medium as defined above DDE DDE default Medium as defined above When the mouse isn t being moved the rate that instrument variables are being read is displayed in Points Per Second PPS in the status bar along the bottom of the screen GDW I Ho Password 117 3 pps NUM ve If the instrument is using the Modbus protocol then the maximum points per second PPS that SpecView can obtain from a single COM port at 9600 baud is about 30 individual points at 19200 baud the maximum is between 40 amp 50 PPS The maximum speed that SpecView can obtain over a good TCP IP connection from a fast Modbus instrument can be many hundreds of points per second However the bottleneck is often the instrument itself However SpecView also has to
322. riable Types Booleans On Off variables The words for the on and off states can be edited Number with decimals A number which may have one or more decimal places Integer A number without decimal places Text May include any characters or numbers Time Expressed in Hours Minutes Seconds Date The computer date DateTime The computer date and time SpecView User Variables have some additional types 24 28 Variables List Variables List Accessed by clicking 0 uD on the Toolbar while in Configuration Mode it is a pop up box listing all the variables of all the instruments in the current configuration To display a variable name and value on the GDW Double Click the variable within the Variables List dialog box SpecView Variables 24 29 Web Server Option Web Server Option SpecView s built in Web Server is a dongle option It is a built in Web Server inside the SpecView program that allows the currently showing Computer screen to be served up as a web page from time to time to web browsers It will show the whole screen not just SpecView s GDWSs It allows no interaction with the system whatsoever Its use is limited to being able to just see what is on the screen at that moment Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 259 SpecView User Manual To properly view and interact with a SpecView at another location SpecView s Local Remotenetworking facility would be required To use the Web Server it should fi
323. rking How do view previous Event Logs Use the Convert Log File menu command from the Logging menu Create a Report Format which has Include Event Log checked This will create a CSE file which can be viewed using Excel How can restore the Historical Replay Control Panel window to its original size Use File gt Preferences Settings Reset Historical Replay Window Position Why am I getting steps or gaps on my Trend Chart rather than a smooth curve This could be because SpecView is busy trying to read non existent instruments or getting repeated comms failures Maybe increasing the Comms Back Off Multiplier to 1000 may help Alternatively the PC could be busy so check the loading on the PC Gaps can be caused by the PC s Power Save function lam getting empty logfiles what could be the reason for this Use the Show Logging in Variables List menu command on the Setup gt Database sub menu Then using the Variables List check that the required variables are set as logged Or maybe the logging rate needs adjusting from Preferences Logging How can performance be improved so that the rate that instrument variables are updated is increased For values on the screen adjust the Medium scan rate using File gt Preferences Runtime tab SpecView s maximum rate of update of a value on the screen is once every 1 tenth of a second SpecView s maximum rate of update of a Trend chart is once a second However check the
324. rminated correctly o Do you need a converter which is needed for RS422 or RS485 serial comms The reason the B amp B converter is recommended for SpecView is because it has Automatic Send Data Control which automatically switches from transmit to receive o Does the converter work Has it been wired up correctly according to the wiring diagram supplied with it Does it require power and is it switched on Have any dip switches been set according to the instructions Do O Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 60 other connected instruments work Is it possible to swap it around to test it o Has SpecView s Online Technical Notes been checked for this instrument type Access www specview com then click Download and click FTP site and open the TechNotes folder o Some instruments have to be setup to allow their variables to be read For example setting the access level o If the XXX is coming from an OPC Server then contact your OPC Server s administrator to see if the OPC Server is running correctly o Ifall of this has been checked then please contact your instrument s supplier If SpecView has been working successfully but has now stopped working or if just some of the instrument s variables are displaying as XXX then o Firstly be aware that some instruments are designed in such a way that depending on the instrument setup instrument mode or program consider
325. rnace 3 Standard Report Step 2 Enter the Start From Date and Time and Stop At Date and Time If you click on one of the Log Files Available the start and stop times of that file will be entered automatically Alternatively click the Find Batch Number button to select the Start and End time based on a Batch Tag It is important not to change the Report Format after doing Step 2 as this will affect how the since Last Conversion of this format will operate When you have chosen the Report Format amp Start Stop Time click the Generate button Log Files Available A list of all log files available on the system is shown in the dialog box They include start date and time and end date and time of the files A file is created every day Start From Stop At Enter the time amp dates for the start and stop times of the desired report If a report has been previously generated SpecView will use the stop time date of the previous report as a suggested start time for the next report By checking the current time box the current date and time will be entered in the Stop At boxes A Log Report can also be generated from the Remote computer which is detailed in Log Reports from the Remote Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 168 13 7 Log Reports from the Remote Log Reports from the Remote Generating a Log Report using the Log File Convert Manager or by using the Buttonaction Logging Convert Specific L
326. rocess 1 Your copy of SpecView generates a code that you give to SpecView by phone fax or email 2 SpecView gives you two or more codes that you enter Start by clicking on the Help menu command and then on Registration Info Md Application Help Index Using Help About Spec len Registration Info Release Hotes Dongle Information Dongle Information Registration Information Senal Ho 30908330 Scope US SpecView mitialized NLC 21 Mar 96 16 00 Last Update HLC 23 Sep 97 18 00 Enabled Options Multiport 02 86 96 10 00 Historical Replay 0 2 8 96 10 00 DDE 0 2 8 96 10 00 Strategy Controller 23 9 97 18 00 Protocol Eurotherm Bisync Protocol Eurotherm PC3000 Protocol Eurotherm Modbus Protocol Modbus Protocol Freld Instruments BEC Inotrimamto Be ntoanaol Enable Further Options Click Enable Further Options to begin the upgrade process Upgrade Step 1 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 223 SpecView User Manual Upgrade Options Upgrade Options Upgrading your options is a two step process Step 1 involves giving a code to your Spec iew representative Step 1 Read code you will give to Spec iew Step 2 15 where you enter codes provided by 5pecYiew to enable pour requested options Step 2 Enter codes you have been given by SpecView To Exit without affecting any upgrade options press Exit When you are ready to contact Sp
327. ronannnnns 43 SpecView Networking Troubleshooting oooncccoccncccnonncccnnncccnnnnncconnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnrnnanznnos 43 SpecView Networking Minimum Requirements ccccssseeesesseeccenseesenseeeeeeneeseenseeses 44 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 45 Start ING SOC VICW casona vsecessse ves cease sacceucenstcacscsasteuscesssveusesessvueessesnauaccesucusascaucnsacenttannn 45 Archive ANG Restore ins tb etienetlt cee acd aa aa aa aa 47 Restore Overwrite Configuration Warning sscccsesssseeeseessseeseeesseeeeseesseeeseonenseesenenss 49 SpecView Command Line Options c ccsscseeeecesseeeeeeeesseeeseoesseeesceesseeeseeeeneeeseoenseeesenenseees 49 Instrument Definition Dete ction cccceesseeeseesseeenseeeeenseenenseeeseeseeeeenseesoenseeeoeneeenoeasesoensees 50 Manually Defining Instruments civic dada 50 For Instruments using the Modbus Protocol connoncccccnncnccncnccncccccnnccncocnnnnanconennanncrrnnnannnrnnnnnas 53 Automatic Instrument Detection aaan 54 TCP IP Auto DELECHON sisii aaaea aaa a aaa a aA aaa Aaaa 56 Add Rename INStTUMeniS sisi rico 58 Troubleshooting Instrument COMMUNICATION oooncccccccnnnnnancnnncnnnnnannnononennnnnancnnrnnnnnaannrnnnnnnas 59 Using a BarCode Scanner with SpecVieW ccoocoooconccconcconcocenonnnoncnnncancncnnnnnncnrrnnnnnrrrennannrrnnnanas 61 HC900 HCDesigner Modbus Map Import sscceeeeececeesenseeeeseeeensnseeeeeseoeseneeee
328. rror code is 1460 which is a timeout All of the above Comms counters can be reset to Zero by writing to them Writes of other values are ignored Currently it is not possible to determine which COM port the error s occurred on if this is needed use the Toggle DEBUG menu command on the Options Menu under the direction of a SpecView representative SpecView FastCount This is a count up counter that counts accurately and continuously at rates up to 100 times per second You can use this counter as the basis for a Strategy Controller Event that needs to be checked frequently For further details read SpecView FastCount Variable Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 102 SpecView LogRate This variable stores the current value for the logging rate This variable s initial value when entering Runtime mode will be the value set from Preferences Logging The variable is Read Only and cannot be changed during Runtime mode other than by using the Logging On Off action SpecView Pre Defined Variables for Recipe Variables oP ser Variables Recipe Most Recent o Recipe Name o Download Date Download Time Downloaded By Downloaded From GO o Sent To O SPEC IEVY o Recipe Name o Download Date e Download Time Downloaded By o Downloaded From GO e Sent To oP SPECVIEW op SPECIES Most Recent Recipe Name is the name of the last recipe downloaded Download Date
329. rsor AX to draw the control on the GDW This can be done by clicking somewhere on the GDW amp dragging out to the required size or by just clicking on the GDW to position a control using its default size Even controls which don t have any graphical components will need to be placed somewhere on the screen but as they will not be displayed in Runtime they can be drawn any size anywhere on the screen 6 The Insert ActiveX Control box will be displayed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 203 SpecView User Manual MA Insert Activex Control SYaverage Control SY Display Text Control SVE lipse Control ile Cancel See More Actives Controls Select the control required if it isn t listed then click See More ActiveX Controls to add the control to the list or if the control isn t shown then the control will need to be Registered amp then select the control from the list 7 When all the required controls have been drawn press the ESC key to restore the cursor to the pointer Le cursor 8 Select the control on the GDW Note To select an ActiveX object on a GDW Either move the mouse over the top left corner until the cross hair cursor is shown then click to select the object Or click the background amp drag to enclose the object s when the button is released all objects enclosed will be selected 9 Use Object gt ActiveX Control gt Setup or Right Click on the control or press Al
330. rst be enabled and the refresh rate set using Preferences Web Server There is also a simple web page file which is required to interact with it this can be requested when ordering the dongle option This web page file should be put into the main SV32 folder where SV32 EXE is and the Web server if it is enabled will use it to display the screen shots lt is advisable to ensure that the pre defined SpecView variables SpecView Date SpecView Time are displayed on the screen so that the remote user can see exactly when SpecView last refreshed the information 24 30 Windows filenaming rules Windows file naming rules A file name can contain up to 215 characters including spaces However it is not recommended that you create file names with 215 characters Most programs cannot interpret extremely long file names File names cannot contain the following characters C I1 2 8 0 H lt gt 24 31 Writeable Variable Writeable Variable An instrument variable that can be changed over communications for example a setpoint NOTE Some variables can be both Writeable AND Read Only for example output power in a controller can be writeable when the Instrument is in Auto and be Read Only when the controller is in Manual Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Index 260 Index A Archive Restore restrictions 49 Arrange Icons 97 Auto Close Boxes 69 Auto Configuration 54 Automatically detect instrum
331. s Setup Window PC3000 Help Database Show Logging in Variables List wf Show Alarm in variables List i o ist aD Dynamics ko CS The Variable List will show which variables SpecView is checking as alarms O e SP Rate Linit 0 0ff O e Alarm SP1 B Alarm 1 Status O Alarm SP2 X Alarm 2 Status Clicking on a blank square will ADD the variable to alarm checking only boolean variables can be selected Clicking on an X will REMOVE the variable from alarm checking The rate at which they are checked is defined in the Preferences dialog box The default value is every 5 seconds If instrument s are disconnected from communications by either being removed or turned off alarm checking can cause excessive slow down of communications to the remaining instruments It may be necessary to set a slower rate for alarm checking turn it off remove the enable check or remove specific variables from alarm checking When an alarm condition is detected the New Alarms window appears E Mame Time Occured Time Cleared Time Acknowledged fone 1 High Alarm 2394 003 1418 09 MS Acknowledge Alarm History Close Clicking the Acknowledge button time stamps the Time Acknowledged column and displays the Alarm History window Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 173 SpecView User Manual Name Time Occured Time Cleared Time Acknowledged Zone 1 High Alarm 29 0003 1418 12 MA 294 00031419024 Zone 1 High A
332. s which will explain how to use the help system for maximum effectiveness About SpecView About specview 5 gt Specview Bld 695 32 232 Copyright Specview 1994 2001 Release Hotes Built with Bld 463532 Technical Information Displays the SpecView version and build information Click Release Notes for the details on this version If you need to contact SpecView s Technical Support you may be asked to click the Technical Information button to provide further details of your specific installation Registration Info Displays the serial number and status of the SpecView Dongle This dialog box is used to upgrade the Dongle Click Enable Further Options to upgrade the dongle Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 83 SpecView User Manual Release Notes Details changes made to SpecView such as new features and fixed problems 6 Configuring SpecView 6 1 Configuration Menubar 6 1 1 Configuration Menubar amp Toolbar Configuration Mode Menubar and Toolbar File Edit Draw Object View Passwords Setup Window Help Del Mla kN folojo a ajAjo a a e Ml x S Accessed from the Configuration Mode menu command on the Runtime Mode s File menu The configuration menus and menu commands are individually described below However for detailed information on how to configure SpecView read Configuring SpecView File Menu Edit Menu Draw Menu Object Menu View Menu Passwords Menu Setup Menu Window
333. s List tool select the instrument s name and click Properties then click Address Help BAUD rate and Parity can also be set e During Configuration mode using the Setup COM Ports menu command on the Setup menu e Or during Runtime mode using the Setup COM Ports menu command on the Options menu shown below COM Port Setup comi COMZ Driver S ModBus E aud a600 Driver Commands T 5 H 1 Change Add Delete This dialog box also allows Driver Commands to be set In this example T 5 means that the timeout for reading a value over comms is set to 5 tenths of a second R 1 means that it will retry once There are many other Driver Commands such as setting DEBUG levels but these are best discussed with a SpecView Representative 24 5 Communications Ports Com Port Communications Ports COM Port A serial port on your computer Usually RS232 but special cards may be used that have RS422 or RS485 ports Windows identifies ports with the term COM1 COM2 etc SpecView supports up to COM9 Communication Ports are a hardware item in your computer and should not be confused with Communications Protocol 24 6 Communications Protocol Communications Protocol The communication standard used by the instrument for example Modbus This is how the software communicates with the instrument and is not related to the type of communications standard used by the port RS232 RS485 etc To communicate with instruments that us
334. s from within SpecView The configuration tools are required to do this For further information on the above please contact your SpecView distributor The following sections describe in more detail how to setup SpecView to communicate with the instrument s either that you have currently connected read Auto Instrument Detection or which you intend to connect read Manually Defining Instruments However if you have already successfully done this then go to Runtime Mode Using SpecV lew 4 6 Manually Defining Instruments Manually Defining Instruments Instruments will need to be defined manually if they 1 Are not physically connected to the computer for auto detection 2 Are a special instrument that cannot be auto detected for example Red Lion Dupline and Omron 3 Are being added to an existing configuration For 1 and 2 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 91 SpecView User Manual After you have started SpecView click the New Manual Configuration button on the Configurations Found dialog box This will bring you directly into Configuration Mode For 3 Select your existing configuration and go directly into Configuration Mode by pressing the SHIFT key while clicking the Go Online Now button Then continuing Defining a new Instrument ae ys Open the Variables List by clicking the tool yas and then click the Show New button The new list is displayed and the button changes to the Show Defined button Click
335. s is because the Replace function can only change to a name that already exists This can also be used to change the name of variables for example SpecView BatchZone1 to SpecView Boiler1 To do this uncheck the At start of variable only box and substitute atchZone for oiler Select All Shortcut Ctrl A Selects all the objects on the GDW NOTE This ts useful to find stray objects such as very small drawing objects put down by mistake To de select the objects just click the background Properties Shortcut Alt Enter Shape Properties Edits depending on the selected object Shape properties of a drawing object e Text attributes Trend chart attributes Bar chart attributes There is no function for grouped objects or Instrument Views Dynamic Attributes Shortcut Ctrl D NOTE This is only relevant to values of variables displayed on the GDW during Configuration Mode as XXX not to the names of the variables or other objects for example Trend charts or bitmaps on the GDW Select the object by SINGLE clicking on it Then use the Edit Dynamic Attributes menu or the shortcut key The Dynamic Attributes dialog box is displayed for the selected variable Color Dynamics Shortcut Ctrl Y Select the object by SINGLE clicking on it Then use Color Dynamics from the Edit menu or the shortcut key The Color Dynamics dialog box is displayed Insert New Object Displays the Insert New Object dialog box
336. s on the Start menu If you do not have the copy protection key called the dongle connected then a dialog box to that effect will be displayed Spec iews2 Mo copy protection key dongle connected Start in REMOTE Made Click Start in DEMO Mode SpecView will be fully functional in Demo mode but a timer limits communication with the instruments to ten minutes This timer is reset each time Configuration Mode is entered When SpecView starts up it displays a splash screen containing the logo and the Copyright This splash screen can be clicked on to jump to the Configurations Found dialog box shown below Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 46 Configurations Found Batch Aun The Refresh button on this dialog box allows for the list to be refreshed to take into account any new configurations that might have been manually created after SpecView has been started uto O nine Countdown until auto online bo DEFAULT 33 Stop countdown Networking Remote Automatic Configuration Test Comme for NEWW contig Archiwe Restore Archive Restore Ner Manual Configuration Refresh E sil Seconds The Archive Restore buttons allow you to Archive or Restore entire configurations If you have an existing configuration which may be a demo configuration installed as part of SpecView or previously Restored which you inte
337. s to aa Click and hold the left mouse button then drag the rectangle to the desired size Click the right mouse button when you have drawn all the objects you want Press and hold the shift key to snap to a square Use the Ctrl Copy feature to make exact copies of the object Double Click the object to edit the Shape Properties 6 3 9 Round Rectangle Drawing Tool Round Rectangle Drawing Tool Draw menu Round Rectangle OR Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions The cursor changes to Click and hold the left mouse button then drag the rectangle to the desired size Click the right mouse button when you have drawn all the objects you want Press and hold the shift key to snap to a square Use the extra Handle in the top right corner to change the radius of the corners Use the Ctrl Copy feature to make exact copies of the object Double Click the object to edit the Shape Properties 6 3 10 Ellipse Drawing Tool Ellipse Drawing Tool Draw menu Ellipse OR Go to Drawing Basics for general instructions The cursor changes to a Click and hold the left mouse button then drag the ellipse to the desired size Click the right mouse button when you have drawn all the objects you want Press and hold the shift key to snap to a circle Use the Ctrl Copy feature to make exact copies of the object Double Click the object to edit the Shape Properties 6 3 11 Polygon Drawing Tool Polygon Drawing Tool Draw menu Polygon OR G
338. sErroricode m User Variables Parameter to Alter Specyienw DateTime Number Set Value 4 Curent Time Number DateTime Value o BECEN ar oneg 6 4 20 Parameters Math Function Parameters Math Function The Math Function Button Attribute or Strategy Controller action allows limited amounts of mathematical and other operations to be performed on Parameters Math functions always take the form of Copy From Parameter lt Math Function gt Operator Parameter gt Copy To Parameter The settings below will write the value of Screw Speed x Drive Ratio to Roll Speed Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 130 Ratio Roll to Screw Speed None Parameters Math Function _ mmc S The parameters chosen for the From Operator and To fields should usually be of the same type For example you cannot take a date divide it by a boolean and put the result into a text type There are however some exceptions listed in the table below If you must do math on items of different types not listed below then use the appropriate Copy Facilities to copy the value s to the correct type first NOTE This feature can be used to extract part of the text such as one read from a barcode reader Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 131 SpecView User Manual CopyFrom MathFunction Operator CopyTo Comments Type Type Type Time Any Number Time Appropriate math is done on the time
339. seenbetes 155 LLO Preferences SMA 155 TETO PFETEFENGCES ISO ii a A A A EAA E 155 TIL Preferences S6UliNg S ccia a a aaia 156 T112 Pref r nceS Web Serve uriuri ia 156 11 13 Preferences Logfile CONVerSi0N scssi nannaa aa a aaa 157 11 14 Preferences DDE oa 157 LITO Preferences Debug oniga AE ca 157 12 Passwords 158 12 1 Passwords OVVIE A Nae 158 12 2 Passwords GDW S6tUD cusco 159 Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 VI SpecView32 Main Help 12 3 12 4 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 13 13 13 14 13 15 13 16 13 17 13 18 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 14 11 14 12 14 13 Passwords Selecting Objects for ACCESS c cssssseceeeeeseeeeeeeenseeseeennseeesenseeeseeeeneeeseonass 161 Passwords User Control non 161 Data Logging 162 Data LOGGING OVENVICW oo 162 Data Logging lt Variables cuidan 163 Data Logging Disk Space Requirements cscccccesseeeeseeeeeeeseceenseeeseesseeeeeoeesseeseoeass 164 Dala POGGING Rale veraa aaa Eaa e OE eSa a 165 LOG REPOS seiis e a a 166 LOG Report Sel Diada N E E a a A 167 LOG Repons from th REMOte iia n 168 Log REDOTEFO Madina a 168 Log Reports Specifying decimal places cccccssssseecceesseeeseeenseeeseeenseeeseeesseeeseoeaneessees 171 Dala LOGGING ALAS ini a dadas 172 Dala LOGGING gt EVENTS in a E a 173 Historical Replay OPUOM
340. siderably in understanding what s going on 1 To check that the modem on the Remote PC is basically working and can be seen on the COM port do the following On the Remote PC use HyperTerminal Direct to the COM Port that the modem is connected to Connect To El D Test Enter detaile for the phone number that you want to dial Country regior United Kingdom 44 Area code jor g2 Fhone number Connect using Cancel Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 40 COMI Properties 400 Type AT although the AT characters will not necessarily be shown on the screen it should respond with OK which will prove that the modem can be accessed on the COM port OK Then exit HyperTerminal 2 Check that the modem on the Local PC can be accessed By doing the same as above on the Local PC 3 Then on the Local PC run HyperTerminal again but this time select the modem from the list enter any telephone number as this won t be used Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 41 SpecView User Manual Connect To El D Test Enter details for the phone number that you want to dial Country regior United Kingdom 44 Area code on 025 Phone number Connect using ER a Click Cancel instead of Dial then choose the Wait for call menu command from the Call menu Now on the Remote PC run HyperTerminal and again select the modem from the list ent
341. ste Shortcut Once this is complete run SpecView 32 and the configuration will be listed in the Configurations Found dialog box A configuration cannot however be copied from the 32 bit version back into the 16 bit version as there are some incompatibilities between the two versions 2 Quick Start Guide 2 1 Quick Start Introduction Quick Start Introduction NOTE Press the F1 key at any time for help This quick start guide covers the installation and initial configuration of SpecView When the computer is connected to an instrument via a serial port or Ethernet SpecView gets data from and can send data to the instrument Unlike conventional SCADA software where each data point has to be defined by the user SpecView has a pre built database of hundreds of instruments Most instruments if already connected to the computer can be automatically detected by SpecView If the instrument is not connected to the computer or if that instrument does not support the auto detection feature the user picks it from a list In SpecView this is called Manually Defining Instruments Once all the steps below have been followed your screen should look similar to this The Instrument View the MM8TC 1 box on the left will depend on the specific instrument being used Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Quick Start Guide 12 Fie Logging Histon Recipe Alarm Event Password Remotes Options oom Window Help MMSTC Input 1 26
342. strument name in the Variables List OR o Single Click an instrument name and click Properties OR Right Click an instrument name in the Variables List Add Rename Instrument Name Barrel one 1 Port COM1 Address 01 Help For Instrument Address Help Rename Only Delete Cancel NOTE The names of existing Instrument Views will NOT be changed To get an Instrument View with the new name click Add to GDW and delete the existing Instrument View on the GDW by selecting it and pressing the Delete key DO NOT CLICK THIS DELETE BUTTON Decimal Places Some protocols examples include Modbus Red Lion and Yokogawa Green Series do not provide the computer with information about decimal places Therefore when SpecView auto detects instruments it will assume NO decimal places for Modbus and Red Lion and ONE decimal place for Yokogawa Green series Some instrument values are known by SpecView to require a decimal place and this will be added automatically Other instrument values MAY need one or more decimal places depending on how the instrument is configured These values take their decimal place requirements from part of the address details Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 59 SpecView User Manual When you start SpecView if the reading is ten or a hundred times too big small for example 123 4 instead of 1234 then you will need to edit the instrument address To change the decimal places for a specif
343. supplied by your Spec iew representative in the order they were supplied Press the Use Code button after entering each code Enter a Spec iew code here you can use upper or lower case letters to enter the code Spaces will be ignored Push Use Code after each one 3986 29F5 2007 EE43 0303 Each code ts 5 groups of 4 letters and numbers Press OF ONLY when you have entered ALL the codes supplied for your optionals OF NOTE After the first code has been entered the first 8 characters will remain as typically they will be the same for the next code Therefore subsequent codes will only need the last 12 characters to be entered Codes may be any case and spaces are not required although spaces make reading back easier After the last code has been entered this box appears Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 225 SpecView User Manual svsupdig dil AN Dongle successtully upgraded It is necessary to exit SpecView amp run it again for the new options to be recognized Licensing in SpecView 19 OPC Client Support in SpecView 19 1 OPC Client Support Overview OPC Client support in SpecView SpecView offers an OPC Client initially the client only supports local OPC Servers when support for remote OPC Servers is available in SpecView then this will be a free upgrade to existing OPC Client customers SpecView supports any OPC Server that provides an OPC Data Access standard 1 or 2 inter
344. t 2 09 30 97 09 30 97 14 39 56 Alarm Ack 3 J09 30 97 09 30 97 14 40 03 value Set Zone 1 Setpoint E 4 09 30 97 09 30 97 14 40 35 value Set fone 1 Alarm SP 25 5 09 50 97 09 30 97 14 40 42 Value Set Zone 1 Proportional band 1 6 030 97 09 30 97 14 41 24 Log file Convert 13 12 Historical Replay Option Historical Replay Option This is accessed from the History menu during Runtime mode Historical Replay is an option for SpecView If the option has not been purchased you are limited to replaying the last 4 hours of data You can upgrade your copy of SpecView by phone Contact your SpecView distributor for details Historical Replay Control Panel Historical Replay Start Time Historical Replay Find Batch Number Historical Replay Rate Historical Replay Options 13 13 Historical Replay Control Panel Historical Replay Control Panel When Historical Replay is started from the History menu during Runtime SpecView makes a copy of the current GDW and shows the Replay Control Panel Replay Control Panel Choose Start Time E Start h 2h dh Options ma gt Historical Replay Start Time Historical Replay Find Batch Number Historical Replay Rate Historical Replay Options Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 175 SpecView User Manual 13 14 Historical Replay Start Time Historical Replay Start Time The six XXh buttons set the start time at 1 to 24 hours back from the current c
345. t 10 15 Setting the recipe download order Setting the Recipe download order lt is sometimes necessary to send recipe values to instruments in a specific order Examples are Setting a controller to Manual BEFORE setting the output power Setting a programmer segment or step number BEFORE setting a target time or setpoint NOTE Setting the Recipe download order is only required if the order of the download matters for the particular instrument variables used by the Recipe Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Recipes 150 Target SetPoint In this picture all these variables have been selected for Recipe lt is required that the following order is followed 1 The first segment number 2 The first target SP and Time 3 The second segment number 4 The second target SP and Time 5 And so on SpecView supports up to 99 download levels which specify the order Any number of parameters may be sent at any level It is advisable to leave one or two spare levels at the top So typically the first item the first segment number in this example will be set to level 3 the next to level 4 and so on The reason for this is in case you need to add something in the future that needs to be set first To set the download level Vx a ensure re i is not enabled on the toolbar Single click the value to select it Press the shortcut Ctrl D or use the Edit Dynamic Attributes menu command Dynamic Attributes segme
346. t As First GDW This only applies where a configuration contains more than one GDW Click this menu command to make this GDW the first window when entering Runtime Mode If this is not set then the last GDW to be edited will be the first one opened when entering Runtime Mode Auto open on Runtime Click this menu command to tell SpecView to open start this GDW when entering Runtime Mode NOTE Be sure to click this menu command on all of the GDWs which have Trend charts Then switching between the GDWs will show all the current information on the Trend charts If you do not each of the GDWs will have to be opened in Runtime Mode before the Trend chart lines will start to be drawn Enter Runtime Mode Toolbar connected instruments Exits Configuration Mode and enters Runtime Mode You start communicating with the Preferences Shortcut Ctrl E Click this menu command to display the Preferences dialog box to modify SpecView s settings Print Configuration Mode File menu Shortcut Ctrl P Toolbar a Prints the current GDW Use the Print Setup menu command to change your printer settings Print Preview Previews how the printed GDW will look when it is printed from Runtime mode Print Setup Configuration Mode File menu Use this to change the printer settings such as Using landscape format Using a different printer for example if Adobe Acrobat is installed then this can be selected to create a PDF Portable Doc
347. t Enter to setup the control according to the author s documentation 10 If the ActiveX control is one which has input and or output values s which need to be linked to SpecView s Instrument or User variables then use Object gt ActiveX Control gt Link to Variables or Alt X M ActiveX Control Links Miel Ei Name s ymbol Factor Standard Controls Type s pmbol Factor Standard Control T Change allowed on Remotes Ignore first value on Outputs If Receive every value Inputs Outputs Methods lqnore _Analog aluet Ignore FillColorMode Ignore BlinkMode Ignore Category lqnore Handle lqnore Type lqnore Picture lqnore Stretch lqnore Flip Ignore Fillolor lqnore BlinkSpeed lqnore BlinkColor Help Enable Disable Invoke cancel Enabled Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 204 Input tab An Input is an input into the Control SpecView setting a value into it Output tab An Output is an output from a Control Methods tab A Method is something that can t be classed as an input or output For example something that has no inputs or outputs such as an About box Change allowed on remotes checkbox This is OFF by default When checked this allows users logged in from Remote versions of SpecView to change the Inputs on this ActiveX Control This maybe desirable for a control such as a graphical slider but NOT desirable for say an averaging control Ignore first value
348. t manufacturer s instructions NOTE We strongly caution against using internal 422 485 cards Unless you are expert in testing and troubleshooting communications we recommend using internal RS232 ports and external isolated converters Since all computers have 232 ports a second computer can be used to determine whether a problem is in the computer or wiring if an external converter has been used e Each serial port MUST operate with its own interrupt unless special interrupt sharing cards and software are used e Serial ports using 16550 UARTS or above are strongly recommended especially if BAUD rates above 9600 are going to be used They are required for instruments that use block mode data reading Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Installation 2 The number of controllers that can be connected to SpecView is only limited by the available addresses on the controllers Most instruments go to 99 addresses and SpecView supports up to 40 ports RS422 and RS485 would need repeaters if there are more than 16 or 32 instruments respectively Please see the instrument manufacturer s instructions or the converter s manual Instrument Settings RS422 ElA422 A Instruments RS485 ElA485 Instruments Ethernet and TCP IP Troubleshooting Instrument Communication Connections for SpecView Networking 1 2 Instrument Settings Instrument Settings SpecView has help available for several makes of instruments The Ports and Protocols
349. t ool EEDS Open the Variables List tool Rename each instrument and add Instrument Views to the GDW s as required Click Start Scan Start Scan for automatic instrument detection ROO Start Scan Click A E When there is an Instrument View displayed on the GDW for each of the instruments which are connected then click the _ Stop to stop the automatic scanning Or if you have instruments on other COM ports then click the Skip to Next Port button to continue scanning on the next COM port Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Starting SpecView and Instrument Definition Detection 56 There is also auto detection for TCP IP If you encounter problems then check your wiring and instrument setup This is now setup Therefore you can now go straight to Configuration Mode 4 9 TCP IP Auto Detection TCP IP Auto Detection TCP IP Auto Detection for instruments connected via TCP IP works only with Instruments supporting Modbus TCP either natively or via an Ethernet Bridge Native instruments are ModMux MMTCP xxx range Honeywell HC900 Honeywell TrendView Recorder Eurotherm Chessell 5000 recorder Ethernet Bridges allow any Modbus RTU device to be communicated with by Modbus TCP IP Some examples of these Bridges are ModMux TCPCONV Lantronix CoBox Honeywell Ethernet bridge The Modbus protocol specifies a Slave Address for RS422 485 devices this is the address of the instrument
350. t will probably not appear in the file The reason for this is that the last known value for the variable must be available at the time the Line Writer needs to write the line The Line Writer cannot read the value over comms because this may take several seconds or minutes in cases of timeouts with bad comms By putting the value on a GDW SpecView will usually have the value available The line written always has a lt CR gt and lt LF gt automatically added to the end but these can also be added at any point in the line to generate multiple lines Use the Control Codes drop down menu to add typical control codes such as lt HT gt Horizontal Tab but for the more obscure codes type the decimal code into the Special Characters box and click Add Code These codes may be required for example for printer control or for other non SpecView software to pick up and process such as Visual Basic programs See below for a list of ASCII special characters or search the web for ASCII character codes Dec Code Dec Code 00 NUL 16 SLE 01 SOH 17 CS1 02 STX 18 DC2 03 ETX 19 DC3 04 EOT 20 DC4 05 ENQ 21 NAK 06 ACK 22 SYN 07 BEL 23 ETB 08 BS 24 CAN 09 HT 25 EM 10 LF 26 SIB 11 VT 27 ESC 12 FF 28 FS 13 CR 29 GS 14 SO 30 RS 15 Sl 31 US To write to a filename which is specified by the date As already stated the filename used by the Line Writer must not contain spaces which would happen if the date format was left as A B d Y the date
351. ta Logging in detail Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 253 SpecView User Manual 24 10 Decimal Places Decimal Places Specifying the number of decimal places for Variables is done in a number of places For Instrument Variables For Modbus Instruments is it specified in the Instrument s address specification Also ensure the instrument variables are using the correct scaling For any Variables being displayed on a GDW Select the value on the GDW just the XXX which may need to be un grouped from its neighbor Then use the Dynamic Attributes menu command from the Edit menu This will need to be done for EACH occurrence of this variable on EACH GDW On Trend charts To display more than one decimal place for values on a Trend chart use Trend DP Override on Preferences Runtime In Log Report CSV files This is detailed under Log Reports Specifying decimal places 24 11 Dongle Dongle The dongle is a copy protection key available from your SpecView distributor that is required for all versions of SpecV lew There are 2 types of dongle available USB For connection to a USB port Parallel For connection to the parallel printer port of the computer It will not affect the operation of the printer port The dongle is programmed for different versions and options and may be upgraded at any time Although the dongle is connected to either a USB port or the printer port and therefore not apparently involved w
352. tactable over the network it will not at this stage check to see if it is running as a SpecView Local Modem Select the Modem to be used from the list and enter the number to dial in the Call box This is detailed in SpecView Networking via Modem Redial attempts Default 1 The number of times the connection will be tried before giving up Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 35 SpecView User Manual Reconnect on fail Default Off Whether the connection will automatically try to reconnect if it fails Timeout Default 25 secs The number of seconds that SpecView Remote will wait for a reply from SpecView Local before timing out Inactivity timeout Default 5 mins In the event of a network failure this is the number of minutes after which the connection will be dropped A value of 0 is not allowed In addition Auto log off Default off When checked the user will be logged off after the Inactivity timeout period if there has been no user activity such as clicking buttons When it is unchecked the user will not be logged off the connection will remain open indefinitely This is useful if the Remote machine is likely to be left unattended Update rate Default 2 secs This is the rate at which the Remote will update from the Local Reducing this time will increase network traffic but will mean that the Remote will be more tightly in sync with the Local Packet size Default 1000 bytes This is the max
353. tart This turns on a SpecView Boolean which is watched by the Strategy Controller The actions GDW Control Swap to another GDW Parameters Alter Value Interactively set SpecView ready to receive keyboard or BarCode input Method 1 is generally preferred as it can be used with no operator action For method 1 the BarCode scanner interface reads from the Serial port until a lt CR gt is received and then passes that into SpecView as a String Variable SpecView does not transmit anything it just accepts characters from the Serial port and stores them into the String variable when a lt CR gt Is received The Strategy controller can be set to watch for any change in the string and then execute the required actions Setting up SpecView with a serial port BarCode scanner To use a BarCode scanner the Generic BarCode Driver must be enabled on the dongle From the Variables List click Show New Find Generic BarCode and create a Generic BarCode Scanner Enter the correct COM port that it is connected to However any address can be used such as 0 Yanables E List Uptions Show Defined OPC Add ltem Properties Generic Bartode Aiseneric Barcode Scanner o Generic Modbus Onis ll Moo Aa The reason the address is not significant is because it is only possible to connect a single BarCode scanner to a given COM port If further instruments are required then SpecView s Multiport option will need to be ena
354. ted 2uto O nine Countdown until auto online bo DEFAULT 33 Stop countdowr Networking Remote Automatic Configuration Test Comme for NEWW contig Archiwe Restore Archive Restore New Manual Configuration Refresh E sil Start in REMOTE Made Seconds This will display the Configurations Found dialog box If a dongle is connected the Configurations Found dialog box will be displayed directly If you have an instrument connected then go to Automatically detect instruments below Alternatively if you have no instrument connected you can still configure SpecView by clicking the New Manual Configuration button and then going to Manual Configuration 2 3 Quick Start Manual Configuration Quick Start Manual Configuration If you have no instrument connected clicking on New Manual Configuration will display the Input Required dialog box Input Required x Enter name for new Config DEFAULT keyboard Lancel Enter a name for the configuration SpecView will create a sub folder with this name in the SpecView folder which is normally C SV32 the name you enter should follow the Windows file naming rules and should not be too long Remember this name This folder will be where all your log files and configuration files will be stored Log Reports will also be stored here unless another folder is specified When you have entered a name for the configuration and clicked OK this w
355. the Current Time box Event Log Lal Description Tine Stamp Program End 4cton KKKAAAAAAA Parameters Download Specific Value o Date o NMewAlarm a AnyvAlarm o Passwordllser o PasswordLewel o PasswordTime User Variables Parameter to Alter Specviemw Program Stop Time DateTime Set Value m Current Time a Program Start Time Program Stop Time Value ar Booth 1 Control Step 7 Define another action to generate the log report Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 190 Event Log Cancel Description Generate Log File Action Logaina Convert Specific Log File Format Booth 1 Standard Report Click the Add button again on the Action side of the box Enter a description and select Logging Convert Specific Log File Format as the action type Choose the log format you defined in Step 2 Click OK The Strategy Engine Setup box should now look like this Event O10 Watch Program Start O11 Program End Generate Log Report Add of edt Delete up Co List Copy lt Help E OK The setup is now complete Click OK to save the Strategy Strategy events in SpecView are Edge Triggered This means that the event becomes true when SpecView sees that occurrence of the event conditions When SpecView is started either by starting the program or by going into Runtime Mode from Configuration Mode all th
356. the Debug files created in Mb A good size to use is 20Mb e No of files O This is the maximum number of Debug files of the above size that will be created A good number to specify is 10 e Enable Strategy Debug Disabled e Special Mode 0 Disabled e Special Mode 1 Disabled e Special Mode 2 Disabled e Special Mode 3 Disabled e Special Mode 4 Disabled e Old Ordering Disabled e Disable Invalid Ports Enabled If you find a problem with SpecView amp you call a SpecView representative you may be asked to set the Debug Mode to a specific value set File Size amp No of files to appropriate values Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Preferences 158 Then do whatever it was that you did previously to cause the problem then immediately EXIT SpecView Send your SpecView Representative all the files that have a name starting with SVData from C SV32 Remember to set Debug Mode back to zero afterwards Full list of Preferences 12 Passwords 12 1 Passwords Overview Passwords NOTE Passwords are optional If you do not need them skip this section SpecView has the facility of password protection which can be used as detailed below Up to 5 levels of password access Any item may be password protected Adjustable inactivity timeout Hierarchical or Non hierarchical operation Menu command blocking Window controls or PC key blocking Setting up the Password system is the last thing to be do
357. the checkboxes for Network amp Modem are checked e Use the User Setup command from the Remotes menu to setup username s and password s On the Remote which is the computer connected to the Local via the network elf using a Modem connection then first ensure that the Modems are correctly configured e On the Configurations Found dialog click the Remote button e Click New and create a new connection e Click Connect To check it is all working Check instrument values are updating as expected On the Local use the View Connected Users menu command from the Remotes menu Connections for SpecView Networking SpecView Networking Local SpecView Networking Remote SpecView Networking Via Modem Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 31 SpecView User Manual SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Remote SpecView Networking Runtime Functions on Local SpecView Networking Troubleshooting SpecView Networking Minimum Requirements It is also possible to have SpecView Remote start automatically when the computer is started using SpecView s Command Line options To do this 1 Edit the shortcut properties of the SV32 icon on the desktop to add r lt connection name gt For example C SV32 sv32 exe r Factory Floor 2 Copy the shortcut to the Startup folder 3 2 SpecView Networking Local SpecView Networking Local A dongle copy protection key with the Networking Option enabled must be connected t
358. the report format When creating a new format click Add to format list If you edit an existing format you can save the edits by clicking Replace Format OR save as a new format by editing the name and clicking Add to format list Choosing Variables Select the variables you want in this report Click on the ones you want and then click Add gt If you select one you do not want click on it again to de select it The order in the Order In Report window is the order of columns in the text file produced when the report is generated Be aware that if the intention is to load the Log Report into Excel Excel has a limit of 256 columns Log Report Include Alarm Event Log To get a printable report of either the event log or alarm log check these boxes W Include Alarm Log Sm will OEE a Comma Separated Variable file using the same name as defined in the Output File Name but with the extension cse events amp csa alarms The files will be in the location specified in the Output File Path Output File Name NOTE Standard file naming conventions must be followed Long file names are supported if the name is taken from a SpecView text variable All log files are in the format Comma Separated Variable format Extensions used are csv for values cse for events csa for alarms Option 1 default Select up to the first six characters of the file name Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Data Logging 170 Choose
359. this menu to open the Recipe Manager for this GDW The Recipe Manager can be displayed by the Recipe Show Recipe Manager button attribute 5 11 6 Alarms Menu Alarm Event Menu Alarm Event Password Optic Mew Alarm Windom Reser nao Poston View Event Window Use this menu to display the Alarm Window which list the Alarms which have occurred When the Alarm Window is displayed it can be resized SoecView remembers the last position and size If the Alarm Window is not visible use the Reset Window Position menu command The alarm list can be displayed by the Alarms Show Alarm List button attribute The Alarm Window can be disabled using the Preferences Alarm However the Alarm Window can be viewed from the Alarm Event menu when desired NOTE that with the Alarm Window set to not pop up there is no other indication from Spec View that the alarm has occurred Use the SpecView NewAlarm variable or your own variables to warn the user by some other means The Alarm Window position can be re set using the Preferences Settings Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 79 SpecView User Manual View Alarm Window Use this menu function to display the list of current and old alarms Reset Window Position If the Alarm Window has been dragged off the screen use this menu command to reset the position The Alarm window position can also be reset using Preferences Settings View Event Window Displays the list of events reco
360. tially created by this import facility so for example a Specview configuration autodetected up to build 831 or an HC900 created manually cannot subsequently be updated by this routine e When Update is selected a check is made on the HC900 elements already defined in the SpecView configuration and if there is only one then the IP address of the HC900 becomes uneditable If there is more than one HC900 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 67 SpecView User Manual then the address is prompted for to indicate which HC900 is to be updated If there is any doubt then cancel out and check carefully in the Variables list to see which HC900 needs to be updated e Updating from a Fixed Modbus Map to a Custom Modbus Map or vice versa is allowed but the update routine may create duplicate instruments especially variables and Tags as these are defined differently in the two types of Map If variables and or Tags have already been used on screens from the Fixed Modbus Map file then keep using those otherwise start with the new ones for all future tags and variables used on screens inside Specview e f Create Instrument Views on screen is checked then any newly defined instruments in the new Modbus Map file will be added to the current screen e f instruments or parameters have been renamed during the import those changes may not be reflected in the labels that may have been placed on any screens although the actual varia
361. tie earreee ao ee ae sn ceca och cccua ce nnmnnn nnmnnn nnna 118 Elipse Drawing TOA na 118 Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 SpecView32 Main Help Polygon Drawing Tool ccooomnonananccnnncnonocanannnnnos Bitmaps On a GDW 0 eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Bitmap Properties cccccccconncnannnccnnnenonananannnnnos Textona GDW oaeeo rite ese TOXEATIMDUTES cocino aetnanet Trend Chart Drawing Tool Bar Chart Drawing Tool cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Buttons Drawing on a GDW 6 4 Button Attributes amp Strategy Controller Actions Available Attributes Actions Alarm OY OH ee eee ete Alarms Show Alarm List Events Show Event List GDW Control Close this and Swap To GDW GDW Control Close this Screen GDW Control Swap to another GDW GDW Control Toggle Full Screen Mode GDW Control ZOOM n concccccnncncncnccncnnnnnnnnanans GDW Control Zoom Out GDW Control Print Screen History Start Replay cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Logging Convert Specific Log File Format Logging OMOT isis Logging Purge Log Files Logging Show File Convert Manager Parameters Alter Value Interactively Parameters Copy From To Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Math Function Parameters Show Full Parameter List Password Log In or Log Out Recipe Download Specific Recipe Recipe Show Recipe Manager Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Mode Recipe Show Recipe Manager Read Only Send To Mode
362. tly selected gt CSV If a folder is not specified then the recipe CSV file will be imported from the current configuration folder Alternatively use the Browse button to select a folder and file to import from The file selected must be in CSV format and have been exported using the Export button from within SpecView When you click the OK button you will be prompted to discard any outstanding changes Then the recipe CSV file will be read Each line representing a recipe item is validated to ensure that it can be imported correctly If not then an error is displayed and you may cancel the import if required The number of recipe items being imported is checked if it does not match the items currently in recipe then you are prompted If there are fewer then the remainder will have their values set to No Change Extra items in the CSV file will be ignored Recipe Export The Export button is only available once a recipe to be exported has been selected on the Recipe Management screen The Export will prompt for a file name the default will be the lt name of the recipe gt CSV If a folder is not specified then the recipe CSV file will be saved in the current configuration folder Alternatively use the Browse button to select a folder and file to save to Editing the exported recipe The recipe CSV file can be edited before importing it back into SpecView This can be done using MS Word or a text editor such as Notepad or WordPad as well as
363. to select it Do NOT double click On the Object Menu select Fill Color Choose the color from the palette Bar Chart Top Left and Bottom Right Values Sets the minimum and maximum values of the displayed chart For Variables Deviation Output Power with heat cool set the Bottom Right value to a negative number Bar Chart Color When Up Left and Down Right Sets the color for the value part of the chart 10 Recipes 10 1 Recipes Overview Recipes A Recipe is when SpecView saves values of selected variables that you can write to so that they can be later reloaded to the connected instruments Recipes give these benefits e Snapshot the current process values when a good product is being made e Exactly reproduce previous machine setup e Review and edit complex programmer profiles e Eliminate operator error in setting machine parameters e On screen display of which Recipe is loaded e Save and reload instrument setup parameters There are four steps to creating a recipe 1 In Configuration Mode Create a screen GDW and put all the variables on it that you wish to change using Recipe This screen can be thought of as a Recipe screen 2 And Select these variables for Recipe 3 In Runtime mode Create the sets of values 4 In Configuration mode Setup these sets of values to be used This could be by defining a button to do a button action for Recipe such as Recipe Download Specific Recipe or via the Strategy Controll
364. top Time SF Booth 1 Control Parameter to Alter Spec iew Program Start Time Value The dialog box should now look like this Strategy Engine Setup Event Acton JH O10 Watch Program Stark m Stamp Progam Start Step 5 Define the second Strategy Controller event that watches for the end of the program Click the Add button on the Event side of the box Enter a description Click the Choose button and select the variable to watch that will tell SoecView that the program is complete Select Equal To for the Test to perform Click the Set Value button and choose the appropriate value The box should look something like this depending on the variables you have chosen Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 189 SpecView User Manual Yariable Based Event x Description 1011 Watch Program End Log To Event Log Vale to wate 2A Booth 1 Control Program Status Booth 1 Control Program Status Current Y alue Equal To Hew Value Value to test against Lit Reset 1 Send Constant alye 7 C Other variable Event Control T Enable On Boolean Tru Auto Close M Close Disable Event F Startup Event Examples Step 6 Define an action to time stamp the program end Click the Add button on the Action side of the box Enter a description Choose Parameters Download Specific Value as the action type Select Program Stop Time and check
365. troller Busy 18024 Data Over Range 18025 Data Under Range 18026 Internal Instrument Error Burn Out 18027 Internal Instrument Error Unknown Seek Advice 18028 Channel or Loop Number incorrect or Internal IDF Error Seek advice from SpecView 18029 CPU Number Invalid 18030 Operator Panel Address Invalid 18031 Invalid Delimiter 18032 Invalid Time To Live 18033 Read To Write Only Parameter 18034 Protocol Type Invalid 18035 Invalid Time 18036 SV ValueNotPresent Some controllers notably Eurotherm return 0x8000 or 0x80008000 as a value when the parameter has not been set up or is not present in this particular model Therefore this is a warning rather than an error 18037 SV No Comms Back Off Some drivers such as the Modbus amp OPC drivers report errors but know that new values are imminent therefore they are really just warnings hence this error does not cause a Comms Back Off 18200 18500 Protocol Specific Error Codes 17 3 SpecView Generic Error Codes SpecView Generic Error Codes E Numbers E numbers are numbers associated with warning amp error messages within SpecView For example E12214 Local is not available or the connection failed They give a unique ID to a message such that even when the message has been translated into another language the E number will allow its meaning to be looked up These numbers are divided into 3 groups E12001 E16999 Numbers of messages within SpecView s main code E17001
366. ts and Variables Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 100 Menus and Toolbar Creating a background graphic Adding numeric values to a GDW Adding a Trend chart to a GDW Adding a Bar Chart to a GDW 6 2 5 Variables List Variables List The Variables List is used to Define and or edit connected instruments Add Instrument Views and or individual Numeric Values to the GDW Add SpecView pre defined variables to the GDW Create User Variables and then add them to the GDW Change the Variable Properties such as Scaling Offset a m Open the list by selecting Variables amp Instruments from the View menu OR click on the toolbar Double Click the name of an instrument to Rename it or to put an Instrument View on the GDW Click the symbol to expand that instrument s variables The list below shows the instruments defined in THIS configuration To add more instruments click the Show New button to display the list of available instruments in the database NOTE Please read Precautions Deleting and Creating Instruments before deleting Instruments List Options Show Mew F Include Name l Short List M Full Name Add ltem Properties of Specview ha ar Booth 1 control er Booth 1 prog If the Include Name box is checked in the Variables List dialog then the name of the variable will also be displayed on the GDW together with the value of the variable itself represented by XXX To r
367. tton from the Log File Convert Manager A Batch number can contain both letters and numbers so it can be also thought of as a Batch name or Batch ID Both SpecView Text User Variables and certain Instrument variables which are text strings Such as Recipe names can be used in this way Once a variable is marked as a Batch Tag from the Variables Properties dialog box the variable is watched by SpecView in Runtime any changes to the value are recorded Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 177 SpecView User Manual Properties for Name Information Instrument Name Spec view Instrument Type Specview Original Full Name Furnace Batch Original Short Name Furnacel Batch Mey Full Hame Fumace Batch Mew Short Name FumacelBatch Reset Attributes M Batch Tag i Allow DDE to alter value M Logged Apply Log To All Alen coral Short List Apply Short List To AI Each apply only affects Furnace Batch on Spec ew Cancel Vale mulled Gy scales then has other added OK Changing a Batch Tag from one value to another value effectively marks the end of one batch and the start of another batch Setting a Batch Tag to an empty string in other words clearing it so that it contains no characters will mark the end the batch without marking the start of another Note that an empty string will be displayed as by default this can be changed from Preferences Display A batch is not considered
368. type of variables logged for example text strings take more space than integers A typical variable logged every minute which is the default rate will take about 25KB of disk space per day So 100 variables will take about 2 5MB per day Logged data can be Archived together with the Configuration 13 4 Data Logging Rate Data Logging Rate By default data logging is running whenever SpecView is in Runtime Mode SpecView stores values of the selected variables at the Logging Rate Logging can be turned off by setting the rate to 0 The default rate is 60 seconds The rate may be changed using 1 The Preferences dialog box 2 The Button or Strategy Controller action Logging On Off The Preferences dialog box is used to permanently change the rate lt is accessed from the File menu in either Runtime Mode or Configuration Mode Preferences Display Recipe Runtime History Settings Alarm Logging Logfile Conversion Enabled M R ate secs En NOTE The new rate will NOT be used until the Runtime Mode is restarted l e you must go to Configuration Mode and back to Runtime for the change to take effect Using a Button Attribute or Strategy Controller event to change the rate is a temporary change The next time the Runtime Mode is entered the rate will return to that specified in the Preferences dialog box The current value for the logging rate is stored in the SpecView Variable LogRate This variable s initi
369. ue and ignore the bad value It should be noted however that SoecView does not approve of using such a process as it fools the end user into thinking that the current value is the last good value which could be considerably out of date Software Toolbox TOP Server This server allows you to monitor control a wide variety of instrument controllers PLCs see http www softwaretoolbox com store item_pages itempage_929 asp from http www softwaretoolbox com There are no known issues with this server Sunware s OPC Servers Allen Bradley SLC500 DF1 Protocol OPC Server As yet untested with SpecView 32 Mitsubishi A Type OPC Server As yet untested with SpecView 32 Mitsubishi FX Type OPC Server As yet untested with SpecView 32 Modbus RTU ASCII OPC Server As yet untested with SpecView 32 Nudam OPC Server As yet untested with SpecView 32 Omron C Series OPC Server This server allows you to monitor control Omron C Series instrument controllers see http www sunware com tw You must have SpecView 32 build 694 and onwards to use this server There are no known issues with this server 19 4 OPC Fequently Asked Questions FAQs OPC Frequently Asked Questions FAQs I cannot see any OPC buttons anywhere in SpecView You need to upgrade to the latest build of SpecView go to http www specview com The OPC Server want does not appear in SpecView s OPC Browser You should cancel out SpecView s OPC Browse
370. ul thought is given as to whether Remote users can change Write to variables or Acknowledge Alarms as they could be some distance away and oblivious to the subsequent effects of their change Setting Up SpecView Networking 3 3 SpecView Networking Remote SpecView Networking Remote The Remote computer s do not require dongles However the dialogs displayed will differ based on whether or not a dongle is connected When SpecView Remote is started without a dongle the user will be asked to run SpecView in either Remote or Demo mode Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 33 SpecView User Manual Spec iews2 Mo copy protection key dongle connected Start in REMOTE Made However if a dongle is connected the Configurations Found dialog box will have a Remote button Configurations Found Batch Run Auto Online Countdown until auto online bo DEFAULT 33 Stop countdown Networking Remote Automatic Configuration Test Comme for NEWW contig Archiwe Restore Archive Restore New Manual Configuration Refresh E sil Seconds When Remote mode is selected the Connection dialog is displayed Help Lancel The user can select which Local computer to connect to or click New or Edit to create or modify a connection Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 SpecView Networking 34 Descriptions f Network 3413 Browse Check
371. ument Format file Print to JPG Puts an image of the whole screen including the Windows task bar if it is visible not just the contents of the GDW to a JPG Jpeg format file The filename of the file that is created has the date and time in the format YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS JPG The file is written to the current Configuration folder If more than one request to Print to JPG is made at the same second then the file will be overwritten There is also the Button amp Strategy Controller action GDW Control Print Screen which allows JPG to be selected from the list Recently Used File List Shows the four last GDW s that were edited Clicking on one will open it NOTE If the GDW was in another configuration all dynamic links will be removed Do not open a GDW from another configuration unless you only want to use the background Restart SpecView Restarts SpecView as if the user had exited and started it again Exit SpecView Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 86 Shortcut Alt F4 Closes all GDW s and SpecView 6 1 3 Edit Menu Edit Menu Unda Ctrl Cut Etrie Eopy EH HE Paste Ctrl Delete el Replace SelectAll Etrit Properties Alt Enter Dinamic Attributes trio Color lMpnamicz Ctrl Insert New Object Links Object Undo Shortcut Ctrl Z NOTE Undo will only undo a move of an object Cut Shortcut Ctrl X Cuts the selected object and puts in on the Win
372. unt can be used together with the Line Writer How can make the color of things on a GDW change according to a value A variable s color can be made to change according to its own value or another variable s value for example a text string s color Warning Overheating could appear in red when a temperature reading is above a certain value Then set to white which would make it disappear otherwise In this example select the text string then choose Color Dynamics from the Edit menu Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 242 How can modify one of SpecView s Demo Configurations so that it will work with my instruments It is likely that the problem is caused by the instrument address es being incorrectly set In Configuration Mode click the Variables List tool then select the instrument s name and click the Properties button The address field will show the address that SpecView is using Either alter the address in SpecView or change the instrument s address according to the instrument manufacturer s instructions Modbus address format When I run a program using SpecView Run External Program the program s window is minimized It is possible to change this in the SETTINGS INI file in the configuration s folder Settings RunExtProgDispMode M Where the choices are M means start Minimized which is the default F means start using Full screen N means start in a Normal window T
373. urn it On Off On Set the button action to do a Math Function and subtract the Boolean from itself and store the answer in itself for example Copy From Bool1 Subtract Bool1 Copy To Bool1 What is the maximum value for an Integer or Number variable The ranges are detailed under SpecView User Variables How can a value be displayed on a GDW using scientific notation Showing mantissa amp exponent This is done using by setting the Dynamic Attributes of a variable on a GDW Opening a screen in Runtime mode with a Trend Chart the chart is always initially blank with no pen lines Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 248 What can be done about this Use the Auto open on Runtime menu command from the File menu to tell SpecView to open start this GDW when entering Runtime Mode Also when creating buttons to change screens use GDW Control Swap to another GDW to swap to another GDW screen without closing it and clearing the trace line s instead of using GDW Control Close this and Swap To GDW which is intended for use with infrequently used GDW screens such as setup screens that don t contain Trend Charts How can a screen GDW be printed to an Adobe PDF Portable Document Format file Firstly Adobe Acrobat or another program that can create PDF files needs to be installed on the PC Then there are 2 ways of doing this 1 By using either the Print or Print Setup menu
374. ut 2 Input olor hen Down Input 4 Input 4 input e f Grow Bottom Up Bottom Yale Bar Chart Variables List Choose the variable to be displayed on the chart Bar Chart Orientation Vertical charts grow up down with increasing values Horizontal charts grow left right with increasing values Growth Direction Determines the growth direction with increasing value Use the Grow Up and Down check box Left and Right for variables that can go negative such as Deviation Error and Output Power in heat cool controllers Bar Chart Click Bar Action If the variable is writeable checking this box will allow the variable to be changed by clicking on the chart Bar Chart Scales Shows a scale on the chart pu E Bar Chart Show Value in Bar Shows the numeric value of the Variable in the chart 100 0 NOTE Use a light chart color to make the numbers more visible Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 141 SpecView User Manual Bar Chart Font and Color Sets the Font and outline Colors for the Border Scales and Values shown on the chart NOTE To make the chart disappear when empty set this outline color to the same as the GDW Paper Color accessed from the View Menu Bar Chart Fill empty Color The color of the empty part of the chart is set by the Fill Color from the Object Menu Firstly ensure that the Bar Chart Setup dialog does not have the Transparent box checked Single Click the chart
375. uters simultaneously The Local user will be unaware that a remote user is accessing it other than by viewing the Remote Users Attached list by using the View Connected Users menu command from the Remotes menu Remote Users Attached List nine 3413 1192 168 1 39 Build Connection Duration Bran Bld 4745 32 08 19 2002 14 50 51 DueRx0 00kb TxO 25kb HOO MOO LOO HSO MSO LSO Iri John Bld 4745 32 08 19 2002 14 52 19 DueRx0 00 b Tx 51kb HOO MOO LOO HSO MSOLSO Iri Or via the Events Window as the Event Logger will record all Network Login and Network Logout events and all values sent to the instruments by the remote user Network Set Value The reporting of these events can be disabled using the Event Logging menu command on the Setup menu Time Occurred Type 161203 Network Logout Operator Gei 2 16 12 03 2 09 40 Amte Rec Ownld FURNACETSETUP 47104503 Operatorz 162 03 20937 Network SetValue Furmacel Furnacel Batch China 104503 Operator 160123 20934 Network SetValue Fumacel Pattern Hum 6 Operator 160203 2 09 48 Network SetValue Furnacel Seg Advance Advance Operator 1601203 2 09 25 Network SetValue Fumacel Hold On Operators 1601 03 0923 Network SetValue Furnace Pattern Mode Program Operators 16 12 03 Network Login Operator 1921608 1 9 3096 Access granted at re Cloze Setting Up SpecView Networking 3 4 SpecView Networking Via Modems SpecView Networking via Modem General In
376. variable name to select it and click Properties OR just right click the variable name Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 108 Properties for Mame Information Instrument Hame one Instrument Type 2400 Seres Original Full Name Process Value Original Short Hame PY Hew Full Hame Process Value Mew Short Hame Py Rezet Attributes lv Logged M Apply Log To ll lem sonata W Short List M Apply Short List To Al Each apply only affects Process Value on 2400 Seres Scaling are 00000 Offset 0 000000 ance Value is multipled by scale then has offset added Name Information Edits the names of variables such as alarms using the Variables Properties dialog box Example Change Alarm 1 Status to High Alarm Attributes Edits the attributes of a variable using the Variables Properties dialog box Check the Logged box to add a variable to Data Logging Check the Alarm box to have SpecView monitor this boolean as an alarm this option will be grayed out if this variable is not a boolean Check the Short List box to have the variable included in the Short List mode Note that this can be overridden on the Passwords GDW Setup dialog Checking all the Apply To All boxes will change the attributes on the same variables of ALL identical instruments in the configuration Scaling Scales a number with decimals real number using the Vari
377. ve a minimal configuration by using the New Manual Configuration button with just a single GDW displaying just one of the instrument variables which is causing trouble Alternatively create a new GDW in an existing configuration and put just one of the variables which is causing trouble out on to it Then using File gt Preferences disable Logging on the Logging tab disable Alarms on the Alarms tab and Strategy on the Strategy tab Ensure that none of your other GDWs have File gt Auto open on Runtime enabled NB Once the problem has been resolved these changes will need to be reversed To create the Debug file s follow the steps below If your instrument is NOT using the Modbus or Modbus TCP IP protocol then use DEBUG 1 Note Not all drivers support DEBUG 1 in which case you will see the error Driver commands not accepted if this occurs please contact your SpecView representative Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 61 SpecView User Manual If your instrument is using the Modbus or Modbus TCP IP protocol then use DEBUG 15 DEBUGSIZE 1 DEBUGAUTODEL 9 This will create up to nine 1Mb files To set these up From SpecView s Runtime mode use the Setup COM Port menu command from the Options menu click the appropriate tab for the port being used In the bottom left hand box enter DEBUG then in the next box enter either 1 or 15 appropriately then click the Add button COM Port Setup comi
378. video or with an outline box As for Recipe the highlight type is defined by the Select Invert check box in Preferences Recipe 12 4 Passwords User Control Passwords User Control HY SpecYiew SPECYIEW GDW File Edt Draw Object View Passwords Setup za E GOW Setup E A GN User Contral This is used to enter the names and passwords of the users of the system 1 The User Control menu command brings up the Password Setup Users box 2 Then click the Add or Edit buttons to get the Add Edit User Password box Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Passwords 162 Password Setup Users User Name Password Levelt Password Nancy Taylor Richard Cooper 3 n Steve Dickens kii Add Edit User Password Name Keyboard Level I Operator Password g Keyboard Add ee men Up to 5 levels of user access are provided use as many or as few as you wish NOTE Use only the levels that you know you need Too many levels can be counter productive The designations Operator and Configuration are provided only as a reminder that higher numbers mean a higher level of access in hierarchical mode 13 Data Logging 13 1 Data Logging Overview Data Logging Overview Data logging functions in SpecView are in two parts 1 Specifying which items to log to the hard disk 2 Using the logged data to create reports and replay GDW s Historical Replay option NOTE Data Logging is a bac
379. w How can avoid affecting communications throughput if some instrument s need to be turned off or disconnected for a reason There are 2 answers to this depending on whether the dongle has the Multiport option enabled If the Dongle has the Multiport option enabled then Set the COM port of the missing controllers to something else like COM2 That way all the failed reads amp timeouts won t affect the communication stream coming in from the other COM port If the Dongle hasn t got the Multiport option enabled then Go to File gt Preferences amp on the Runtime tab set Comms Back Off Multiplier to a larger number It is a trade off as to how high to set it because if it is very high then when the instruments are subsequently reconnected on it will take SpecView that long to notice Be aware that it ll also affect the retry timeout on the live instruments too so it is important to put the variables SpecView BadComms SpecView GoodComms SpecView CommsErrorCode SpecView CommsErrorltem on a screen somewhere amp when all the instruments are connected check that BadComms stays at zero if there is a weakness in instrument communication then increasing the Comms Back Off Multiplier would not be a good idea FAQ Index 23 4 FAQ SpecView Runtime FAQ SpecView Runtime Can monitor SpecView remotely Copyright SoecView 1994 2007 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ 240 Yes use SpecView Netwo
380. w 1994 2007 155 SpecView User Manual 11 8 Preferences Recipe Preferences Recipe Preferences settings for Recipe e Recipe Level Delay 1 10s 5 The delay between downloading each of the 99 Recipe levels e Recipe Retries 1 The number of times a Recipe download is attempted before reporting failure e Sequence Recipe Directory PC3000 Only The folder where the sequence Recipes are stored e Select Invert Disabled In Configuration Mode when the knife and fork button is clicked the Recipe values are highlighted by a box being drawn around each of them However on a very complex GDW screen layout the boxes may overlap too much So this feature has been provided to highlight the values using reverse video rather than a box This setting will also affect the highlight style used when selecting objects for Password access from the GDW Setup dialog Full list of Preferences 11 9 Preferences Startup Preferences Startup e Maximized Enabled Whether or not SpecView starts with its window using the whole screen e Configuration Timeout 20 The number of seconds to countdown on startup e Port 1 The default printer port on which to detect the dongle e Timing 0 This is a timing value for the dongle It is not recommended to change this e Auto Update of Parameter Lists Enabled Whether or not SpecView will read new values added to an instrument s definition It is not recommended to change th
381. w 1994 2007 Database Show Logging in Variables List Show Alarm in variables List List GD Dynamics to CS Save Logging Alarm Details Setup COM Ports Load Logging Alarm Details Set All items an this GDW as Logged Export Variables List Import Variables List 164 165 SpecView User Manual NOTE Log files are usually stored in the Configuration folder To store the files in another location on the same computer set the Path as described in FAQ Configuration To backup the files to a network drive use a Logfile Conversion triggered by a Strategy Controller event The Strategy Controller topic gives an example The amount of space taken up by log files depends on how often you log data and how many variables have been selected for logging Each numeric value logged to the files uses 14 bytes The SpecView logging system uses up to 6 files per day all with the prefix YY_DDD Where YY is the year number e g 03 for 2003 and DDD is the day within the year so 1st January is 000 and the 1st February is 031 LOG file Variables data IDX file Index file used in report conversion and Historical Replay LNM file Names of the logged variables ALM file Alarm data EVT file Event data BTC file BatchTag data Not all of these files may be present for a given day but all the files for that day MUST always be kept together as a set The exact size of log files depends on the
382. w Status Bar Resize Screen d Yanables amp Instruments 0m d Recipe Mode These are used to display the outlines of the portion of the screen that would be seen if the GDW were displayed onto a screen of that resolution This is particularly useful when creating a GDW for Remote access from a lower resolution screen to ensure that the items on a GDW are positioned appropriately The lines are shown at 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1152x864 1280x1024 1600x1200 The maximum dimensions of the grid shown in SpecView s Configuration mode is 2047x1498 However for a very large screen for example 3200x2400 it would still work because items can be drawn off the right hand side top edges of the grid The Show screen sizes enables disables this feature The Screen sizes line color and Screen sizes font allow the color font used for the lines to be customized Toolbar Toggles the Toolbar On and Off Status Bar Toggles the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen On and Off Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 93 SpecView User Manual NOTE Turning Off the Status Bar in Configuration Mode will hide it in Runtime Mode Resize Screen If the GDW was created on a computer with a different screen resolution it will be necessary to resize the GDW to fit the current resolution Resize 1024x768 800x600 Resize 800x600 640x480 Resize 640x480 800x600 Resize 800x600 1024x768 Resizes this GDW
383. ways initially blank with no pen lines What can be done about this How can a screen GDW be printed to an Adobe PDF Portable Document Format file How can make a Strategy Event which will keep firing all the time that something is true How can make something blink flash on screen How can position items on a screen amp align them to within a pixel amp stop them jumping to the grid How can make some text appear on the screen using the Strategy Controller when something happens How can run a Help HLP file from a button on the screen How can use COM ports 10 and above Why am I not seeing all the Instrument Parameters expect to see in the Variables List 23 2 FAQ Installation Upgrade FAQ Installation Upgrade Does SpecView work with Win95 98 NT 2000 Me XP Yes this is detailed in Minimum Requirements however SpecView does not work with Windows CE which is a reduced version of Windows used in Windows embedded devices Do need to send the dongle back in order to get it upgraded to to add further options such as adding the Strategy Controller option No once you have decided to upgrade the dongle and have raised a purchase order Use the Registration Info menu command from the Help menu Click Enable Further Options Write the Step 1 code which is generated on to the order and fax it to your SpecView distributor They will then give you the Step 2 code s b
384. with both a graphical component amp which also have input and or output values s such as a slider control where the inputs might be the maximum amp minimum values for the slider bar amp the output would be the position of the slider on the bar 3 Those with no graphical component which might for example do a calculation on some input values put the result into an output value ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control The addition of ActiveX controls has affected the Backward Compatibility of SoecView Configurations 15 2 ActiveX Method of Adding an ActiveX Control ActiveX Method of adding an ActiveX Control There are a number of steps to adding an ActiveX control to SpecView 1 Firstly decide which control is required amp ensure its functionality is fully understood having read the author s documentation 2 Install the required ActiveX control s following the installation procedure supplied with the control They cannot be installed from within SpecView 3 Use Object gt ActiveX Control gt Register Controls to see if the required controls are listed if not use the Register button to register them with SpecView 4 If the ActiveX control is one which has input and or output values s that need to be linked to SpecView s Instrument or User variables then the required instruments and or User variables will need to be defined in SpecView Active 5 Use the ActiveX tool on the toolbar and use the ActiveX cu
385. xec error code 3 The path for the file has been incorrectly specified WExec error code 11 The file specified is not in valid EXE file format NOTE Programs will be run minimized by default see below The reason that the default setting is Minimized is because this command was originally added in order to run programs to for example play a sound file where it would be inappropriate to display the program s window It is possible to change this in the SETTINGS INI file in the configuration s folder Settings RunExtProgDispMode M Where the choices are M means start Minimized which is the default F means start using Full screen N means start in a Normal window This setting will affect all programs run by SpecView from that configuration 6 4 31 SpecView Write Line to file printer SpecView Write Line to file printer This is also known as The Line Writer This Button Attribute will write a line of text allowing the writing of fixed text and SpecView variables into files Files can be appended to or recreated each time Click the Visual Editor button to edit the line to be printed Line Winter Filename DATA DAT Browse Strings for Append Replace C Aer Specview Text Command The time is 22S pecview Timez and he date is o pecy ew Date special Characters Control Codes Variables Add Cade a Choose all lines written have lt EA gt amp LF E Oox added to the end plis
386. y Any Any Any Any Any Repeat Repeat every E E Examples NOTE It is recommended to use this method to get a recurring event rather than use the Repeat Every function Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 ActiveX Controls 202 15 ActiveX Controls 15 1 ActiveX Overview ActiveX Overview ActiveX controls are self contained pieces of software which have a specific functionality amp purpose These controls can be added to SpecView configurations to enhance the functionality amp usability of SpecView The controls themselves are purchased from the author of the controls not from SpecView Although a few controls written by SpecView will be available for purchase please see the SpecView website for details of these www specview com Examples of sets of ActiveX controls are Symbol Factory from Software Toolbox Inc see www softwaretoolbox com Instrumentation Studio for ActiveX from Century Soar Technology Co Ltd See www cstsoft com lt is also possible to develop ActiveX controls oneself although this requires a high degree of software development expertise Examples amp tutorials of a good range of ActiveX Controls written in Visual Basic can be seen at http pages cpsc ucalgary ca saul vb_examples In general there are 3 types of ActiveX control 1 Those with just a graphical component but with no values or functionality such as a pipe graphic 2 Those
387. y From Choose Cope To Choose Enter a description such as Time Stamp Program Start Then click the arrow to drop down the list of available actions Action Event Log Cancel Description Time Stamp Program Start Action Parameters Copy From To Alarm On Off Alarma Show Alarm List Events Show Event List GOW Control Chose this and Swap To GDM GOW Control Close this screen GOW Control Swap to another GD GOW Control Print Screen Logging Convert Specific Log File Format Logging On Off Logging Purge Log Files Parameters Alter Value Interactryely Parameters Copy From To Parameters Download Specific Value Parameters Math Function Recipe Download Specittc Recipe You want to set a value to a specific parameter so choose Parameters Download a Specific Value The Variables List appears Click the plus sign by SpecView the plus sign by User Variables the plus sign by DateTime Click on Program Start Time Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Strategy Controller 188 A copy the current time to this variable so click the Current Description Time Stamp Progam Start Event Log K Can Time checkbox as shown in the picture Click OK BE Parameters Download Specific Yalue a Date apelar a AnvAlarm a PasswordUser o PasswordlLevel a PassweordTime User Variables DateTime Set Wale e Current Time Program Start Time a Program S
388. y voice fax email to complete the upgrade Will either upgrading to a new version of SpecView or upgrading to add further SpecView options to the dongle affect my existing configurations No upgrading preserves existing configurations However as with all computer files taking regular backups is a good idea To do this use the Archive button on the Configurations Found dialog to save an entire configuration Can copy SpecView to another PC amp how can this be done Yes it may be copied freely because without a dongle connected it will only operate in Runtime Mode for 10 minutes or as a Remote Dongles are not limited to a specific PC and can be transferred In order to copy SpecView together with your Configuration and Log Files follow the steps below o First Install SoecView preferably using the latest version either from the CD or via download o Then use SpecView s Archive to create a backup file of the Configuration s sub folder this folder contains data only no software which is within SpecView s installation folder usually CASV32 o Copy this file to the new PC which has had the latest version of SpecView installed and use SpecView s Restore to install the data If the existing version of SpecView was the 16 bit version then read SpecView Upgrading from a previous version During installation get an error about DCOM There is a file which SpecView needs which doesn t exist in early versions of Windows 95
389. you click OK you will be asked to enter a default value lt is not possible to enter a default value for Date and DateTime variables Boolean default value box NOTE You can change the names of the boolean states from On Off to something more logical for your application by using the Properties of the defined variable List Options show Detined M Include Name Shor iist i Full Mames Spec iew Booll E Current Value Ott _ Auto Close Close Number with decimals default value box Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 104 105 SpecView User Manual List Options i show Deined 1 Ancla Hame 22 Loana SpecYiew Reall Fa Current Yalue Hew Value Auto Close Close Time default value box and Countdown Timer me o Variables oo List Uptions 0 Chow Mafra AA el Selb eee l i SpecYiew Countdown Current Value 7 00 00 00 HH MM 55 W Auto Close 7 Cloze Text default value box Ela Pinhead l ot hil 7 qSpecview Sting ES FP New Value Enter Batch ID Here 4 Keyboard Send F Auto Close Close Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 Configuring SpecView 106 Date and DateTime User Variables Date and DateTime User Variables can only have the current computer date and time copied to them by using the Parameters Download Specific Value button action in a Button Attribute or Strategy Controller Action 6 2 7 SpecVi
390. you want to display on the Bar chart and the appearance of it Select the variable you want to display from the variables list by clicking the 42 symbol next to the name of the instrument if it is not already open and then double clicking on the name of the variable NOTE If the name of the variable is NOT now shown on the right hand side of the Bar Chart Setup dialog box ensure that the variable was double clicked in the list not just single clicked Orientation defines how the value is displayed within the bar chart Vertical for up down Horizontal for left right Enter a Top Value and a Bottom Value You can choose the color of the bar whether the bar grows from the bottom up from the top down or both up and down And in the Scales section of the dialog box you can also choose whether to display a scale for the Bar chart and whether or not to show the value numerically within the bar oga Once you have made all the appropriate changes click OK and then click the Save tool again See how it works in Runtime Mode 2 11 Quick Start See how it works in Runtime mode Quick Start See how it works in Runtime Mode Al YR Click the Enter Runtime tool m Mode to see how the configuration you have just set up working in Runtime Your GDW screen should now look similar to this Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 29 SpecView User Manual Fie Logging Histor Recipe Alarm Event Password Remotes
391. your specific installation Manual amp Online Help version 3 04 for SpecView Version 2 5 Build 4832 32 20 2 USA Contact Numbers USA Contact Numbers Telephone 253 853 3199 Fax 253 853 3801 If dialing from outside the USA and Canada the country code is 1 Time zone PST GMT 8 Hours 20 3 UK Contact Numbers UK Contact Numbers Telephone 01825 766 566 Fax 01825 766 966 Time zone GMT Copyright SpecView 1994 2007 235 SpecView User Manual 20 4 Europe Contact Numbers Europe Contact Numbers Telephone 44 1825 766 566 Fax 44 1825 766 966 Time zone GMT 20 5 Internet Support Internet Support Sales and application information sales specview com Technical Support support specview com World Wide Web page http www specview com 21 Licensing in SpecView Licensing in SpecView SpecView uses a hardware dongle as a copy protection key SpecView 32 may be downloaded at any time and free of charge from the SpecView web site http www specview com When used without a dongle SpecView can run in either Remote Mode or Demo Mode In Demo Mode there is the following functionality restrictions e Each Runtime session is restricted to a 10 minute limit This timer is reset each time the user enters Configuration Mode and returns to Runtime Mode It is not necessary to restart either SpecView or the computer e The Strategy Controller is restricted to 2 events e Historical Repl
392. zet Attributes lv Logged M Apply Log To ll lem sonata W Short List M Apply Short List To Al Each apply only affects Process Value on 2400 Seres Scaling are 00000 Offset 0 000000 ance Value ts multipled by scale then has offset added All the variables on a GDW can be added to logging with a single command using the Set All items on this GDW as Logged menu command View Passwords Setup Window PCSO00 Help Fi es Event Lagging Strategy Controller Check COM Port Swap COM Ports Se ee eee S This will set as logged only those instrument variables which have been specifically put onto the GDW This feature is most useful when a GDW is frequently used with Historical Replay and it is desired that all the variables replay This is typical of an Overview screen NOTE However use caution For example if used on a GDW that has several hundred items for a ramp soak program all those items can be added to logging with a single mouse click But once selected the only way to remove them from logging is to use the Show Logging in Variables List method described above Creating Log Reports 13 3 Data Logging Disk Space Requirements Data Logging Disk Space Requirements The data is stored by SpecView in the Configuration Folder This location is can be changed but only with care read FAQ SpecView Configuration Copyright SpecVie

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents